2013 Chevrolet Traverse Owner

Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC 2nd Edition - 11/13/12 Black plate (1,1)
2013 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Trademarks and License

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Performance and Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-13
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-41 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-48 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-21
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-27
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-31
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-50
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-36
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
2013 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-2
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-18
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Special Application Vehicle Data Recording and
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Additional Maintenance
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Recommended Fluids, OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-14 OnStar Additional
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of Propriétaires Canadiens
the features found on your vehicle. A French language manual can be
For vehicles first sold in Canada, obtained from your dealer, at
substitute the name “General www.helminc.com, or from:
Motors of Canada Limited” for
The names, logos, emblems, Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and appears in this manual. ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited Keep this manual in the vehicle for savant:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, quick reference.
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and Helm, Incorporated
TRAVERSE are trademarks and/or Attention: Customer Service
service marks of General Motors 47911 Halyard Drive
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, Plymouth, MI 48170
or licensors.
Using this Manual
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific To quickly locate information about
vehicle either because they are the vehicle, use the Index in the
options that you did not purchase or back of the manual. It is an
due to changes subsequent to the alphabetical list of what is in the
printing of this owner manual. manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 22744238 B Second Printing 2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Danger, Warnings, and Notice: This means there is Symbols

something that could result in
Cautions property or vehicle damage. This The vehicle has components and
Warning messages found on vehicle would not be covered by the labels that use symbols instead of
labels and in this manual describe vehicle's warranty. text. Symbols are shown along with
hazards and what to do to avoid or the text describing the operation or
reduce them. information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
Danger indicates a hazard with a gauge, or indicator.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death. M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
Warning or Caution indicates a for additional instructions or
hazard that could result in injury or information.
A circle with a slash through it is a
death.
safety symbol which means “Do * : This symbol is shown when
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let you need to see a service manual
{ WARNING this happen.” for additional instructions or
These mean there is something information.
that could hurt you or other
people.
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart B : Engine Coolant Temperature } : Power

Here are some additional symbols O : Exterior Lamps / : Remote Vehicle Start
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more # : Fog Lamps > : Safety Belt Reminders
information on the symbol, refer to . : Fuel Gauge 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
the Index.
+ : Fuses _ : Tow/Haul Mode
9 : Airbag Readiness Light 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam t : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) Changer M : Windshield Washer Fluid
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls j : LATCH System Child
or OnStar Restraints
$ : Brake System Warning Light * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
" : Charging System : : Oil Pressure
I : Cruise Control g : Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Head Restraint Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Driver Information Center
Instrument Panel Passenger Sensing (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 1-22
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-23
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Initial Drive Information Steering Wheel Universal Remote System . . . 1-23
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Performance and Maintenance
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-24
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-25
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Driving for Better Fuel
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Vehicle Features Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Roadside Assistance
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-20 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Heated and Ventilated Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-21
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8‑10. 7. Exterior Lamp Controls on 16. Driver Information Center (DIC)
2. Turn and Lane-Change Lever. page 6‑1. Buttons. See Driver Information
See Turn and Lane-Change Fog Lamps on page 6‑5 (If Center (DIC) (Without DIC
Signals on page 6‑4 (Out Equipped). Buttons) on page 5‑29 or
of View). Driver Information Center (DIC)
8. Hood Release. See Hood on (With DIC Buttons) on
Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 10‑4. page 5‑24.
page 5‑4 (Out of View). 9. Parking Brake on page 9‑26. 17. Climate Control Systems on
3. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑11. 10. Data Link Connector (DLC) page 8‑1 (If Equipped).
4. Instrument Panel Storage on (Out of View). See Malfunction Dual Automatic Climate Control
page 4‑1. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑17. System on page 8‑4 (If
USB Port (Inside IP Storage) (If 11. Dome Lamp Override. Equipped).
Equipped). See Auxiliary SeeDome Lamps on page 6‑6. 18. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
Devices on page 7‑35. Instrument Panel Illumination Park on page 9‑18.
5. CD Player. See CD Player Control on page 6‑5. 19. Power Outlets on page 5‑8.
(Radio without Touchscreen) on 12. Cruise Control on page 9‑29.
page 7‑21 or CD Player (Radio
with Touchscreen) on page 7‑23. 13. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.
6. Infotainment on page 7‑1.
14. Horn on page 5‑4.
Navigation/Radio System (If
Equipped). See the infotainment 15. Steering Wheel Controls on
manual. page 5‑2 (If Equipped).
1-4 In Brief
20. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on Initial Drive

page 5‑5.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Information
Disable Button. See This section provides a brief
StabiliTrak® System on overview about some of the
page 9‑27. important features that may or may
Tow/Haul Button (If Equipped). not be on your specific vehicle.
See Tow/Haul Mode on For more detailed information, refer
page 9‑24. to each of the features which can be
Power Liftgate Button (If found later in this owner manual.
Equipped). See Liftgate on
page 2‑9. Remote Keyless Entry
Press K to unlock the driver door.
21. Heated and Ventilated Front (RKE) System
Press K again within five seconds
Seats on page 3‑8 (If The RKE transmitter is used to to unlock all remaining doors.
Equipped). remotely lock and unlock the doors
22. Hazard Warning Flashers on from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from Press Q to lock all doors.
page 6‑4. the vehicle.
Lock and unlock feedback can be
23. Passenger Sensing System on personalized.
page 3‑30. To open or close the liftgate, press
and hold 8 until the liftgate
begins to move.
Press L and release to locate the
vehicle.
In Brief 1-5
Press L and hold for more than The engine will continue to run for Door Locks
two seconds to sound the panic 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote To lock or unlock a door manually:
alarm.
start can be extended only once. . From the inside use the door
Press L again to cancel the panic lock knob on the window sill.
alarm. Canceling a Remote Start
. From the outside turn the key
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) To cancel a remote start:
toward the front or rear of the
System Operation on page 2‑2. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle, or press the K or Q
vehicle and press and hold / button on the Remote Keyless
Remote Vehicle Start until the parking lamps turn off. Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Starting the Vehicle . Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
With this feature the engine can be
started from outside of the vehicle. . Turn the ignition switch on and
then off.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle. See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑4.
2. Press and release Q.
3. Immediately after completing
Step 2, press and hold / until
the parking lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
1-6 In Brief
Power Door Locks K: Press to unlock the doors.

Q: Press to lock the doors.
See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.
Liftgate
To open the liftgate the vehicle must
be in P (Park). Press the touch pad
under the liftgate handle. To close
the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull
strap as an aid.
Power Liftgate . Press O.
Base Model On vehicles with a power liftgate, . Press the touch pad on the
the vehicle must be in P (Park) to
outside liftgate handle.
operate it.
For more information see Liftgate on
. Press and hold 8 on the page 2‑9.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
Uplevel Model
In Brief 1-7
Windows Seat Adjustment 3. Try to move the seat back and

forth to be sure it is locked in
Manual Seats place.
Move the lever (2) up or down to
raise or lower the seat.
Use the lever (3) to adjust the
seatback.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3
and Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑5.
Power Seats
Uplevel Shown, Base Similar

Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to 1. Seat Adjustment Handle
raise it. 2. Driver Seat Height Adjustment
For more information, see Power Lever
Windows on page 2‑19. 3. Seatback Lever
To adjust a manual seat:
1. Lift the handle (1) under the seat
to unlock it.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position, and then release the 1. Seat Adjustment Control
handle (1). 2. Seatback Control
1-8 In Brief
3. Lumbar Control Memory Features Second Row Seats

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the
control (1) forward or rearward.
. Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control (1) up
or down.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the rear of the control (1)
up or down.
. Adjust the seatback by tilting the
top of the control (2) forward or If available, the controls on the The second row seat can be folded
rearward. driver door are used to program and to access the third row. Pull the
recall memory settings for the driver sliding seat lever forward; the seat
See Reclining Seatbacks on seat and outside mirrors. cushion folds, and the seat slides
page 3‑5. forward.
See Memory Seats on page 3‑6 and
. Increase or decrease lumbar Vehicle Personalization (With DIC See Rear Seats on page 3‑9.
support by pressing the front or Buttons) on page 5‑41.
rear of the control (3).
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
In Brief 1-9
Third Row Seats Heated and Ventilated

The third row seatbacks can be Seats
folded forward, and the seats can
be removed.
To fold the third row seatback:
1. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons

3. Pull up on the release lever on Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
the back of the seat.
Similar
4. Push the seatback forward to
If available, the buttons are on the
lay flat.
center console. To operate, the
See Third Row Seats on page 3‑11. engine must be running.
I : If available, press to heat the
seatback only.
2. Disconnect the rear safety belt

H : If available, press to cool the
entire seat.
mini-latch using a key in the slot
on the mini-buckle, and let the J: Press to heat the seat and
belt retract into the headliner. seatback.
Stow the mini-latch in the holder
in the headliner.
1-10 In Brief
Press the button once for the Safety Belts Passenger Sensing
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
System
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and one
for the lowest.
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3‑8.
United States
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
Refer to the following sections for
adjusted properly.
important information on how to use
To achieve a comfortable seating safety belts properly: Canada and Mexico
position, change the seatback . Safety Belts on page 3‑13. The passenger sensing system will
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head . How to Wear Safety Belts turn off the front outboard
restraint height in the proper Properly on page 3‑15. passenger frontal airbag under
position. certain conditions. No other airbag
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑16. is affected by the passenger
See Head Restraints on page 3‑2 . Lower Anchors and Tethers for sensing system.
and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3. Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑44.
In Brief 1-11
The passenger airbag status 3. Return the switch to the center Folding Mirrors
indicator will light on the instrument to deselect the mirror.
For vehicles with manual folding
panel when the vehicle is started.
mirrors, push the mirror toward the
See Passenger Sensing System on
vehicle. Pull the mirror out to return
page 3‑30.
to its original position.
Mirror Adjustment For vehicles with power folding
mirrors:
Exterior Mirrors
Uplevel Model
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Press (1) or (2) to select a
mirror.
2. Press the control pad to adjust
the mirror. 1. Press (1) to fold the mirrors out
Base Model
3. Press (1) or (2) again to deselect to the driving position.
To adjust the mirrors: the mirror. 2. Press (2) to fold the mirrors in to
1. Press o or p to select a mirror. the folded position.
2. Press the control pad to adjust See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑16.
the mirror.
1-12 In Brief
Interior Mirror Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Adjustment Adjustment Dome Lamps
Adjust the rearview mirror to clearly The dome lamps are in the
view the area behind the vehicle. overhead console and above the
Manual Rearview Mirror rear seat passengers.
For vehicles with a manual rearview The dome lamps come on when a
mirror, push the tab forward for door is opened, unless the dome
daytime use and pull it for nighttime lamp override button is pressed in.
use to avoid glare from the To manually turn them on, turn the
headlamps from behind. See instrument panel brightness control
Manual Rearview Mirror on clockwise to the farthest position.
page 2‑18.
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror
To adjust the steering wheel:
The mirror will automatically reduce
the glare from the headlamps from 1. Pull the lever down.
behind. The dimming feature comes 2. Move the steering wheel up
on when the vehicle is started. See or down.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
on page 2‑18.
closer or away from you.
4. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
In Brief 1-13
Dome Lamp Override Exterior Lighting
The exterior lamp control is on the

instrument panel, to the left of the
AMBIENT OFF (If Equipped): steering wheel.
The dome lamp override button is Press the button to turn the ambient
lights off. Press the button again to O : Turns the automatic light
next to the exterior lamps control. control on or off.
turn ambient lights on.
E DOME OFF: Press the button AUTO: Automatic operation of the
and the dome lamps remain off Reading Lamps
headlamps at normal brightness and
when a door is opened. An indicator Press the button near each lamp to other exterior lamps.
light on the button comes on to turn them on or off.
show that the dome lamps are off. ; : Manual operation of the
Press the button again so the dome For more information, see: parking lamps and other exterior
lamps come on when a door is . Dome Lamps on page 6‑6. lamps.
opened. . Instrument Panel Illumination 5 : Manual operation of the
Control on page 6‑5. headlamps and other exterior
lamps.
1-14 In Brief
See: Windshield Wiper/Washer Windshield Washer

. Exterior Lamp Controls on The windshield wiper/washer lever J FRONT : Press the button at
page 6‑1 is located on the left side of the the end of the lever to spray washer
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/ steering column. fluid on the windshield.
Automatic Headlamp System on Turn the band with the wiper symbol Rear Window Wiper/Washer
page 6‑2 to control the windshield wipers. The rear wiper and rear wash button
. Delayed Headlamps on page 6‑3 is located on the instrument panel
below the climate control system.
Z : Press to turn the rear wiper on
and off. The wiper speed cannot be
changed.
Y : Press to spray washer fluid on
the rear window. The window wiper
8: Use for a single wiping cycle. will also come on.
OFF : Use to turn the wipers off. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4 and Rear Window Wiper/
6: Delays wiping cycle. Turn the Washer on page 5‑5.
band up for more frequent wipes or
down for less frequent wipes.
LO: Slow wipes.
HI: Fast wipes.
In Brief 1-15
Climate Controls
1. Fan Control 5. Air Delivery Mode Control

2. REAR (Rear Climate Control) 6. Air Conditioning
3. Temperature Control 7. Rear Window Defogger
4. Recirculation
1-16 In Brief
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode
ERS mode allows you to choose the
top-gear limit of the transmission
and the vehicle's speed while
driving downhill or towing a trailer.
The vehicle has an electronic shift
position indicator within the
instrument cluster. When using the
ERS mode a number will display
next to the L, indicating the current
gear that has been selected.
1. Driver and Passenger Side 9. Recirculation To use this feature:
Temperature Controls 10. Air Conditioning 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).
2. Air Delivery Mode Controls See Climate Control Systems on 2. Press the plus/minus button on
3. SYNC (Synchronized page 8‑1 or Dual Automatic Climate the shift lever, to increase or
Temperature) Control System on page 8‑4 (If decrease the gear range
Equipped). For more information available.
4. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
about the rear climate control, see See Manual Mode on page 9‑23.
5. REAR (Rear Climate Control) Rear Climate Control System on
6. Defrost page 8‑8 or Rear Climate Control
System (with Rear Seat Audio) on
7. Rear Window Defogger page 8‑9.
8. Fan Control
In Brief 1-17
Vehicle Features © or ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

4 : Change the display between the
Radio(s) radio station frequency and the
time, if equipped. While the ignition
Radio without Touchscreen is off, press 4 to display the time.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Operation (Radio without
Touchscreen) on page 7‑6 or
Operation (Radio with Touchscreen)
on page 7‑8.
For vehicles with a Rear Audio
Controller (RAC). See Rear Audio
Controller (RAC) on page 7‑45.
For vehicles with a Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE). See the
infotainment manual.
O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between

and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or SiriusXM®, if equipped.
decrease the volume. f: Select radio stations.
1-18 In Brief
Storing a Favorite Station Setting the Clock

A maximum of 36 stations can be To set the time and date:
stored as favorites using the six 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
softkeys located below the radio ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
station frequency tabs and by using
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to press O to turn the radio on.
go through up to six pages of 2. Press H to display HR, MIN,
favorites, each having six favorite
MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,
stations available per page. Each
month, day, and year).
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM 3. Press the pushbutton located
stations. under any one of the labels to be
changed.
See AM-FM Radio (Radio without
Touchscreen) on page 7‑11 or 4. To increase or decrease the time
AM-FM Radio (Radio with or date, turn f clockwise or
Touchscreen) on page 7‑12. counterclockwise.
See Clock (Radio with Touchscreen)
on page 5‑8 or Clock (Radio without
Touchscreen) on page 5‑7.
In Brief 1-19
Radio with Touchscreen D : Press to go to the Home Page.

See “Home Page” in Operation
(Radio without Touchscreen) on
page 7‑6 or Operation (Radio with
SRCE: Press to change the audio
source to AM, FM, SiriusXM® (if
equipped), CD, USB, iPod®,
or AUX.
FAV: Press to display the favorite
list or add a favorite. See Operation
© SEEK or SEEK ¨ : Seek or scan
stations and tracks. See Operation
PUSH/O : Press to turn the system AUX Port: 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Touchscreen) on page 7‑8.
on and off. Turn to adjust the connection for external audio / BACK: Press to return to the
volume. devices. previous screen in a menu.
Z: Press to eject a disc from the PUSH/SEL: Turn to manually find a Storing Radio Station Presets
CD. See CD Player (Radio without station or highlight a menu
Touchscreen) on page 7‑21 or CD selection. Press to select a Up to 30 preset stations can be
Player (Radio with Touchscreen) on highlighted selection. stored. AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if
page 7‑23. equipped) can be mixed.
1-20 In Brief
1. From the AM, FM, or SiriusXM

. Press OK or the Back screen SiriusXM Satellite Radio
main page, press and hold any button to save the adjustments Service
1−5 buttons or one of the preset that were made.
screen buttons at the bottom of SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
Set Date: based in the 48 contiguous United
the screen. After a few seconds,
a beep is heard and the new
. Press the up or down arrows to States and 10 Canadian provinces.
preset information displays on increase or decrease the Month, SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
that screen button. Day, and Year settings. variety of programming and
. Press and hold to quickly commercial-free music, coast to
2. Repeat for each preset. coast, and in digital-quality sound.
increase or decrease the date
Setting the Time and Date settings. A fee is required to receive the
SiriusXM service.
Press Settings on the Home Page, . Press OK or the Back screen
button to save the adjustments Refer to:
then press the Set Time or Set Date
settings screen button to display the that were made. . www.siriusxm.com or call
different options for setting the time See Clock (Radio with Touchscreen) 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).
and date. on page 5‑8 or Clock (Radio without . www.xmradio.ca or call
Set Time: Touchscreen) on page 5‑7. 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
. Press the up or down arrows to See Satellite Radio (Radio without
increase or decrease the Hours, Satellite Radio Touchscreen) on page 7‑15 or
Minutes, AM, PM, or 24 hr on Vehicles with a SiriusXM® satellite Satellite Radio (Radio with
the clock. radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM Touchscreen) on page 7‑19.
. Press and hold to quickly satellite radio subscription can
increase or decrease the time receive SiriusXM programming. Portable Audio Devices
settings. This vehicle may have an auxiliary
input on the radio faceplate and a
USB port in the instrument panel
storage area. External devices such
In Brief 1-21
as iPods®, laptop computers, MP3 Steering Wheel Controls to turn the sound on. For vehicles
players, CD changers, USB storage with OnStar® systems, press and
devices, etc. can be connected to hold for longer than two seconds to
the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm interact with those systems.
(1/8 in) input jack or the USB port For vehicles with Touchscreen,
depending on the audio system. press and hold to silence the
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑35. vehicle speakers only. Press again
to turn the sound on. Press to
Bluetooth® interact with OnStar® or Bluetooth
systems.
The Bluetooth® system allows users
with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile For vehicles with OnStar® systems.
phone to make and receive See OnStar Overview on page 14‑1.
hands-free calls using the vehicle c /x : Press to reject an
audio system and controls. incoming call, or end a current call.
Vehicles with audio steering wheel
The Bluetooth-enabled mobile controls could differ depending on SRCE: Press to switch between
phone must be paired with the the vehicle's options. Some audio the radio, CD, and for equipped
in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it controls can be adjusted at the vehicles, front auxiliary, and rear
can be used in the vehicle. Not all steering wheel. auxiliary.
phones will support all functions.
w or c /x : Press to select ¨ : Press to go to the next radio
See Bluetooth on page 7‑46. preset or favorite radio stations, station while in AM, FM,
select tracks on a CD or select or SiriusXM®.
tracks and navigate folders on an Press ¨ to go to the next track or
iPod® or USB device.
chapter while sourced to the
b /g : For vehicles without CD slot.
Touchscreen, press to silence the
vehicle speakers only. Press again
1-22 In Brief
Press ¨ to select a track or a folder + RES: Press briefly to make the Driver Information Center
when navigating folders on an iPod vehicle resume to a previously set
speed, or press and hold to
(DIC) (With DIC Buttons)
or USB device.
accelerate. To access the DIC, some vehicles
+ e or − e : Press to increase or to have buttons located on the
SET–: Press to set the speed and
decrease the volume. activate cruise control or to make instrument panel.
See Steering Wheel Controls on the vehicle decelerate.
page 5‑2. [ : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
Cruise Control speed from memory.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑29.
Infotainment System
If the vehicle has a base radio it is
V : Press to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or
included in this manual. See the
acknowledge messages on the DIC.
separate infotainment manual for
information on the connected radios, U: Press to customize the feature
audio players, phone, navigation settings on your vehicle. See
system, and voice or speech Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
recognition. There is also Buttons) on page 5‑41 for more
information on settings and information.
downloadable applications (if T: Press to display the oil life,
equipped). park assist on vehicles with this
T : Press to turn cruise control on feature, units, tire pressure readings
and off. The indicator comes on
when cruise control is on.
In Brief 1-23
on vehicles with this feature, and Keep the sensors on the vehicle's Universal Remote System
compass calibration and zone rear bumper clean to ensure proper
setting on vehicles with this feature. operation.
3 : Press this button to display See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
the odometer, trip odometers, fuel page 9‑31.
range, average economy, timer, fuel
used, and average speed. Power Outlets
Some vehicles do not have the The vehicle has 12-volt accessory
buttons shown, however some of power outlets which can be used to The Universal Home Remote
the menus can be viewed by using plug in electrical equipment, such as System allows for garage door
the trip odometer reset stem. a cell phone or MP3 player. openers, security systems, and
See Driver Information Center (DIC) home automation devices to be
The power outlets are located: programmed to work with these
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 5‑29
or Driver Information Center (DIC)
. On the instrument panel below buttons in the vehicle.
(With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑24. the climate controls.
See Universal Remote System on
. Inside the center floor console. page 5‑48.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . At the rear of the center floor
If available, this system uses console. Sunroof
sensors on the rear bumper to . In the rear cargo area. The ignition must be in ON/RUN,
assist with parking and avoiding ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained
objects while in R (Reverse). To use the outlets, remove the Accessory Power (RAP) must be
It operates at speeds less than cover. active to operate the sunroof and
8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audible See Power Outlets on page 5‑8. power sunshade. See Retained
beeps to provide distance and Accessory Power (RAP) on
system information. page 9‑18.
1-24 In Brief
Performance and Tire Pressure Monitor

Maintenance This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has a traction control
system that limits wheel spin, and
the StabiliTrak system that assists
with directional control of the vehicle
in difficult driving conditions. Both
systems turn on automatically every The low tire pressure warning light
time the vehicle is started. alerts to a significant loss in
Vent: Press the front or rear of the . To turn off traction control, press pressure of one of the vehicle's
switch to vent or close the sunroof. and release t located on the tires. If the warning light comes on,
instrument panel, and the stop as soon as possible and inflate
Express-open/Express-close: the tires to the recommended
From the closed position, press and appropriate DIC message
displays. See Ride Control pressure shown on the Tire and
release the rear or front of the Loading Information label. See
switch to express-open or System Messages on page 5‑37.
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9.
express-close the sunroof. . Press and release t again to The warning light will remain on until
For more information see Sunroof turn on the traction control the tire pressure is corrected.
on page 2‑21. system. The StabiliTrak system The low tire pressure warning light
remains on. may come on in cool weather when
For more information, see the vehicle is first started, and then
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑27. turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
may be an early indicator that the
In Brief 1-25
tire pressures are getting low and 2. If the vehicle has Driver 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
the tires need to be inflated to the Information Center (DIC) See Engine Oil Life System on
proper pressure. buttons: Press the vehicle page 10‑9.
The TPMS does not replace normal information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays.
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain Driving for Better Fuel
the correct tire pressures. If the vehicle does not have
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Economy
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
buttons: The vehicle must be in Driving habits can affect fuel
on page 10‑44.
P (Park) to access this display. mileage. Here are some driving tips
Press the trip odometer reset to get the best fuel economy
Engine Oil Life System stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING possible.
The engine oil life system calculates displays. . Avoid fast starts and accelerate
engine oil life based on vehicle use 3. If the vehicle has Driver smoothly.
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE Information Center (DIC) . Brake gradually and avoid
OIL SOON message when it is time buttons: Press and hold the set/
to change the engine oil and filter. abrupt stops.
reset button until “100%” is
The oil life system should be reset displayed. Three chimes sound . Avoid idling the engine for long
to 100% only following an oil and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL periods of time.
change. SOON message goes off. . When road and weather
Resetting the Oil Life System If the vehicle does not have conditions are appropriate, use
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, Driver Information Center (DIC) cruise control.
with the engine off. buttons: Press and hold the trip . Always follow posted speed
odometer reset stem until OIL limits or drive more slowly when
LIFE REMAINING shows conditions require.
“100%.” Three chimes sound
and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
. Keep vehicle tires properly
SOON message goes off. inflated.
1-26 In Brief
Combine several trips into a

OnStar®
.
single trip.
Roadside Assistance
.
Program If equipped, this vehicle has a
Replace the vehicle's tires with
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
the same TPC Spec number
that can connect to a live Advisor
molded into the tire's sidewall TTY Users (U.S. Only): for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
near the size. 1-888-889-2438 Connection, and Diagnostic
. Follow recommended scheduled Canada: 1-800-268-6800 Services. See OnStar Overview on
maintenance. page 14‑1.
Mexico: 01-800-466-0800
New Chevrolet owners are
automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance Program.
See Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Assistance Program (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑11.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Doors

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Keys and Locks
Windows Vehicle Security Keys
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Keys and Locks
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . .
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
2-13
{ WARNING
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-13
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 the ignition key is dangerous and
Exterior Mirrors
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) children or others could be
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 seriously injured or killed. They
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 could operate the power windows
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 or other controls or make the
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 vehicle move. The windows will
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 function with the keys in the
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8 ignition, and children or others
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Interior Mirrors could be caught in the path of a
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-18 closing window. Do not leave
Automatic Dimming Rearview children in a vehicle with the
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
ignition key.
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
If locked out of the vehicle, call

. Check the location. Other
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside vehicles or objects may be
Assistance Program (Mexico) on blocking the signal.
page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance . Check the transmitter's battery.
Program (U.S. and Canada) on See “Battery Replacement” later
page 13‑11. in this section.
With an active OnStar subscription, . If the transmitter is still not
an OnStar Advisor may remotely working correctly, see your
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar dealer or a qualified technician
Overview on page 14‑1. for service.
Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

The key is used for the ignition and (RKE) System
all door locks.
(RKE) System Operation
See Radio Frequency Statement on The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
The key has a bar-coded key tag page 13‑21 for information
that the dealer or qualified locksmith transmitter functions work up to
regarding Part 15 of the Federal 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
can use to make new keys. Store Communications Commission (FCC)
this information in a safe place, not rules and Industry Canada There are other conditions which
in the vehicle. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. can affect the performance of the
If it becomes difficult to turn the key, transmitter. See Remote Keyless
If there is a decrease in the RKE Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.
inspect the key blade for debris. operating range:
See your dealer if a replacement . Check the distance. The
key or additional key is needed. transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.
If enabled through the Driver Pressing K on the RKE transmitter

Information Center (DIC), the disarms the content theft-deterrent
parking lamps flash once to indicate system. See Vehicle Alarm System
locking has occurred. If enabled on page 2‑12.
through the DIC, the horn sounds
when Q is pressed again within
8 (Power Liftgate): Press and
hold until the liftgate begins to move
five seconds. See Vehicle to open or close the liftgate. The
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) taillamps flash and a chime sounds
on page 5‑41 for additional to indicate when the liftgate is
information. opening or closing.
Pressing Q may arm the content L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
With Remote Start and Power theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle Alarm): Press and release to
Liftgate Shown, Without Similar Alarm System on page 2‑12. locate the vehicle. The parking
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock lamps flash and the horn sounds
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For three times.
vehicles with this feature, see only the driver door. If K is pressed
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑4 again within five seconds, all Press and hold L for more than
for additional information. remaining doors unlock. The interior two seconds to activate the panic
lamps come on and stay on for alarm. The parking lamps flash and
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the 20 seconds or until the ignition is the horn sounds repeatedly for
doors. turned on. 30 seconds. The alarm turns off
If enabled through the DIC, the when the ignition is moved to ON/
parking lamps flash twice to indicate RUN or L is pressed again. The
unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) the panic alarm to work.
on page 5‑41.
Programming Transmitters to Notice: When replacing the

. Twist the tool until the
the Vehicle battery, do not touch any of the transmitter is separated.
circuitry on the transmitter. Static 2. Remove the old battery. Do not
Only RKE transmitters programmed from your body could damage the
to this vehicle will work. If a use a metal object.
transmitter.
transmitter is lost or stolen, a 3. Insert the new battery, positive
replacement can be purchased and side facing down. Replace with a
programmed through your dealer. CR2032 or equivalent battery.
When the replacement transmitter is 4. Snap the transmitter back
programmed to this vehicle, all together.
remaining transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work Remote Vehicle Start
once the new transmitter is This vehicle may have a remote
programmed. Each vehicle can starting feature that starts the
have up to eight transmitters engine from outside of the vehicle.
programmed to it. See your dealer
/ (Remote Start): This button is
to program transmitters to this
located on the RKE transmitter if the
vehicle.
1. Separate the transmitter with a vehicle has remote start.
Battery Replacement flat, thin object, such as a flat Laws in some communities may
Replace the battery if the REPLACE head screwdriver. restrict the use of remote starters.
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY . Carefully insert the tool into For example, some laws may
message displays in the DIC. the notch located along the require a person using the remote
parting line of the start to have the vehicle in view
transmitter. Do not insert when doing so. Check local
the tool too far. Stop as regulations for any requirements on
soon as resistance is felt. remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature vehicle's lights cannot be seen, After entering the vehicle during a
if the vehicle is low on fuel. The press and hold / for at least remote start, insert and turn the key
vehicle could run out of fuel. four seconds. to the ON/RUN position to drive the
If the vehicle has the remote start vehicle.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
feature, the RKE transmitter range lamps will turn on and remain on as If the vehicle is left running it
may be less while the vehicle is long as the engine is running. The automatically shuts off after
running. doors will be locked and the climate 10 minutes unless a time extension
There are other conditions that can control system will operate has been done.
affect the performance of the automatically if the vehicle has the Extending Engine Run Time
transmitter. See Remote Keyless automatic system, or at the same
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 for setting as when the vehicle was last To extend the engine run time by
additional information. turned off. 10 minutes, repeat Steps 1–3 while
the engine is still running. The
Starting the Engine Using If the vehicle has an automatic engine run time can only be
Remote Start climate control system and heated extended if it is the first remote start
seats, the heated seats turn on since the vehicle has been driven.
To start the vehicle: during colder outside temperatures Remote start can be extended
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the and shut off when the key is turned one time.
vehicle. to ON/RUN. See Heated and
Ventilated Front Seats on page 3‑8 If the remote start procedure is used
2. Press and release Q on the for more information. again before the first 10-minute time
RKE transmitter. frame has ended, the first
The rear window defogger and 10 minutes will immediately expire
3. Immediately after completing heated mirrors, if the vehicle has and the second 10-minute time
Step 2, press and hold / until them, turn on during colder outside frame will start.
the parking lamps flash. If the temperatures and turn off when the
key is turned to ON/RUN. For example, if Q and then / are
pressed again after the vehicle has
been running for five minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing the Conditions in Which the

engine to run for a total of Remote Start Will Not Work WARNING (Continued)
15 minutes.
The vehicle cannot be started using crash is increased if the
A maximum of two remote starts or the remote start feature if the key is doors are not locked. So, all
remote start attempts are allowed in the ignition, the hood is open, or if passengers should wear
between ignition cycles. there is an emission control system safety belts properly and the
After the vehicle's engine has been malfunction. doors should be locked
started two times using the remote whenever the vehicle is
The engine turns off during a remote
start button, the ignition must be driven.
start if the coolant temperature gets
turned on and then back off before too high or if the oil pressure . Young children who get into
the remote start procedure can be gets low. unlocked vehicles may be
used again. unable to get out. A child can
Canceling a Remote Start Door Locks be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
To manually shut off a remote start: injuries or even death from
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
{ WARNING heat stroke. Always lock the
Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it.
vehicle and press / until the
parking lamps turn off. dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
. Turn on the hazard warning when you slow down or stop
flashers. children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors
. Turn the ignition switch on and vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
then off. locked, the handle will not happening.
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
(Continued)
To lock or unlock a door manually: Power Door Locks K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
. From the inside use the door doors.
lock knob on the window sill. Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
. From the outside turn the key
toward the front or rear of the Delayed Locking
vehicle, or press the or button on When locking the doors with the
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) power lock switch and a door or the
transmitter. liftgate is open, the doors will lock
five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use.
Base Model Pressing the power lock switch
twice or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter twice will override the
delayed locking feature and
immediately lock all the doors.
This feature will not operate if the
key is in the ignition.
This feature can be programmed by
using the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See “DELAY DOOR LOCK”
under Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑41.
Uplevel Model
Automatic Door Locks If the driver side power door lock

switch is pressed when the driver
Vehicles with an automatic lock/ door is open and the key is in the
unlock feature enable you to ignition, all of the doors will lock and
program the vehicle's power door then the driver door will unlock.
locks. This feature can be
programmed through the Driver If the passenger side power door
Information Center (DIC). See lock switch is pressed when the
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC front passenger door is open and
Buttons) on page 5‑41 for more the key is in the ignition, all of the
information. doors will lock and then the front
passenger door will unlock.
Lockout Protection
Safety Locks Open the rear doors to access the
This feature protects you from security locks on the inside edge of
locking the key in the vehicle when The vehicle has rear door security
each door.
the key is in the ignition and a front locks to prevent passengers from
door is open. opening the rear doors from the To set the locks, insert a key into
inside. the slot and turn it to the horizontal
position. The door can only be
opened from the outside with the
door unlocked. To return the door to
normal operation, turn the slot to the
vertical position.
Doors WARNING (Continued)

To open the liftgate, press the touch
pad under the liftgate handle and lift
up. The vehicle must be in P (Park)
Liftgate . Adjust the climate control and the battery must be charged.
system to a setting that Use the pull cup to lower and close
Manual Liftgate brings in only outside air and the liftgate.
set the fan speed to the
{ WARNING highest setting. See “Climate Always close the liftgate before
driving.
Control Systems” in the
Exhaust gases can enter the Index.
vehicle if it is driven with the
Power Liftgate
. If the vehicle is equipped with
liftgate or trunk/hatch open, On vehicles with a power liftgate,
a power liftgate, disable the
or with any objects that pass the vehicle must be in P (Park) to
power liftgate function.
through the seal between the operate. The taillamps flash and a
body and the trunk/hatch or See Engine Exhaust on chime sounds when the power
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains page 9‑20. liftgate moves.
carbon monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can Notice: To avoid damage to the { WARNING
cause unconsciousness and even liftgate or liftgate glass, make
death. sure the area above and behind You, or others, could be injured if
the liftgate is clear before caught in the path of the power
If the vehicle must be driven with liftgate. Make sure there is no one
opening it.
the liftgate or trunk/hatch open: in the way of the liftgate as it is
To unlock the liftgate, press the opening and closing.
. Close all of the windows.
power door lock switch or press K
. Fully open the air outlets on on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
or under the instrument transmitter twice. See Remote
panel. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
(Continued) Operation on page 2‑2.
The power liftgate can be power continue to completion. If the

opened and closed in the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and
following ways: accelerated before the power liftgate
latch closes, the liftgate may
. Press and hold 8 on the RKE reverse to the open position. Cargo
transmitter. See Remote Keyless could fall out of the vehicle. Always
Entry (RKE) System Operation make sure the power liftgate is
on page 2‑2. closed and latched before
driving away.
If the power liftgate is used and the
liftgate support struts have lost
pressure, the taillamps will flash and
Power Liftgate Touch Pad a chime will sound. The liftgate will
The liftgate can also be closed by stay open temporarily, and then
slowly close. See a dealer for
pressing l next to the liftgate service before using the liftgate if
latch. Press l a second time this occurs.
during the liftgate operation to
reverse the operation. Obstacle Detection Features
The power liftgate may be A warning chime will sound and the
temporarily disabled under extreme liftgate will automatically reverse
. Press O. temperatures or under low battery direction to the full closed or open
. conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate position if an obstacle is
Press the touch pad on the encountered during a power open or
outside liftgate handle. can be operated manually.
close cycle. After removing the
Pressing the buttons or touch pad a If the vehicle is shifted out of P obstacle the liftgate will resume
second time while the liftgate is (Park) while the liftgate power normal operation.
moving reverses the direction. function is in progress, it will
If more obstacles are encountered Manual Operation of Power To open the liftgate, press the touch
on the same power cycle, the power Liftgate pad on the outside of the liftgate
function deactivates, and the liftgate handle and lift up. Use the pull
must be opened or closed manually. handle to lower and close the
A message displays on the Driver liftgate; the liftgate latch will power
Information Center (DIC) to indicate close.
that the liftgate is open. See Door Always close the liftgate before
Ajar Messages on page 5‑32. After driving.
removing the obstacles, manually
open the liftgate fully or close and 8 on the RKE transmitter or
If
latch the liftgate. The liftgate will l on the liftgate is pressed while
resume normal power operation. in manual operation mode, the
The vehicle has pinch sensors taillamps will flash three times, but
located on the side edges of the the liftgate will not move.
liftgate. If an object is caught It is not recommended to drive with
between the liftgate and the body of To change the liftgate to manual the liftgate open. However, if the
the vehicle and presses against a operation, press OFF on the power vehicle must be driven with the
sensor, the liftgate will reverse liftgate switch. A message displays liftgate open, the liftgate should be
direction and open fully. The liftgate on the DIC indicating manual set to manual operation.
will remain open until it is activated operation mode. See Door Ajar
again or closed manually. Do not Messages on page 5‑32.
force the liftgate open or closed
during a power cycle. With the liftgate in manual mode
and all of the doors unlocked, the
liftgate can be manually opened and
closed.
Vehicle Security The security light flashes. horn chirps and the lights flash.
When the door is closed, the If the key is not placed in the
This vehicle has theft-deterrent ignition and turned to START or the
security light stops flashing and
features; however, they do not make door is not unlocked by pressing Q
stays on solid for approximately
the vehicle impossible to steal. during the 10-second pre-alarm, the
30 seconds. The content
theft-deterrent alarm is not alarm goes off. The headlamps flash
Vehicle Alarm System armed until the security light and the horn sounds for about
On vehicles with an anti-theft alarm goes off. 30 seconds, then turns off to save
system, to activate the system: the battery power.
If the delayed locking feature is
active, the alarm is not activated The vehicle can be started with the
. Press Q on the Remote Keyless
until all doors are closed and the correct ignition key if the alarm has
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the been set off.
power door lock switch when security light goes off.
any door is open. . Press Q when the driver door is To avoid setting off the alarm by
closed. The security light comes accident:
on solid for approximately . Lock the vehicle with the door
30 seconds and then goes off. key after the doors are closed.
The content theft-deterrent alarm . Unlock the door with the RKE
is not armed until the security transmitter. Unlocking a door any
light goes off. other way sets off the alarm if
The theft-deterrent system will not the system has been armed.
activate if the doors are locked with
the vehicle's key or the manual Press K or place the key in the
door lock. ignition and turn it to START to turn
off the alarm.
If a locked door is opened without
using the RKE transmitter, a
10-second pre-alarm occurs. The
Testing the Alarm Immobilizer The security light comes on if there

is a problem with arming or
To test the alarm: See Radio Frequency Statement on disarming the theft-deterrent
1. From inside the vehicle, lower page 13‑21 for information system.
the driver side window, and open regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) When the PASS-Key III+ system
the driver door.
rules and Industry Canada senses an incorrect key, the vehicle
2. Press Q. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. does not start. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the vehicle will be discouraged because
door, and wait for the security Immobilizer Operation of the high number of electrical key
light to go out. This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ codes.
4. Reach in through the window, (Personalized Automotive Security
If the engine does not start and the
unlock the door with the manual System) theft-deterrent system.
security light on the instrument
door lock, and open the door. PASS-Key III+ is a passive
panel comes on when trying to start
This should set off the alarm. theft-deterrent system.
the vehicle, there may be a problem
If the alarm does not sound when it The system is automatically armed with the theft-deterrent system. Turn
should, but the headlamps flash, when the key is removed from the the ignition off and try again.
check to see if the horn works. The ignition.
If the engine still does not start, and
horn fuse may be blown. To replace The system is automatically the key appears to be undamaged,
the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit disarmed when the key is turned to try another ignition key and check
Breakers on page 10‑29. ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit
If the alarm does not sound or the or START from the LOCK/OFF Breakers on page 10‑29 for
headlamps do not flash, see your position. additional information. If the engine
dealer for service. You do not have to manually arm or still does not start with the other key,
disarm the system. the vehicle needs service. If the
vehicle does start, the first key may
be faulty. See your dealer who can
service the PASS-Key III+ to have a To program the new additional key: The SERVICE THEFT
new key made. In an emergency, DETERRENT SYSTEM message
contact Roadside Assistance. See 1. Verify that the new key has a 1 displays on the Driver Information
Roadside Assistance Program stamped on it. Center (DIC) when there is a
(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or Roadside 2. Insert the already programmed problem with the theft-deterrent
Assistance Program (U.S. and key in the ignition and start the system. See Security Messages on
Canada) on page 13‑11. engine. If the engine does not page 5‑38 for additional information.
It is possible for the PASS-Key III+ start, see your dealer for service. Do not leave the key or device that
decoder to learn the transponder 3. After the engine has started, turn disarms or deactivates the
value of a new or replacement key. the key to LOCK/OFF, and theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed remove the key.
to the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming 4. Insert the key to be programmed
additional keys only. If all currently and turn it to the ON/RUN
programmed keys are lost or do not position within five seconds of
operate, you must see your dealer the original key being turned to
or a locksmith who can service the LOCK/OFF position.
PASS-Key III+ to have keys made The security light turns off once
and programmed to the system. the key has been programmed.
See your dealer or a locksmith who 5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additional
can service PASS-Key III+ to get a keys are to be programmed.
new key blank that is cut exactly as If the PASS-Key III+ key is lost or
the ignition key that operates the damaged, see your dealer or a
system. locksmith to have a new key made.
Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
{ WARNING
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or Uplevel Model
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes. Base Model To adjust the mirrors:
To adjust the mirrors: 1. Press (1) or (2) to select a
The passenger side mirror is convex mirror.
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
1. Press o or p to select a mirror. 2. Press the control pad to adjust
curved so more can be seen from 2. Press the control pad to adjust the mirror.
the driver seat. the mirror.
3. Press (1) or (2) again to deselect
3. Return the switch to the center the mirror.
to deselect the mirror.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
If the vehicle has the SBZA system,
see Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
on page 9‑32.
Folding Mirrors Resetting the Power Folding Blind Spot Mirrors

Mirrors
For vehicles with manual folding The blind spot mirror is a small
mirrors, push the mirror toward the Reset the power folding mirrors if: convex mirror built into the upper
vehicle. Pull the mirror out to return . The mirrors are accidentally and outer corner of both outside
to its original position. obstructed while folding. mirrors. It can show objects that
For vehicles with power folding may be in the vehicle's blind zone.
. They are accidentally manually
mirrors: folded/unfolded.
. The mirrors vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the mirrors, fold and unfold
the mirrors one time using the
power folding mirror controls.
A popping noise may be heard
during the resetting. This sound is
normal during the reset operation.
Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
1. Press (1) to fold the mirrors out 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
to the driving position. Press to heat the mirrors.
2. Press (2) to fold the mirrors in to See “Rear Window Defogger” under
the folded position. Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑4.
Driving with the Blind Spot 1. When the approaching vehicle is vehicle. Check the blind spot
Mirror a long distance away, the image mirror for a vehicle in the blind
in the main mirror is small and zone. Then, glance over your
near the inboard edge of the shoulder to double check before
mirror. moving slowly into the
2. As the vehicle gets closer, the adjacent lane.
image in the main mirror gets
larger and moves outboard. Park Tilt Mirrors
3. As the vehicle enters the blind If the vehicle has the memory
zone, the image transitions from package, the outside mirrors have a
the main mirror to the blind spot park tilt feature. This feature tilts the
mirror. outside mirrors to a preselected
position when the vehicle is in
4. When the vehicle is in the blind R (Reverse). This allows the driver
zone, the image only appears in to view the curb for parallel parking.
the blind spot mirror.
The passenger and/or driver mirror
Using the Outside Mirror with returns to its original position when
the Blind Spot Mirror the vehicle is shifted out of
1. Set the main mirror so that the R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned
side of the vehicle can just be off or to OFF/LOCK.
seen and the blind spot mirror This feature can be turned on or off
has an unobstructed view. through the Driver Information
2. When checking for traffic or Center (DIC). See Vehicle
before changing a lane, look at Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
the main driver/passenger side on page 5‑41 for more information.
Actual Mirror View mirror to observe traffic in the
adjacent lane, behind your
Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming Windows

Rearview Mirror
Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic { WARNING
Adjust the mirror to view the area dimming inside rearview mirror.
Never leave a child, a helpless
behind the vehicle. The mirror automatically reduces adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
For vehicles with a manual rearview the glare from the headlamps from especially with the windows
mirror, push the tab forward for behind. The dimming feature and closed in warm or hot weather.
daytime use and pull it for nighttime the indicator light come on when the They can be overcome by the
use to avoid glare from the vehicle is started. There may be an extreme heat and suffer
headlamps from behind. on and off setting on the mirror. permanent injuries or even death
For vehicles with OnStar, center the O (On/Off): Press to turn the from heat stroke.
twist knob for daytime use and turn dimming feature on or off.
it to the side for nighttime use.
Cleaning the Mirror
Vehicles with OnStar have three
control buttons at the bottom of the Do not spray glass cleaner directly
mirror. See your dealer for more on the mirror. Use a soft towel
information about OnStar and how dampened with water.
to subscribe to it. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1.
The vehicle aerodynamics are Power Windows

designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear { WARNING
window is down and the front Children could be seriously
windows are up. To reduce the
injured or killed if caught in the
sound, open either a front window
path of a closing window. Never
or the sunroof, if equipped.
leave keys in a vehicle with
children. When there are children
in the rear seat, use the window
lockout button to prevent
operation of the windows. See
Keys on page 2‑1. Uplevel Shown, Base Similar
The driver door also has switches
that control the passenger and rear
windows. The power windows work
with the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑18.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull up on the front edge of
the switch to raise the window.
Express-Up/Express-Down Programming the Power Anti-Pinch Feature

Windows Windows The anti-pinch feature is on
A window with the express-up/down If the battery on the vehicle has windows with the express-up
feature allows it to be raised or been recharged, disconnected, feature. If an object is in the way of
lowered without holding the switch. or replaced, windows with the the window as it is express-closing,
Press or pull the window switch fully express-up feature need to be or in certain weather conditions like
and release it to activate the reprogrammed for this feature to severe icing, the window will stop
express feature. The express mode work. To program the window: and open to a factory preset
can be canceled by pressing or position. The window functions
1. Close all doors with the ignition
pulling the switch. normally once the obstruction is
in the ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/
removed.
RUN position, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is Rear Window Lockout
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑18.
2. Press and continue to hold the
window switch until the window
is fully open.
3. Pull up and hold the window
switch to close the window.
Continue to hold it briefly after
the window is fully closed.
4. Repeat for each window that has
the express-up feature.
The rear window lockout feature Sun Visors Roof

prevents the rear passenger
windows from operating, except
from the driver position. Sunroof
The ignition must be in ON/RUN,
Press v to activate the rear
ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained
window lockout switch. The Accessory Power (RAP) must be
indicator light comes on when active to operate the sunroof and
activated. power sunshade. See Retained
Press v again to deactivate the Accessory Power (RAP) on
lockout switch. page 9‑18.
Pull the sun visor down to block The vehicle may have a sunroof
glare. If equipped, detach the sun over the front seats and a rear
visor from the center mount to pivot sunroof over the second row seats.
to the side window or to extend The rear sunroof does not open.
along the rod.
Express-open/Express-close:
From the closed position, press and
release the rear of the switch to
express-open the sunroof. Press
and release the front of the switch to
express-close the sunroof.
Manual Sunshade
The sunshades must be opened
and closed manually. To open the Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunshade, press the button on the sunroof seal or in the track. This
sunshade handle to release it and could cause an issue with sunroof
guide it back. To close the operation or noise. It could also plug
Vent: From the closed position, sunshade, pull the sunshade the water drainage system.
press and hold the front of the forward until it latches. Periodically open the sunroof and
switch to vent the sunroof. Press remove any obstacles or loose
and hold the rear of the switch to debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
close the sunroof. roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Adding Equipment to the

Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-35
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-36
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Replacing Airbag System
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-22 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Head Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Replacing Safety Belt System Child Restraints
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Front Seats Infants and Young
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-41
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-25 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-43
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 When Should an Airbag Lower Anchors and Tethers
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 for Children (LATCH
Heated and Ventilated Front What Makes an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Replacing LATCH System
How Does an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
What Will You See after an (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-54
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
How to Wear Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
Front Seats
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and Adjust the head restraint so that the To raise or lower the head restraint,
adjusted properly. top of the restraint is at the same press the button located on the side
height as the top of the occupant's of the head restraint, and pull up or
head. This position reduces the push the head restraint down, and
The vehicle's front seats have
chance of a neck injury in a crash. release the button. Pull and push on
adjustable head restraints in the
the head restraint after the button is
outboard seating positions.
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
To adjust the head restraint forward,
grasp the head restraint and pull
forward until the desired locking
position is reached.
To adjust the head restraint
rearward, press the button located
on the side of the head restraint,
and push the head restraint Front Seats 2. Driver Seat Height Adjustment
rearward until the desired locking Lever
position is reached. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is Seat Adjustment 3. Seatback Lever
released to make sure that it is To adjust a manual seat:
locked in place. { WARNING 1. Lift the handle (1) under the seat
The front seat outboard head to unlock it.
You can lose control of the
restraints are not designed to be vehicle if you try to adjust a driver 2. Slide the seat to the desired
removed. position, and then release the
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Rear Seats Adjust the driver seat only when handle (1).
the vehicle is not moving. 3. Try to move the seat back and
The vehicle's second-row seats
have head restraints in the outboard forth to be sure it is locked in
seating positions that cannot be place.
adjusted. Move the lever (2) up or down to
The vehicle's third-row seats have raise or lower the seat.
headrests in the outboard seating Use the lever (3) to adjust the
positions that cannot be adjusted. seatback. See Reclining Seatbacks
The second-row head restraints and on page 3‑5.
third-row headrests are not
designed to be removed.
1. Seat Adjustment Handle


. Raise or lower the front part of
Power Seat Adjustment the seat cushion by moving the
Lumbar Adjustment
front of the control (1) up Manual Lumbar
or down.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the rear of the control (1)
up or down.
. Adjust the seatback by tilting the
top of the control (2) forward or
rearward.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑5.
. Increase or decrease lumbar
1. Seat Adjustment Control support by pressing the front or
rear of the control (3).
2. Seatback Control
See Lumbar Adjustment on If available, move the handle
3. Lumbar Control page 3‑4. forward or rearward to increase or
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: decrease lumbar support.
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the
control (1) forward or rearward.
Power Lumbar Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you Do not have a seatback reclined if
could go into it, receiving neck or the vehicle is moving.
If available, press and hold the front other injuries.
or rear of control to increase or
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
The lap belt could go up over
decrease lumbar support. Release your abdomen. The belt forces
the control when the seatback would be there, not at your pelvic { WARNING
reaches the desired level of lumbar bones. This could cause serious
support. If either seatback is not locked, it
internal injuries.
could move forward in a sudden
For proper protection when the stop or crash. That could cause
vehicle is in motion, have the injury to the person sitting there.
seatback upright. Then sit well Always push and pull on the
back in the seat and wear the seatbacks to be sure they are
safety belt properly. locked.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to Memory Seats

make sure it is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
If available, the controls on the
2. Move the seatback to the
driver door are used to program and
desired position, and then
To adjust a power seatback, recall memory settings for the driver
release the lever to lock the
if equipped: seat and outside mirrors.
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to . Tilt the top of the control Storing Memory Positions
make sure it is locked. rearward to recline. To save into memory:
To return the seatback to the upright . Tilt the top of the control forward 1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback
position: to raise. recliner, and both outside
1. Lift the lever fully without mirrors.
applying pressure to the Not all vehicles will have the
seatback, and the seatback will ability to save and recall the
return to the upright position. mirror positions.
2. Press and hold “1” until This feature is turned on or off using S (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press
two beeps sound. the vehicle personalization menu. to activate the recall. The vehicle
3. Repeat for a second driver See Vehicle Personalization (With must be in P (Park).
position using “2.” DIC Buttons) on page 5‑41.
If this feature is programmed on in
To recall, press and release “1” or To stop recall movement, press one the vehicle personalization menu,
“2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park). of the power seat controls, memory automatic seat movement occurs
A single beep will sound. The seat buttons, or the power mirror buttons. when the ignition key is removed.
and outside mirrors will move to the If something has blocked the driver A single beep sounds. The driver
position previously stored for the seat while recalling a memory seat moves back approximately
identified driver. position, the recall may stop. 8 cm (3 in). To move the seat back
Remove the obstruction; then press
Memory Remote Recall farther, press S again until the seat
and hold the appropriate manual
is all the way back.
The memory feature can recall the control for the memory item that is
driver seat and outside mirrors to not recalling for two seconds. Try If something has blocked the driver
stored positions when entering the recalling the memory position again seat while recalling the exit position,
vehicle. by pressing the appropriate memory the recall may stop. Remove the
button. If the memory position is still obstruction; then press and hold the
To activate, unlock the driver door
not recalling, see your dealer for power seat control rearward for
with the Remote Keyless
service. two seconds. Try recalling the exit
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The driver
position again. If the exit position is
seat and outside mirrors will move Easy Exit Driver Seat still not recalling, see your dealer for
to the memory position associated
This feature can move the seat service.
with the transmitter used to unlock
the vehicle. rearward to allow extra room to exit See Vehicle Personalization (With
the vehicle. DIC Buttons) on page 5‑41.
Heated and Ventilated the off setting. The lights indicate

three for the highest setting and one
Front Seats for the lowest.
The passenger heated seat may
{ WARNING take longer to heat up.
If you cannot feel temperature The heated and/or cooled seats are
change or pain to the skin, the canceled after the ignition is
seat heater may cause burns. To turned off.
reduce the risk of burns, people Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons
Remote Start Heated Seats
with such a condition should use Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
care when using the seat heater, Similar When it is cold outside, the heated
especially for long periods of seats may turn on automatically
If available, the buttons are on the during a remote vehicle start. The
time. Do not place anything on
center console. To operate, the heated seats will be canceled when
the seat that insulates against engine must be running.
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, the ignition is turned on. Press the
cover, or similar item. This may I (Heated Seatback): If available, desired heated seat button to use
cause the seat heater to press to heat the seatback only. the heated seats after the vehicle is
started.
overheat. An overheated seat H (Cooled Seat): If available,
heater may cause a burn or may press to cool the entire seat. The heated seat button lights will
damage the seat. not turn on during a remote start.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to heat the seat and The temperature of an unoccupied
seatback. seat may be reduced.
Press the button once for the See Remote Vehicle Start on
highest setting. With each press of page 2‑4.
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
Rear Seats Entering and Exiting the

Third Row
{ WARNING
Using the third row seating
position while the second row is
folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return
the seat to the passenger seating
position. Push and pull on the
seat to make sure it is locked into To access the third row:
place. 1. Remove objects on the floor in
1. Seat Adjustment Handle front of or on the second row
2. Reclining Seatback Strap Notice: Folding a rear seat with seat, or in the seat tracks on the
the safety belts still fastened may floor.
3. Sliding Seat Lever
cause damage to the seat or the 2. Move the front center console
safety belts. Always unbuckle the armrest completely forward. See
safety belts and return them to Center Console Storage on
their normal stowed position page 4‑2.
before folding a rear seat.
3. Place the folding armrests in the
upright position.
4. Make sure that the safety belt is
unfastened and in the stowed
position.
5. Pull the sliding seat lever (3) 5. Push and pull on the seatback 3. Pull forward on the reclining
forward. The seatback will tilt and seat cushion to make sure seatback strap (2).
forward, and the seat will begin they are locked in place. The head restraint will fold down
sliding forward. Continue to push 6. Check that the safety belt is not automatically.
forward on the seatback until the under the seat cushion.
entire seat moves all the way To return the seatback to the
forward and the seat cushion is Reclining the Seatbacks seating position, lift the seatback
folded. and push it rearward until it locks
To recline the seatback: into place. Push and pull on the
Returning the Seat to the 1. Leaning rearward in the seat, seatback to make sure it is locked.
Seating Position pull the reclining seatback Pull up on the head restraint to
To return the second row seat to its strap (2). return it to the upright, locked
normal seating position: position.
2. Move the seatback to the
1. Remove objects on the floor desired position, and then Adjusting the Seats
behind the second row seat or in release the strap (2) to lock the
seatback in place. To adjust the second row seats, pull
the seat tracks on the floor. outward on the seat adjustment
2. Slide the seat rearward by 3. Push and pull on the seatback to handle (1). Slide the seat forward or
pushing on the seatback until make sure it is locked. rearward to the desired position.
the seat is locked into place. Release the handle (1), and push
Folding the Seatback
and pull on the seat to make sure it
3. Continue pushing the seatback To fold the second row seatbacks: is locked.
rearward until the seatback is
locked into place. 1. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
4. Push down on the rear of the
seat cushion until it is locked in 2. Place the armrest in the upright
place. position, and unfasten the
safety belt.
Third Row Seats To fold the third row seatback:

1. Remove anything on or under
{ WARNING the seat.
Using the third row seating

position while the second row is
folded, or pushed forward in the
entry position, could cause injury
in a sudden stop or crash. Be
sure to return the seat to the
passenger seating position. Push
and pull on the seat to make sure
it is locked into place. 3. Pull up on the release lever on
the back of the seat. The
headrest moves forward
Folding the Seatback automatically.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with 2. Disconnect the rear safety belt 4. Push the seatback forward to
the safety belts still fastened may mini-latch, using a key in the slot lay flat.
cause damage to the seat or the on the mini-buckle, and let the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the belt retract into the headliner.
safety belts and return them to Stow the mini-latch in the holder
their normal stowed position in the headliner.
before folding a rear seat.
Returning the Seat to the 3. Push and pull on the seatback to Removing the Third Row Seats
Seating Position make sure it is locked in place.
To remove a third row seat:
To return the seatback to the
seating position: { WARNING 1. Remove the cargo management
system, if available and
1. From the rear of the vehicle, A safety belt that is improperly installed. See Cargo
raise the seatback to the upright routed, not properly attached, Management System on
position using the pullstrap on or twisted will not provide the page 4‑3.
the back of the third row seat, protection needed in a crash. The 2. Remove anything on or under
or lift the seatback and push it person wearing the belt could be the seat.
into place from inside the seriously injured. After raising the
vehicle. Notice: Folding a rear seat with
rear seatback, always check to be the safety belts still fastened may
2. The headrest must be locked sure that the safety belts are cause damage to the seat or the
into place before sitting in properly routed and attached, and safety belts. Always unbuckle the
the seat. are not twisted. safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
{ WARNING 4. Reconnect the center safety belt before folding a rear seat.
mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do 3. Fold the seatback down. See
If either seatback is not locked, it
not let it twist. “Folding the Seatback” earlier in
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause 5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure this section.
injury to the person sitting there. the mini-latch is secure. 4. Remove the rear bolts on the
Always push and pull on the floor on each side of the seat.
seatbacks to be sure they are 5. Remove the seat by tilting it
locked. slightly upward, and then pulling
it out of the rear of the vehicle in
one motion.
6. Replace the bolts in the floor 3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to Safety Belts
holes for storage. 55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the
seat to make sure it is locked in This section of the manual
Installing the Third Row Seats place. describes how to use safety belts
To reinstall a third row seat: properly. It also describes some
4. Raise the seatback to its upright
things not to do with safety belts.
1. Before installing the seat the position. Push and pull on the
seatback must be folded seatback to make sure it is
forward. See “Folding the locked into place. { WARNING
Seatback” earlier in this section. 5. Push the headrest up into Do not let anyone ride where a
The seats must be placed in the position. Push and pull on the safety belt cannot be worn
proper locations to attach headrest to make sure it is properly. In a crash, if you or your
correctly. The wider seat must locked into place. passenger(s) are not wearing
be installed on the driver side 6. Reconnect the center safety belt safety belts, injuries can be much
and the narrower seat on the mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do worse than if you are wearing
passenger side. Remove the not let it twist. safety belts. You can be seriously
bolts from the holes in the floor injured or killed by hitting things
before installing the seats.
inside the vehicle harder or by
2. Place the seat on the vehicle being ejected from the vehicle. In
floor so that the front seat hooks addition, anyone who is not
are on the vehicle bars. buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
(Continued)
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing

WARNING (Continued) safety belts makes such good
sense.
are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow Questions and Answers About
passengers to ride in any area of Safety Belts
the vehicle that is not equipped Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
with seats and safety belts. after a crash if I am wearing a
Always wear a safety belt, and safety belt?
check that all passenger(s) are A: You could be — whether you are
restrained properly too. wearing a safety belt or not.
Your chance of being conscious
This vehicle has indicators as a during and after a crash, so you
reminder to buckle the safety belts. can unbuckle and get out, is
See Safety Belt Reminders on When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted.
page 5‑14. as fast as the vehicle does. If the Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. belts?
It could be the windshield, the
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts — not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. them. Whether or not an airbag
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the
when worn properly, your strongest most protection.
bones take the forces from the
Also, in nearly all states and in

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
all Canadian provinces, the law shoulder and across the chest.
requires wearing safety belts. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
How to Wear Safety Belts forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash.
Properly
This section is only for people of { WARNING
adult size.
You can be seriously injured,
There are special things to know
or even killed, by not wearing
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller your safety belt properly.
children and infants. If a child will be . Sit up straight and always keep . Never allow the lap or
riding in the vehicle, see Older your feet on the floor in front shoulder belt to become
Children on page 3‑37 or Infants of you. loose or twisted.
and Young Children on page 3‑39. . Always use the correct buckle . Never wear the shoulder belt
Follow those rules for everyone's for your seating position. under both arms or behind
protection. your back.
. Wear the lap part of the belt low
It is very important for all occupants and snug on the hips, just . Never route the lap or
to buckle up. Statistics show that touching the thighs. In a crash, shoulder belt over an
unbelted people are hurt more often this applies force to the strong armrest.
in crashes than those who are pelvic bones and you would be
wearing safety belts. less likely to slide under the lap
There are important things to know belt. If you slid under it, the belt
about wearing a safety belt properly. would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
If you are using a rear seating
position with a detachable safety
belt and the safety belt is not
attached, see “Returning the Seat to
the Seating Position” under Third
Row Seats on page 3‑11 for
instruction on reconnecting the
safety belt to the mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 3. Push the latch plate into the
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt the belt across you. Do not let it buckle until it clicks.
properly. get twisted. 4. Pull up on the latch plate to
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is The lap-shoulder belt may lock if make sure it is secure. If the belt
adjustable, so you can sit up you pull the belt across you very is not long enough, see Safety
straight. To see how, see “Seats” quickly. If this happens, let the Belt Extender on page 3‑21.
in the Index. belt go back slightly to unlock it. Position the release button on
Then pull the belt across you the buckle so that the safety belt
more slowly. could be quickly unbuckled if
If the shoulder portion of a necessary.
passenger belt is pulled out all 5. If equipped with a shoulder belt
the way, the child restraint height adjuster, move it to the
locking feature may be engaged. height that is right for you. See
If this happens, let the belt go “Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
back all the way and start again.
later in this section for Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

instructions on use and
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
important safety information.
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
but not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to but not
contacting the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
To unlatch the belt, push the button the safety belt in a crash. See How
on the buckle. The belt should to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
return to its stowed position. Slide page 3‑15.
the latch plate up the safety belt
6. To make the lap part tight, pull webbing when the safety belt is not
up on the shoulder belt. in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt,
It may be necessary to pull the
near the guide loop on the side wall.
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully Before a door is closed, be sure the
tighten the lap belt on smaller safety belt is out of the way. If a
occupants. door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort

This vehicle has safety belt Guides
pretensioners for the front outboard This vehicle may have rear safety
occupants. Although the safety belt belt comfort guides. If not, they are
pretensioners cannot be seen, they available through your dealer. The
are part of the safety belt assembly. guides may provide added safety
They can help tighten the safety belt comfort for older children who
belts during the early stages of a have outgrown booster seats and
moderate to severe frontal, near for some adults. When installed and
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold properly adjusted, the comfort guide
conditions for pretensioner positions the shoulder belt away
activation are met. And, for vehicles from the neck and head.
To move it down, push down on the with side impact airbags, safety belt
release button and move the height pretensioners can help tighten the
adjuster to the desired position. You safety belts in a side crash or a
can move the height adjuster up by rollover event.
pushing up on the shoulder belt Pretensioners work only once. If the
guide. pretensioners activate in a crash,
After the adjuster is set to the they will need to be replaced, and
desired position, try to move it down probably other new parts for the
without pushing the release button vehicle's safety belt system. See
to make sure it has locked into Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
position. after a Crash on page 3‑22.
Here is how to install a comfort 1. For the outboard positions,

guide to the safety belt: remove the guide from its
storage clip on the interior body.
For the third row center position,
locate the comfort guide which is
located in a storage pocket, at
the top of the seat, under the
headrest on the driver side of
the vehicle. To access the
comfort guide, you will first need
to move the headrest forward by
pulling on the handle behind the
seatback. The comfort guide will Third Row Center Position
now be accessible. Pull the comfort guide out of its
Outboard Positions storage location and then return
the headrest to its upright
position.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt 3. Be sure that the belt is not
and insert the two edges of the twisted and it lies flat. The
belt into the slots of the guide. elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
wear safety belts. properly.
Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
4. Buckle, position, and release the
But if a safety belt is not long
safety belt as described
enough, your dealer will order you
previously in this section. Make
an extender. When you go in to
sure the shoulder portion of the
order it, take the heaviest coat you
belt is on the shoulder and not
will wear, so the extender will be
falling off of it. The belt should
long enough for you. To help avoid
be close to, but not contacting,
personal injury, do not let someone
the neck.
else use it, and use it only for the
To remove and store the comfort seat it is made to fit. The extender
guide, squeeze the belt edges A pregnant woman should wear a has been designed for adults. Never
together so that the safety belt can lap-shoulder belt, and the lap use it for securing child seats. To
be removed from the guide. Slide portion should be worn as low as wear it, attach it to the regular safety
the guide into its storage location or possible, below the rounding, belt. See the instruction sheet that
on its storage clip. throughout the pregnancy. comes with the extender.
Safety System Check

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts, Do not bleach or dye safety belts. inspected and any necessary
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and It may severely weaken them. In replacements made as soon as
anchorages are all working properly. a crash, they might not be able to possible.
Look for any other loose or provide adequate protection.
damaged safety belt system parts Clean safety belts only with mild After a minor crash, replacement of
that might keep a safety belt system soap and lukewarm water. safety belts may not be necessary.
from doing its job. See your dealer
But the safety belt assemblies that
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
Replacing Safety Belt were used during any crash may
safety belts may not protect you in a
have been stressed or damaged.
crash. They can rip apart under System Parts after a See your dealer to have the safety
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Crash belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
{ WARNING New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
Reminders on page 5‑14. A crash can damage the safety system was not being used at the
Keep safety belts clean and dry. belt system in the vehicle. time of the crash.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑22. A damaged safety belt system
Have the safety belt pretensioners
may not properly protect the
checked if the vehicle has been in a
Safety Belt Care person using it, resulting in crash, or if the airbag readiness light
serious injury or even death in a stays on after you start the vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
crash. To help make sure the or while you are driving. See Airbag
safety belt systems are working Readiness Light on page 5‑15.
properly after a crash, have them
(Continued)
Airbag System The vehicle may have the following

airbag:
For seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the
The vehicle has the following side of the seatback closest to
. A front center airbag for the
airbags: the door.
driver and front outboard
. A frontal airbag for the driver. passenger. For roof-rail airbags, the word
. A frontal airbag for the front All vehicle airbags have the word AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
outboard passenger. AIRBAG on the trim or on an Airbags are designed to supplement
. A seat-mounted side impact attached label near the deployment the protection provided by safety
airbag for the driver. opening. belts. Even though today's airbags
For frontal airbags, the word are also designed to help reduce
. A seat-mounted side impact the risk of injury from the force of an
airbag for the front outboard AIRBAG is on the center of the
steering wheel for the driver and on inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
passenger. very quickly to do their job.
the instrument panel for the front
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver outboard passenger.
and for the second and third row
passengers seated directly For the front center airbag, the word
behind the driver. AIRBAG is on the inboard side of
the driver seatback.
. A roof-rail airbag for the front
outboard passenger and the
second and third row
passengers seated directly
behind the front outboard
passenger.
Here are the most important things

to know about the airbag system: { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Because airbags inflate with great Occupants should not lean on or
{ WARNING force and faster than the blink of sleep against the door or side
You can be severely injured or an eye, anyone who is up windows in seating positions with
killed in a crash if you are not against, or very close to any seat-mounted side impact airbags
wearing your safety belt, even airbag when it inflates can be and/or roof-rail airbags.
with airbags. Airbags are seriously injured or killed. Do not
designed to work with safety sit unnecessarily close to any
airbag, as you would be if sitting
belts, not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to inflate on the edge of the seat or leaning { WARNING
in every crash. In some crashes forward. Safety belts help keep Children who are up against,
safety belts are the only restraint. you in position before and during or very close to, any airbag when
See When Should an Airbag a crash. Always wear a safety it inflates can be seriously injured
Inflate? on page 3‑27. belt, even with airbags. The driver or killed. Always secure children
should sit as far back as possible properly in the vehicle. To read
Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of how, see Older Children on
crash helps reduce the chance of the vehicle. page 3‑37 or Infants and Young
hitting things inside the vehicle or
Occupants should not lean on or Children on page 3‑39.
being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the sleep against the front center
safety belts. Everyone in the armrest or console with a front
vehicle should wear a safety belt center airbag.
properly, whether or not there is (Continued)
an airbag for that person.
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument cluster, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag The front outboard passenger
Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for frontal airbag is in the passenger
more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the side instrument panel.
center of the steering wheel.
If the vehicle has a front center Driver Side Shown, Passenger Driver Side Shown, Passenger
airbag, it is in the inboard side of the Side Similar Side Similar
driver seatback. The driver and front outboard The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
passenger seat-mounted side front outboard passenger, and
impact airbags are in the side of the second and third row outboard
seatbacks closest to the door. passengers are in the ceiling above
the side windows.
and help restrain the occupants.

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) Deployment thresholds can vary
with specific vehicle design.
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the Never secure anything to the roof Frontal airbags are designed to
airbag might not inflate properly of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or it might force the object into by routing a rope or tie-down or near frontal crashes to help
that person causing severe injury through any door or window reduce the potential for severe
or even death. The path of an opening. If you do, the path of an injuries, mainly to the driver's or
inflating roof-rail airbag will be front outboard passenger's head
inflating airbag must be kept
blocked. and chest.
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an Whether the frontal airbags will or
airbag, and do not attach or put should inflate is not based primarily
When Should an Airbag on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other Inflate? It depends on what is hit, the
airbag covering. The vehicle has frontal airbags, direction of the impact, and how
seat-mounted side impact airbags, quickly the vehicle slows down.
Do not use seat or console
and roof-rail airbags. The vehicle Frontal airbags may inflate at
accessories that block the
may have a front center airbag. See different crash speeds depending on
inflation path of a seat-mounted Airbag System on page 3‑23. These whether the vehicle hits an object
side impact airbag or the front airbags are designed to inflate if the straight on or at an angle, and
center airbag, if equipped. impact exceeds the specific airbag whether the object is fixed or
(Continued) system’s deployment threshold. moving, rigid or deformable, narrow
Deployment thresholds are used to or wide.
predict how severe a crash is likely
Frontal airbags are not intended to
to be in time for the airbag to inflate
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has sensing system predicts that the airbag causing the bag to break out
dual-stage frontal airbags. vehicle is about to roll over on its of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
Dual-stage airbags adjust the side. The roof-rail airbags are also and related hardware are all part of
restraint according to crash severity. intended to inflate in a severe frontal the airbag module.
The vehicle has electronic frontal impact. For airbag locations, see Where Are
sensors, which help the sensing The front center airbag, if equipped, the Airbags? on page 3‑25.
system distinguish between a is not intended to inflate in frontal
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
impacts, near frontal impacts, How Does an Airbag
or rear impacts. Seat-mounted side
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags impact airbags are not intended to
Restrain?
inflate at a level less than full inflate in frontal impacts, near frontal In moderate to severe frontal or
deployment. For more severe frontal impacts, rollovers, rear impacts, near frontal collisions, even belted
impacts, full deployment occurs. or on the non-struck side of a occupants can contact the steering
The front center airbag, if equipped, vehicle in a side impact. Roof-rail wheel or the instrument panel. In
seat-mounted side impact airbags, airbags are not intended to inflate in moderate to severe side collisions,
and roof-rail airbags are intended to rear impacts. even belted occupants can contact
inflate in moderate to severe side the inside of the vehicle.
In any particular crash, no one can
crashes depending on the location say whether an airbag should have Airbags supplement the protection
of the impact. A seat-mounted side inflated simply because of the provided by safety belts by
impact airbag is intended to inflate vehicle damage or the repair costs. distributing the force of the impact
on the side of the vehicle that is more evenly over the
struck. The front center airbag,
if equipped, and both roof-rail What Makes an Airbag occupant's body.
airbags are intended to inflate when Inflate? Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
either side of the vehicle is struck. are also designed to help contain
In a deployment event, the sensing the head and chest of occupants in
In addition, the roof-rail airbags and system sends an electrical signal
the front center airbag, if equipped, the outboard seating positions in the
triggering a release of gas from the first, second, and third rows. The
are intended to inflate when the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
rollover capable roof-rail airbags are several minutes. For location of the
designed to help reduce the risk of airbags, see Where Are the WARNING (Continued)
full or partial ejection in rollover Airbags? on page 3‑25.
events, although no system can airbag inflates, then get fresh air
The parts of the airbag that come by opening a window or a door.
prevent all such ejections. into contact with you may be warm, If you experience breathing
But airbags would not help in many but not too hot to touch. There may problems following an airbag
types of collisions, primarily be some smoke and dust coming deployment, you should seek
because the occupant's motion is from the vents in the deflated medical attention.
not toward those airbags. See When airbags. Airbag inflation does not
Should an Airbag Inflate? on prevent the driver from seeing out of
page 3‑27 for more information. the windshield or being able to steer The vehicle has a feature that may
the vehicle, nor does it prevent automatically unlock the doors, turn
Airbags should never be regarded
people from leaving the vehicle. on the interior lamps and hazard
as anything more than a supplement
warning flashers, and shut off the
to safety belts.
{ WARNING fuel system after the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, and turn off
What Will You See after When an airbag inflates, there the interior lamps and hazard
an Airbag Inflates? may be dust in the air. This dust warning flashers by using the
could cause breathing problems controls for those features.
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags for people with a history of
inflate, they quickly deflate, so asthma or other breathing trouble. { WARNING
quickly that some people may not To avoid this, everyone in the
even realize an airbag inflated. The vehicle should get out as soon as A crash severe enough to inflate
front center airbag, if equipped, and it is safe to do so. If you have the airbags may have also
the roof-rail airbags may still be at breathing problems but cannot damaged important functions in
least partially inflated for some time get out of the vehicle after an the vehicle, such as the fuel
after they inflate. Some components (Continued)
(Continued)
of the airbag module may be hot for
crash. A new system will include

WARNING (Continued) airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
system, brake and steering for the vehicle covers the need
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to replace other parts.
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
. The vehicle has a crash sensing
concealed damage that could and diagnostic module which United States
make it difficult to safely operate records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
the vehicle.
Recording and Privacy on
Use caution if you should attempt page 13‑19 and Event Data
to restart the engine after a crash Recorders on page 13‑19.
has occurred. . Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems. Canada and Mexico
In many crashes severe enough to Improper service can mean that
inflate the airbag, windshields are an airbag system will not work The words ON and OFF, or the
broken by vehicle deformation. properly. See your dealer for symbol for on and off, are visible
Additional windshield breakage may service. during the system check. If you use
also occur from the front outboard remote start, if equipped, to start the
passenger airbag. Passenger Sensing vehicle, you may not see the system
check. When the system check is
. Airbags are designed to inflate System complete, either the word ON or
only once. After an airbag The vehicle has a passenger OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
inflates, you will need some new sensing system for the front be visible. See Passenger Airbag
parts for the airbag system. outboard passenger position. The Status Indicator on page 5‑15.
If you do not get them, the passenger airbag status indicator
airbag system will not be there The passenger sensing system
will light on the instrument panel turns off the front outboard
to help protect you in another when the vehicle is started. passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. No other airbag Never put a rear-facing child seat in

is affected by the passenger the front. This is because the risk to WARNING (Continued)
sensing system. the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag inflates. inflate under some unusual
The passenger sensing system circumstance, even though the
works with sensors that are part of airbag is off.
the front outboard passenger seat. { WARNING
The sensors are designed to detect Secure rear-facing child restraints
the presence of a properly-seated A child in a rear-facing child in a rear seat, even if the airbag
occupant and determine if the front restraint can be seriously injured is off. If you secure a
outboard passenger frontal airbag or killed if the passenger frontal forward-facing child restraint in
should be allowed to inflate or not. airbag inflates. This is because the front outboard passenger
the back of the rear-facing child seat, always move the seat as far
According to accident statistics,
restraint would be very close to back as it will go. It is better to
children are safer when properly
the inflating airbag. A child in a secure the child restraint in a
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight forward-facing child restraint can rear seat.
and size. be seriously injured or killed if the
passenger frontal airbag inflates
We recommend that children be The passenger sensing system is
and the passenger seat is in a
secured in a rear seat, including: an designed to turn off the front
forward position. outboard passenger frontal airbag if:
infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child Even if the passenger sensing . The front outboard passenger
riding in a forward-facing child seat; system has turned off the seat is unoccupied.
an older child riding in a booster passenger frontal airbag, no
seat; and children, who are large system is fail-safe. No one can
. The system determines that an
enough, using safety belts. guarantee that an airbag will not infant is present in a child
restraint.
(Continued)

. A front outboard passenger For some children, including If the On Indicator Is Lit for a
takes his/her weight off of the children in child restraints, and for Child Restraint
seat for a period of time. very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn If a child restraint has been installed
. There is a critical problem with and the on indicator is lit:
the airbag system or the off the front outboard passenger
passenger sensing system. frontal airbag, depending upon the 1. Turn the vehicle off.
person’s seating posture and body
When the passenger sensing 2. Remove the child restraint from
build. Everyone in the vehicle who
system has turned off the front the vehicle.
has outgrown child restraints should
outboard passenger frontal airbag, wear a safety belt properly — 3. Remove any additional items
the off indicator will light and stay lit whether or not there is an airbag for from the seat such as blankets,
as a reminder that the airbag is off. that person. cushions, seat covers, seat
See Passenger Airbag Status heaters, or seat massagers.
Indicator on page 5‑15.
The passenger sensing system is
{ WARNING 4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions provided
designed to turn on the front If the airbag readiness light ever by the child restraint
outboard passenger frontal airbag comes on and stays on, it means manufacturer and refer to
anytime the system senses that a that something may be wrong Securing Child Restraints (Front
person of adult size is sitting with the airbag system. To help Passenger Seat) on page 3‑54
properly in the front outboard avoid injury to yourself or others, or Securing Child Restraints
passenger seat. have the vehicle serviced right (Rear Seat) on page 3‑51.
When the passenger sensing away. See Airbag Readiness
system has allowed the airbag to be Light on page 5‑15 for more
enabled, the on indicator will light information, including important
and stay lit as a reminder that the safety information.
airbag is active.
5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an 2. Remove any additional material
restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant from the seat, such as blankets,
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, cushions, seat covers, seat
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly heaters, seat massagers,
recline the vehicle seatback and laptops, or other electronic
adjust the seat cushion, devices.
if adjustable, to make sure that 3. Place the seatback in the fully
the vehicle seatback is not upright position.
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion. 4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
Also make sure the child cushion, with legs comfortably
restraint is not trapped under the extended.
vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
restraint. See Head Restraints person remain in this position for
on page 3‑2. two to three minutes after the on
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
indicator is lit.
6. Restart the vehicle. the front outboard passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could be Additional Factors Affecting
The passenger sensing system
because that person is not sitting System Operation
may or may not turn off the
properly in the seat. Use the
airbag for a child in a child Safety belts help keep the
following steps to allow the system
restraint depending upon the passenger in position on the seat
to detect that person and enable the
child’s seating posture and body during vehicle maneuvers and
front outboard passenger frontal
build. It is better to secure the braking, which helps the passenger
airbag:
child restraint in a rear seat. sensing system maintain the
1. Turn the vehicle off. passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional indicator will be lit, and the

information about the importance of airbag readiness light on the { WARNING
proper restraint use. instrument panel will also be lit.
Stowing of articles under the
A thick layer of additional material, . Liquid pooled on the seat that passenger seat or between the
such as a blanket or cushion, has not soaked in may make it passenger seat cushion and
or aftermarket equipment such as more likely that the passenger seatback may interfere with the
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat sensing system will turn on the proper operation of the passenger
massagers can affect how well the passenger airbag while a child sensing system.
passenger sensing system restraint or child occupant is on
operates. We recommend that you the seat. If the passenger airbag
not use seat covers or other is turned on, the on indicator will Servicing the
aftermarket equipment except when be lit.
approved by GM for your specific
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the seat immediately. If the airbag Airbags affect how the vehicle
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on readiness light is lit, do not install a should be serviced. There are parts
page 3‑35 for more information child restraint or allow anyone to of the airbag system in several
about modifications that can affect occupy the seat. See Airbag places around the vehicle. Your
how the system operates. Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for dealer and the service manual have
A wet seat can affect the important safety information. information about servicing the
performance of the passenger vehicle and the airbag system. To
The on indicator may be lit if an purchase a service manual, see
sensing system. Here is how: object, such as a briefcase, Service Publications Ordering
. The passenger sensing system handbag, grocery bag, laptop or Information on page 13‑17.
may turn off the passenger other electronic device, is put on an
airbag when liquid is soaked into unoccupied seat. If this is not
the seat. If this happens, the off desired remove the object from
the seat.
belts, airbag sensing and diagnostic passenger sensing system. This

{ WARNING module, steering wheel, instrument could either prevent proper
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, deployment of the passenger
For up to 10 seconds after the ceiling or pillar garnish trim, airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
vehicle is turned off and the overhead console, front sensors, sensing system from properly
battery is disconnected, an airbag side impact sensors, airbag wiring, turning off the passenger airbag(s).
can still inflate during improper or the front center console if the See Passenger Sensing System on
service. You can be injured if you vehicle has a front center airbag. page 3‑30.
are close to an airbag when it
Your dealer and the service manual If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
have information about the location airbags, see Different Size Tires
They are probably part of the
of the airbag sensors, sensing and and Wheels on page 10‑52 for
airbag system. Be sure to follow diagnostic module, and airbag additional information.
proper service procedures, and wiring.
make sure the person performing If your vehicle needs to be modified
work for you is qualified to do so. In addition, the vehicle has a because you have a disability and
passenger sensing system that you have questions about whether
includes sensors as part of the front the modifications will affect the
Adding Equipment to the outboard passenger seat. The vehicle's airbag system, or if you
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle passenger sensing system may not have questions about whether the
operate properly if the original seat airbag system will be affected if the
Adding accessories that change the trim is replaced with non-GM vehicle is modified for any other
vehicle's frame, bumper system, covers, upholstery, or trim, or; with reason, call Customer Assistance.
height, front end, or side sheet GM covers, upholstery, or trim See Customer Assistance Offices
metal may keep the airbag system designed for a different vehicle. Any (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or
from working properly. object, such as an aftermarket seat Customer Assistance Offices
The operation of the airbag system heater or a comfort-enhancing pad (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
can also be affected by changing or device, installed under or on top
any parts of the front seats, safety of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the
Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
regularly scheduled maintenance or
If the airbag readiness light stays on
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the airbag on when you are driving, the airbag
page 5‑15. systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system may the vehicle serviced right away. See
Notice: If an airbag covering is Airbag Readiness Light on
damaged, opened, or broken, the not work properly and may not
page 5‑15.
airbag may not work properly. Do protect you and your
not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death. To
opened or broken airbag covers, help make sure the airbag
have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly
airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them
location of the airbags, see inspected and any necessary
Where Are the Airbags? on replacements made as soon as
page 3‑25. See your dealer for possible.
service.

. Can proper safety belt fit be
Child Restraints The manufacturer instructions that
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts?
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs.
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash.
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the
Older children who have outgrown abdomen, which could cause
page 3‑16. If the shoulder belt
booster seats should wear the severe or even fatal internal
still does not rest on the
vehicle safety belts. injuries in a crash.
shoulder, then return to the
booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 3‑16.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when WARNING (Continued)
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint belt. The belt force would then be
system secured in a rear seating applied right on the abdomen.
position. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
In a crash, children who are not go over the shoulder and across
buckled up can strike other people the chest.
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never allow a child to wear the
Never allow more than one child
safety belt with the shoulder belt
to wear the same safety belt. The
behind their back. A child can be
safety belt cannot properly spread
seriously injured by not wearing
the impact forces. In a crash, they
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
can be crushed together and
crash, the child would not be
seriously injured. A safety belt
restrained by the shoulder belt.
must be used by only one person
The child could move too far
at a time.
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's arms. An infant should be
protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag secured in an appropriate
all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every restraint.
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never hold an infant or a child
Children can be seriously injured while riding in a vehicle. Due to
or strangled if a shoulder belt is crash forces, an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and will become so heavy it is not
the safety belt continues to possible to hold it during a crash.
tighten. Never leave children For example, in a crash at only
unattended in a vehicle and never 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
allow children to play with the infant will suddenly become a
safety belts. 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
(Continued)
sure it is designed to be used in

{ WARNING a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
Children who are up against, that it meets federal motor
or very close to, any airbag when vehicle safety standards.
it inflates can be seriously injured
The restraint manufacturer
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
instructions that come with the
child restraint in the right front
restraint state the weight and
seat. Secure a rear-facing child height limitations for a particular
restraint in a rear seat. child restraint. In addition, there
It is also better to secure a are many kinds of restraints
forward-facing child restraint in a available for children with
rear seat. If a forward-facing child Q: What are the different types of special needs.
restraint must be secured in the add-on child restraints?
right front seat, always move the A: Add-on child restraints, which { WARNING
front passenger seat as far back are purchased by the vehicle
as it will go. owner, are available in four basic To reduce the risk of neck and
types. Selection of a particular head injury during a crash, infants
If a child restraint is installed in need complete support. In a
restraint should take into
the second row center seat, move crash, if an infant is in a
consideration not only the child's
the second row seat to the rear-facing child restraint, the
weight, height, and age but also
rearward position, whenever whether or not the restraint will crash forces can be distributed
possible, to minimize contact with be compatible with the motor across the strongest part of an
the front center airbag, vehicle in which it will be used. infant's body, the back and
if equipped. shoulders. Infants should always
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many be secured in rear-facing child
different models available. When restraints.
purchasing a child restraint, be
Child Restraint Systems

{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal Forward-Facing Child Seat
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides
crash, young children should restraint for the child's body with the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness.
always be secured in appropriate restraint with the seating surface
child restraints. against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child Children can be endangered in a

Restraint in the Vehicle crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
{ WARNING When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual.
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer.
Booster Seats instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured
A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a
designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure
vehicle's safety belt system. people in the vehicle. Be sure to
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured the vehicle — even when no child is
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas, Certified Child
seats by lap belts or the lap belt Passenger Safety Technicians
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by (CPSTs) are available to inspect
the LATCH system. See Lower and demonstrate how to correctly
Anchors and Tethers for Children use and install child restraints. In
(LATCH System) on page 3‑44. the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website to
locate the nearest child safety seat We recommend that children and
inspection station. For CPST child restraints be secured in a rear WARNING (Continued)
availability in Canada, check with seat, including: an infant or a child
Transport Canada or the Provincial riding in a rear-facing child restraint; rear-facing child restraint would
Ministry of Transportation office. a child riding in a forward-facing be very close to the inflating
child seat; an older child riding in a airbag. A child in a forward-facing
Securing the Child within the booster seat; and children, who are child restraint can be seriously
Child Restraint large enough, using safety belts. injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
The vehicle may be equipped with a
{ WARNING front center airbag in the inboard
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
A child can be seriously injured or side of the driver seat. Even with a
front center airbag, a child restraint Even if the passenger sensing
killed in a crash if the child is not
can be installed in any second row system has turned off the right
properly secured in the child
seating position. front passenger frontal airbag, no
restraint. Secure the child
Never put a rear-facing child seat in system is fail-safe. No one can
properly following the instructions
the front. This is because the risk to guarantee that an airbag will not
that came with that child restraint.
the rear-facing child is so great if the deploy under some unusual
airbag deploys. circumstance, even though it is
Where to Put the turned off. Secure rear-facing
Restraint { WARNING child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the front passenger frontal
According to accident statistics, A child in a rear-facing child airbag is off.
children and infants are safer when restraint can be seriously injured
properly restrained in a child It is also better to secure a
or killed if the right front forward-facing child restraint in a
restraint system or infant restraint passenger airbag inflates. This is
system secured in a rear seating rear seat. If a forward-facing child
because the back of the
position. (Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
better than others. Always make Lower Anchors and
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
Tethers for Children
restraint must be secured in the (LATCH System)
right front seat, always move the Depending on where you place the
front passenger seat as far back child restraint and the size of the The LATCH system secures a child
as it will go. child restraint, you may not be able restraint during driving or in a crash.
to access adjacent safety belt LATCH attachments on the child
See Passenger Sensing System assemblies or LATCH anchors for restraint are used to attach the child
on page 3‑30 for additional additional passengers or child restraint to the anchors in the
information. restraints. Adjacent seating vehicle. This system is designed to
If a child restraint is installed in a positions should not be used if the make installation of a child restraint
child restraint prevents access to or easier.
second row center seat, move the
interferes with the routing of the Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
second row seat to the rearward
safety belt. child restraint is properly installed
position, whenever possible, to
minimize contact with the front Wherever a child restraint is using the anchors, or use the
center airbag, if equipped. installed, be sure to secure the child vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint properly. restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
When securing a child restraint in a Keep in mind that an unsecured
also the instructions in this manual.
rear seating position, study the child restraint can move around in a
When installing a child restraint with
instructions that came with the child collision or sudden stop and injure
a top tether, you must also use
restraint to make sure it is people in the vehicle. Be sure to
either the lower anchors or the
compatible with this vehicle. properly secure any child restraint in
safety belts to properly secure the
the vehicle — even when no child is
Child restraints and booster seats child restraint. A child restraint must
in it.
vary considerably in size, and some never be attached using only the top
may fit in certain seating positions tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor
your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of
built into the vehicle. There are two the child restraint to the vehicle.
lower anchors for each LATCH A top tether anchor is built into the
seating position that will vehicle. The top tether
accommodate a child restraint with attachment (2) on the child restraint
lower attachments (2). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
The child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Anchor Locations
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be Second Row — 60/40 Bench
attached. Be sure to read and follow I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
the instructions for your child positions with top tether anchors.
Second Row — Bucket
restraint.
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors. positions with two lower anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
Be sure to use an anchor on the

same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
To assist in locating the top tether

anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is near the anchor.
Third Row
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
Third Row
The third row has one top tether
anchor at the bottom rear of the
center seatback. This anchor should
be used for the center seating
Second Row — Bucket Shown, position only. Never install two top
To assist in locating the lower Bench Similar tethers using the same top tether
anchors, each second row anchor The top tether anchors are at the anchor.
position has a label, near the crease bottom rear of the seatback for each Do not secure a child restraint in a
between the seatback and the seat seating position in the second row. position without a top tether anchor
cushion. if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if

the instructions that come with the WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. anchors, or use the vehicle safety Children can be seriously injured
belts to secure the restraint, or strangled if a shoulder belt is
According to accident statistics, following the instructions that wrapped around their neck and
children and infants are safer when came with the child restraint and the safety belt continues to
properly restrained in a child the instructions in this manual. tighten. Buckle any unused safety
restraint system or infant restraint belts behind the child restraint so
system secured in a rear seating
children cannot reach them. Pull
position. See Where to Put the
the shoulder belt all the way out
Restraint on page 3‑43 for
additional information.
{ WARNING of the retractor to set the lock,
Do not attach more than one child if the vehicle has one, after the
Securing a Child Restraint restraint to a single anchor. child restraint has been installed.
Designed for the LATCH Attaching more than one child
System restraint to a single anchor could Notice: Do not let the LATCH
cause the anchor or attachment attachments rub against the
{ WARNING to come loose or even break vehicle’s safety belts. This may
during a crash. A child or others damage these parts. If necessary,
If a LATCH-type child restraint is could be injured. To reduce the move buckled safety belts to
not attached to anchors, the child risk of serious or fatal injuries avoid rubbing the LATCH
restraint will not be able to protect during a crash, attach only one attachments.
the child correctly. In a crash, the child restraint per anchor. Do not fold the empty rear seat
child could be seriously injured or with a safety belt buckled. This
killed. Install a LATCH-type child could damage the safety belt or
restraint properly using the the seat. Unbuckle and return the
(Continued) safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
The vehicle may be equipped with a does not have lower 1.4. Attach and tighten the lower
front center airbag in the inboard attachments or the desired attachments on the child
side of the driver seat. Even with a seating position does not have restraint to the lower
front center airbag, a child restraint lower anchors, secure the child anchors.
can be installed in any second row restraint with the top tether and If necessary, adjust the
seating position. If a child restraint is the safety belts. Refer to your angle of the second row
installed in a second row center child restraint manufacturer seatback to achieve a tight
seat, move the second row seat to instructions and the instructions installation. Make sure the
the rearward position, whenever in this manual. second row bench
possible, to minimize contact with 1.1. Find the lower anchors for seatbacks are aligned at
the front center airbag. the desired seating the same angle.
If you need to secure more than one position. 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
child restraint in the rear seat, see 1.2. To access the lower recommends that the top tether
Where to Put the Restraint on anchors in the second row, be attached, attach and tighten
page 3‑43. it may help to recline the the top tether to the top tether
This system is designed to make seatback. anchor, if the vehicle has one.
installation of child restraints easier. Third row seatbacks must Refer to the child restraint
When using lower anchors, do not be upright before placing instructions and the following
use the vehicle's safety belts. the child restraint on steps:
Instead, use the vehicle's anchors the seat. 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
and child restraint attachments to
secure the restraints. Some 1.3. Put the child restraint on
restraints also use another vehicle the seat.
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten If the position you are using If the position you are using
the top tether according to does not have a headrest does not have a headrest
your child restraint or head restraint and you or head restraint and you
instructions and the are using a single tether, are using a dual tether,
following instructions: route the tether over the route the tether over the
seatback. seatback.
If the position you are using 3. Before placing a child in the

has a fixed headrest or child restraint, make sure it is WARNING (Continued)
head restraint and you are securely held in place. To check,
using a dual tether, route grasp the child restraint at the system inspected and any
the tether around the LATCH path and attempt to necessary replacements made as
headrest or head restraint. move it side to side and back soon as possible.
and forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of If the vehicle has the LATCH system
movement, for proper and it was being used during a
installation. crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
Replacing LATCH System New parts and repairs may be
Parts After a Crash necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
{ WARNING time of the crash.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
A crash can damage the LATCH Securing Child Restraints
system in the vehicle. A damaged (Rear Seat)
head restraint and you are
LATCH system may not properly
using a single tether, route The vehicle may be equipped with a
the tether over the headrest secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even front center airbag in the inboard
or head restraint. side of the driver seat. Even with a
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is front center airbag, a child restraint
working properly after a crash, can be installed in any second row
see your dealer to have the seating position. If you install a child
restraint in a second row center
(Continued) seat, move the second row seat to
the rearward position, whenever In Canada, the law requires that

possible, to minimize contact with forward-facing child restraints have
the front center airbag. a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in a attached.
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be
If the child restraint has the LATCH sure to follow the instructions that
system, see Lower Anchors and came with the child restraint. Secure
Tethers for Children (LATCH the child in the child restraint when
System) on page 3‑44 for how and and as the instructions say.
where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the
using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear buckle until it clicks.
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3‑43. the buckle so that the safety belt
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for 1. Put the child restraint on could be quickly unbuckled if
Children (LATCH System) on the seat. necessary.
page 3‑44 for top tether anchor
locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
Do not secure a child seat in a the vehicle's safety belt through
position without a top tether anchor or around the restraint. The child
if a national or local law requires restraint instructions will show
that the top tether be anchored, or if you how.
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑44 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
set, the shoulder belt can be tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
tightened but not pulled out of and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
the retractor. into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint,
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Securing Child Restraints

(Front Passenger Seat)
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints
is a safer place to secure a restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
forward-facing child restraint. See or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a
Where to Put the Restraint on passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in
page 3‑43. because the back of the the right front seat, always move
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
In addition, the vehicle has a be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
passenger sensing system which is
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
designed to turn off the right front
child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System
Sensing System on page 3‑30 and passenger airbag inflates and the on page 3‑30 for additional
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator passenger seat is in a forward information.
on page 5‑15 for more information, position.
including important safety Even if the passenger sensing
information. system has turned off the right
Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no
the front. This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can
the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not
if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
(Continued)
If the child restraint has the LATCH Do not secure a child seat in a You will be using the lap-shoulder
system, see Lower Anchors and position without a top tether anchor belt to secure the child restraint in
Tethers for Children (LATCH if a national or local law requires this position. Follow the instructions
System) on page 3‑44 for how and that the top tether be anchored, or if that came with the child restraint.
where to install the child restraint the instructions that come with the 1. Move the seat as far back as it
using LATCH. If a child restraint is child restraint say that the top strap will go before securing the
secured using a safety belt and it must be anchored. forward-facing child restraint.
uses a top tether, see Lower In Canada, the law requires that
Anchors and Tethers for Children When the passenger sensing
forward-facing child restraints have system has turned off the right
(LATCH System) on page 3‑44 for a top tether, and that the tether be
top tether anchor locations. front passenger frontal airbag,
attached. the off indicator on the
passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit
when the vehicle is started. See
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑15.
2. Put the child restraint on

the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor.
necessary.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the airbags are off, the off
retractor to make sure the indicator in the passenger airbag
retractor is locked. If the status indicator will come on and
retractor is not locked repeat stay on when the vehicle is started.
Steps 5 and 6. If a child restraint has been installed
7. Before placing a child in the and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
child restraint, make sure it is On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
securely held in place. To check, Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
grasp the child restraint at the System on page 3‑30 for more
safety belt path and attempt to information.
move it side to side and back To remove the child restraint,
and forth. When the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
6. To tighten the belt, push down restraint is properly installed, let it return to the stowed position.
on the child restraint, pull the there should be no more than
shoulder portion of the belt to 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Glove Box

Compartments Lift the glove box handle to open it.
Use the key to lock and unlock the
Storage Compartments glove box.
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Cupholders
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 There are two cupholders, with
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 removable liners, in front of the
center console. There may be
Additional Storage Features cupholders in the second row seat
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 armrest. To access, pull the armrest
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 down. There are additional
Cargo Management cupholders on each side of the third
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 row seat and in each door.
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
This vehicle has an instrument
panel storage area. To open the
cover, press the button.
This vehicle has an auxiliary input
jack on the faceplate. For vehicles
with a USB port, it in the instrument
panel storage. See Auxiliary
Devices on page 7‑35.
4-2 Storage
Armrest Storage Center Console Storage
There is additional storage under

the armrest. Move the armrest all
Vehicles with a rear seat armrest Pull up on the lever, on the front of the way to the rear position, then
have two cupholders. Pull the the center console armrest, to slide slide the storage cover back to
armrest down to access the it forward and backward. To open access.
cupholders. the armrest storage area, press the There is a removable tray in the
button on the front of the armrest. storage area. Pull up on the tray to
remove and access the lower
storage area and power outlet. See
Power Outlets on page 5‑8.
Storage 4-3
Additional Storage Cargo Management

System
{ WARNING
Features An improperly latched and closed
This vehicle has a cargo
cargo cover, or cargo cover left in
Cargo Cover management system located in
the open position, could be
the rear.
For vehicles with a cargo cover, it thrown about the vehicle during a
can be used to cover items in the crash or sudden maneuver.
rear of the vehicle. To install the Someone could be injured. Be
cover, place the loops on each sure to return the cover to the
corner of the cover on the four closed position and latch before
hooks in the rear of the vehicle. The driving. If the cover is removed,
cover should be stored securely always store it outside of the
when not in use. vehicle. When it is replaced,
always be sure that it is securely
Cargo Tie-Downs reattached.
Four cargo tie‐downs are located in
the rear compartment of the vehicle. 3. Remove the cover from the
The tie-downs can be used to vehicle and store outside of the
secure small loads. To remove the cargo management vehicle.
cover:
1. Open the cover. It remains open
when lifted.
2. Pull the cover up making sure to
unhook the hinges at the rear of
the cover.
4-4 Storage
Convenience Net For vehicles with a convenience Roof Rack System

net (4), attach it to the vehicle using
only the cargo tie-downs (3) on
each side. The net is used to store { WARNING
small loads and should not be used
heavy loads. If something is carried on top of
the vehicle that is longer or wider
The cargo cover hooks (2) are used than the roof rack — like paneling,
to attach the cargo cover (1) to the plywood, or a mattress — the
vehicle only. Do not use the hooks wind can catch it while the vehicle
to secure loads or other items to the is being driven. The item being
vehicle or the hooks could be
carried could be violently torn off,
damaged.
and this could cause a collision
and damage the vehicle. Never
Power Liftgate Shown, Manual carry something longer or wider
Liftgate Similar than the roof rack on top of the
1. Cargo Cover vehicle unless using a GM
certified accessory carrier.
2. Cargo Cover Hooks
3. Cargo Tie-Downs For vehicles with a roof rack, the
4. Convenience Net rack can be used to load items. For
roof racks that do not have
crossrails included, GM Certified
crossrails can be purchased as an
accessory. See your dealer for
additional information.
Storage 4-5
Notice: Loading cargo on the To prevent damage or loss of cargo If driving for a long distance, on
roof rack that weighs more than when driving, check to make sure rough roads, or at high speeds,
91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the crossrails and cargo are securely occasionally stop the vehicle to
rear or sides of the vehicle may fastened. Loading cargo on the roof make sure the cargo remains in its
damage the vehicle. Load cargo rack will make the vehicle’s center place. Do not exceed the maximum
so that it rests evenly between of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, vehicle capacity when loading the
the crossrails, making sure to sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden vehicle.
fasten cargo securely. braking, or abrupt maneuvers; See Vehicle Load Limits on
otherwise it may result in loss of page 9‑9.
control.
4-6 Storage
2 NOTES
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Information Displays
Driver Information Center
Controls Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-14
(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 5-24
Driver Information Center
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15 (DIC) (Without DIC
Controls Passenger Airbag Status Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-16 Vehicle Messages
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-4 Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Battery Voltage and Charging
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-32
Rear Window Wiper/ Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-32
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Engine Cooling System
Clock (Radio without Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-21
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-34
Clock (Radio with Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-35
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-35
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-22 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-35
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Indicators High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Object Detection System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Ride Control System
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-38
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-38
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-39 Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel

Vehicle Reminder while driving.
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-40 Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Controls
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-41 Adjustment
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-48
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Vehicles with audio steering wheel

To adjust the steering wheel: controls could differ depending on
1. Pull the lever down. the vehicle's options. Some audio
controls can be adjusted at the
2. Move the steering wheel up steering wheel.
or down.
w or c /x (Next/Previous):
3. Pull or push the steering wheel Press to select preset or favorite
closer or away from you. radio stations, select tracks on a CD
4. Push the lever up to lock the or select tracks and navigate folders
steering wheel in place. on an iPod or USB device.
To select preset or favorite radio 2. Press and release w or c /x For vehicles with OnStar® systems.
stations: to go back to the previous See OnStar Overview on page 14‑1.
. Press and release w or c /x folder list. c /x (End): Press to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call.
to go to the next or previous 3. Press and release w or c /x
radio station stored as a preset to scroll up or down the list SRCE (Source): Press to switch
or favorite. between the radio, CD, and for
. To select a folder, press equipped vehicles, front auxiliary,
To select tracks on a CD:
and hold w , or press ¨ and rear auxiliary.
Press and release w or c /x to when the folder is
highlighted.
¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next
go to the next or previous track. radio station while in AM, FM,
To select tracks on an iPod or USB . To go back further in the or SiriusXM®.
device: folder list, press and hold
c /x . Press ¨ to go to the next track or
1. Press and hold w or c /x chapter while sourced to the
while listening to a song until the b /g (Mute/Push to Talk): For CD slot.
contents of the current folder vehicles without Touchscreen, press
display on the radio display. to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press ¨ to select a track or a folder
Press again to turn the sound on. when navigating folders on an iPod
2. Press and release w or c /x For vehicles with OnStar® systems, or USB device.
to scroll up or down the list, then press and hold for longer than
press and hold , or press to play two seconds to interact with those + e or − e (Volume): Press to
the highlighted track. systems. increase or to decrease the volume.
1. Press and hold w or c /x For vehicles with Touchscreen,

press and hold to silence the
while listening to a song until the
vehicle speakers only. Press again
contents of the current folder
display on the radio display. to turn the sound on. Press to
interact with OnStar® or Bluetooth
systems.
Heated Steering Wheel Windshield Wiper/Washer Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
The windshield wiper/washer lever to the windshield, carefully loosen or
is located on the left side of the thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
steering column. should be replaced. See Wiper
Turn the band with the wiper symbol Blade Replacement on page 10‑24.
to control the windshield wipers. Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wipers. A circuit breaker stops them
until the motor cools.
Windshield Washer
J FRONT (Washer Fluid): Press
the button at the end of the lever, to
spray washer fluid on the
windshield. The wipers clear the
( (Heated Steering Wheel): For 8 (Mist): Use for a single wiping windshield and either stop or return
vehicles with a heated steering cycle. to the preset speed. The ignition key
wheel, press to turn it on or off. must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
A light on the button displays when ON/RUN for this to work. See
the feature is turned on. 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Washer Fluid on page 10‑19.
Delays wiping cycle. Turn the band
The steering wheel takes about up for more frequent wipes or down
three minutes to start heating. for less frequent wipes.
Horn LO: Slow wipes.

HI: Fast wipes.
Press a on the steering wheel pad
to sound the horn.
Release the button when enough Under certain circumstances, such

{ WARNING fluid has been sprayed on the as during a long distance
window. The rear wiper will run a cross-country trip or moving to a
In freezing weather, do not use few more cycles after it is released. new state or province, it will be
the washer until the windshield is If the rear wiper function was necessary to compensate for
warmed. Otherwise the washer already on prior to pressing the compass variance by resetting the
fluid can form ice on the wash button, it stays on until the zone through the DIC if the zone is
windshield, blocking your vision. wiper button is pressed again. not set correctly.
The rear window washer uses the Compass variance is the difference
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID same fluid that is in the windshield between the earth's magnetic north
is displayed on the Driver washer reservoir. See Washer Fluid and true geographic north. If the
Information Center (DIC) when the on page 10‑19. compass is not set to the zone
washer fluid is low. See Washer where you live, the compass may
Fluid Messages on page 5‑41. Compass give false readings. The compass
must be set to the variance zone in
Rear Window Wiper/ Your vehicle may have a compass which the vehicle is traveling.
in the Driver Information Center
Washer (DIC). See Driver Information
The rear wiper and rear wash button Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
is located on the instrument panel on page 5‑29 or Driver Information
below the climate control system. Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
page 5‑24 for more information
Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the about the DIC.
rear wiper on and off. The wiper
speed cannot be changed. Compass Zone
Y (Wash): Press to spray washer The zone is set to zone eight upon
fluid on the rear window. The leaving the factory. Your dealer will
window wiper will also come on. set the correct zone for your
location.
To adjust for compass variance, use 2. Find the vehicle's current from tall buildings, utility wires,
the following procedure: location and variance zone manhole covers, or other industrial
number on the map. structures, if possible.
Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure Zones 1 through 15 are If CAL should ever appear in the
available. DIC display, the compass should be
1. Do not set the compass zone
3. Press the set/reset button to calibrated.
when the vehicle is moving. Only
set it when the vehicle is in scroll through and select the If the DIC display does not show a
P (Park). appropriate variance zone. heading, for example, N for North,
4. Press the trip/fuel button until or the heading does not change
Press the vehicle information
the vehicle heading, for after making turns, there may be a
button until PRESS V TO strong magnetic field interfering with
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE example, N for North, is
displayed in the DIC. the compass. Such interference
displays. may be caused by a magnetic CB or
5. If calibration is necessary, cell phone antenna mount, a
calibrate the compass. See magnetic emergency light, magnetic
“Compass Calibration note pad holder, or any other
Procedure” following. magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
Compass Calibration move the magnetic item, then turn
on the vehicle and calibrate the
The compass can be manually compass.
calibrated. Only calibrate the
compass in a magnetically clean
and safe location, such as an open
parking lot, where driving the
vehicle in circles is not a danger.
It is suggested to calibrate away
To calibrate the compass, use the CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a . Press \ FWD.
following procedure: few seconds when the
calibration is complete. The DIC
. Turn f clockwise.
Compass Calibration Procedure display will then return to the 5. To decrease the time or date, do
1. Before calibrating the compass, previous menu. one of the following:
make sure the compass zone is
set to the variance zone in which Clock (Radio without . Press © SEEK.
the vehicle is located. See
“Compass Variance (Zone)
Touchscreen) . Press s REV.
Procedure” earlier in this To adjust the time and date: . Turn f counterclockwise.
section. 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ To change the time default setting
Do not operate any switches ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then from 12 hour to 24 hour or to
such as window, sunroof, press O to turn the radio on. change the date default setting from
climate controls, seats, etc. month/day/year to day/month/year:
during the calibration procedure. 2. Press G to display HR, MIN,
2. Press the vehicle information MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, 1. Press G and then the
month, day, and year). pushbutton located under the
button until PRESS V TO
3. Press the pushbutton located forward arrow that displays on
CALIBRATE COMPASS the radio screen until the time
displays. under any one of the labels to be
changed. 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and
3. Press the set/reset button to the date MM/DD (month and
start the compass calibration. 4. To increase the time or date, do day) and DD/MM (day and
one of the following: month) display.
4. The DIC will display
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
. Press the pushbutton below 2. Press the pushbutton located
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in the selected label. under the desired option.
tight circles at less than 8 km/h . Press ¨ SEEK.
(5 mph) to complete the
calibration. The DIC will display
3. Press G again to apply the Set Time: Power Outlets

selected default, or let the . Press the up or down arrows to The vehicle has 12-volt outlets that
screen time out. increase or decrease the Hours, can be used to plug in electrical
Minutes, AM, PM, or 24 hr on equipment, such as a cell phone or
Clock (Radio with the clock. MP3 player.
Touchscreen) . Press and hold to quickly The power outlets are on the center
increase or decrease the time stack below the climate controls,
settings. inside the center floor console, at
. Press OK or the Back screen the rear of the center console, and
button to save the adjustments. in the rear cargo area. Lift the cover
to access the outlet and replace
Set Date: when not in use.
. Press the up or down arrows to
increase or decrease the Month,
Day, and Year settings.
{ WARNING
. Press and hold to quickly Power is always supplied to the
increase or decrease the date outlets. Do not leave electrical
settings. equipment plugged in when the
vehicle is not in use because the
. Press OK or the Back screen
Press Settings on the Home Page, vehicle could catch fire and cause
button to save the adjustments.
then press the Set Time or Set Date injury or death.
settings screen button to display the
different options for setting the time
and date. Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while the
vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Always unplug electrical
equipment when not in use and Power Outlet 120 Volt An indicator light on the outlet turns
do not plug in equipment that Alternating Current on to show it is in use. The light
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere comes on when the ignition is in
rating. The vehicle may have a power ON/RUN and equipment requiring
outlet that can be used to plug in less than 150 watts is plugged into
Certain accessory plugs may not be electrical equipment that uses a
compatible with the accessory the outlet, and no system fault is
maximum limit of 150 watts. detected.
power outlet and could overload
vehicle and adapter fuses. If a The indicator light does not come on
problem is experienced, see your when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or
dealer. if the equipment is not fully seated
When adding electrical equipment, into the outlet.
be sure to follow the proper If equipment is connected using
installation instructions included with more than 150 watts or a system
the equipment. See Add-On fault is detected, a protection circuit
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑50. shuts off the power supply and the
Notice: Hanging heavy indicator light turns off. To reset the
equipment from the power outlet The power outlet is on the rear of circuit, unplug the item and plug it
can cause damage not covered the center console. back in or turn the Retained
by the vehicle warranty. The Accessory Power (RAP) off and
power outlets are designed for then back on. See Retained
accessory power plugs only, such Accessory Power (RAP) on
as cell phone charge cords. page 9‑18. The power restarts when
equipment using 150 watts or less is
plugged into the outlet and a system
fault is not detected.
The power outlet is not designed for Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
and may not work properly, if the could be a problem with a vehicle
following are plugged in: Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
. Equipment with high initial peak Indicators problem with the vehicle.
wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
and electric power tools. signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
. Other equipment requiring an to cause an expensive repair or
extremely stable power supply shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
such as: warning lights and gauges could
microcomputer-controlled to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
electric blankets, touch sensor
lamps, etc. Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
See High Voltage Devices and function. Some warning lights come
Wiring on page 10‑28. on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Instrument Cluster
English Uplevel Shown, Metric Similar

Speedometer Fuel Gauge When the ignition is on, the fuel

gauge shows how much fuel is left
The speedometer shows the in the tank.
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per An arrow on the fuel gauge
hour (mph). indicates the side of the vehicle the
fuel door is on.
Odometer The gauge will first indicate empty
before the vehicle is out of fuel, but
The odometer shows how far the
the vehicle's fuel tank should be
vehicle has been driven, in either
filled soon.
kilometers or miles.
When the fuel tank is low on fuel,
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
appear on the Driver Information
new odometer installed, the new Metric Center (DIC). For more information
one is set to the mileage of the old
see Fuel System Messages on
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
page 5‑35.
set at zero and a label is put on the
driver door to show the old mileage Here are some situations that may
reading. occur with the fuel gauge. None of
these indicate a problem with the
Tachometer fuel gauge.
The tachometer displays the engine
. At the gas station, the gas pump
speed in revolutions per shuts off before the gauge
minute (rpm). reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
English indicated. For example, the
gauge might have indicated the Engine Coolant

tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
Temperature Gauge
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
. The gauge does not go back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
English
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the gauge
Metric
pointer moves into the red area, it
means that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been
operated under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle, and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑16 for more information.
Voltmeter Gauge Readings in the low warning zone

can occur when a large number of
electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left
idling for an extended period.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, a SERVICE When the vehicle is started, this
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM light flashes and a chime may come
message will appear in the Driver on to remind the driver to fasten
Information Center (DIC) and/or the their safety belt. Then the light stays
charging system light comes on. on solid until the belt is buckled.
See Battery Voltage and Charging This cycle may continue several
Messages on page 5‑32 for more times if the driver remains or
information. becomes unbuckled while the
vehicle is moving.
When the engine is not running, but However, readings in either warning
the ignition is on, this gauge zone may indicate a possible If the driver safety belt is buckled,
displays the battery voltage in problem in the electrical system. neither the chime nor the light
DC volts. Have the vehicle serviced as soon comes on.
as possible.
When the engine is running, this Passenger Safety Belt
gauge shows the condition of the Reminder Light
charging system. The vehicle's Safety Belt Reminders
charging system regulates voltage There is a passenger safety belt
Driver Safety Belt Reminder reminder light near the passenger
based on the state of charge of the
Light airbag status indicator. See
battery. The voltmeter may fluctuate.
This is normal. Readings between There is a driver safety belt Passenger Sensing System on
the low and high warning zones reminder light on the instrument page 3‑30.
indicate the normal operating range. cluster.
Airbag Readiness Light

{ WARNING
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag If the airbag readiness light stays
system. The system check includes on after the vehicle is started or
the airbag sensor(s), passenger comes on while driving, it means
sensing system, the pretensioners, the airbag system might not be
When the vehicle is started, this the airbag modules, the wiring, and working properly. The airbags in
light flashes and a chime may come the crash sensing and diagnostic the vehicle might not inflate in a
on to remind passengers to fasten module. For more information on the
their safety belt. Then the light stays crash, or they could even inflate
airbag system, see Airbag System without a crash. To help avoid
on solid until the belt is buckled. on page 3‑23.
This cycle continues several times if injury, have the vehicle serviced
the passenger remains or becomes right away.
unbuckled while the vehicle is
moving. If there is a problem with the airbag
If the passenger safety belt is system, a Driver Information Center
buckled, neither the chime nor the (DIC) message may also come on.
light comes on. See Airbag System Messages on
page 5‑38.
The front passenger safety belt The airbag readiness light comes on
warning light and chime may turn on for several seconds when the
if an object is put on the seat such vehicle is started. If the light does Passenger Airbag Status
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery not come on then, have it fixed Indicator
bag, laptop, or other electronic immediately. The vehicle has a passenger
device. To turn off the warning light sensing system. See Passenger
and/or chime, remove the object Sensing System on page 3‑30 for
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
important safety information. The on or off symbol to let you know the
instrument panel has a passenger status of the front outboard { WARNING
airbag status indicator. passenger frontal airbag.
If the airbag readiness light ever
If the word ON or the on symbol is comes on and stays on, it means
lit on the passenger airbag status that something may be wrong
indicator, it means that the front with the airbag system. To help
outboard passenger frontal airbag is avoid injury to yourself or others,
allowed to inflate. have the vehicle serviced right
If the word OFF or the off symbol is away. See Airbag Readiness
United States lit on the passenger airbag status Light on page 5‑15 for more
indicator, it means that the information, including important
passenger sensing system has safety information.
turned off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
Charging System Light
indicator lights remain on, or if there
Canada and Mexico are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
When the vehicle is started, the passenger sensing system. See
passenger airbag status indicator your dealer for service.
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. If you use The charging system light comes on
remote start, if equipped, to start the briefly when the ignition is turned
vehicle, you may not see the system on, but the engine is not running, as
check. Then, after several more
seconds, the status indicator will
light either ON or OFF, or either the
a check to show the light is working. Malfunction Malfunctions often are indicated by
It should go out when the engine is the system before any problem is
started.
Indicator Lamp apparent. Being aware of the light
If the light stays on, or comes on A computer system called OBD II can prevent more serious damage
while driving, there may be a (On-Board Diagnostics-Second to the vehicle. This system also
problem with the electrical charging Generation) monitors the operation assists the service technician in
system. Have it checked by your of the vehicle to ensure emissions correctly diagnosing any
dealer. Driving while this light is on are at acceptable levels, helping to malfunction.
could drain the battery. maintain a clean environment. The Notice: If the vehicle is
malfunction indicator lamp comes continually driven with this light
When this light comes on, the Driver on when the vehicle is placed in
Information Center (DIC) also on, the emission controls might
ON/RUN, as a check to show it is not work as well, the vehicle fuel
displays the SERVICE BATTERY working. If it does not, have the
CHARGING SYSTEM message. economy might not be as good,
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See and the engine might not run as
See Vehicle Messages on Ignition Positions on page 9‑14. smoothly. This could lead to
page 5‑31 for more information. costly repairs that might not be
If a short distance must be driven covered by the vehicle warranty.
with the light on, be sure to turn off Notice: Modifications made to the
all accessories, such as the radio engine, transmission, exhaust,
and air conditioner. intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than
If the malfunction indicator lamp those of the same Tire
comes on while the engine is Performance Criteria (TPC) can
running, this indicates that the OBD affect the vehicle's emission
II system has detected a problem controls and can cause this light
and diagnosis and service might be to come on.
required.
Modifications to these systems If the light continues to flash, find a

. Check that good quality fuel is
could lead to costly repairs not safe place to stop and park the used. Poor fuel quality causes
covered by the vehicle warranty. vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at the engine not to run as
This could also result in a failure least 10 seconds, and restart the efficiently as designed and may
to pass a required Emission engine. If the light is still flashing, cause stalling after start-up,
Inspection/Maintenance test. See follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is
Accessories and Modifications on your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring,
page 10‑2. possible. hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
This light comes on during a Light On Steady: An emission These conditions might go away
malfunction in one of two ways: control system malfunction has once the engine is warmed up.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
has been detected. A misfire occurs, change the fuel brand used.
increases vehicle emissions and required.
It may require at least one full tank
could damage the emission control The following may correct an of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis emission control system
and service might be required. malfunction: See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑38.
To prevent more serious damage to . Check that the fuel cap is fully
the vehicle: installed. See Filling the Tank on If none of the above have made the
page 9‑41. The diagnostic light turn off, your dealer can check
. Reduce vehicle speed. the vehicle. The dealer has the
system can determine if the fuel
. Avoid hard accelerations. cap has been left off or proper test equipment and
improperly installed. A loose or diagnostic tools to fix any
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
missing fuel cap allows fuel to mechanical or electrical problems
. If towing a trailer, reduce the evaporate into the atmosphere. that might have developed.
amount of cargo being hauled as A few driving trips with the cap
soon as it is possible. properly installed should turn the
light off.
Emissions Inspection and the ignition is turned to ON/RUN Brake System Warning
Maintenance Programs while the engine is off. See your
dealer for assistance in verifying
Light
Depending on where you live, your proper operation of the The vehicle brake system consists
vehicle may be required to malfunction indicator lamp. of two hydraulic circuits. If one
participate in an emission control circuit is not working, the remaining
system inspection and maintenance . The OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics) system determines circuit can still work to stop the
program. For the inspection, the vehicle. For normal braking
emission system test equipment will that critical emission control
systems have not been performance, both circuits need to
likely connect to the vehicle's Data be working
Link Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed. The
vehicle would be considered not If the warning light comes on, there
ready for inspection. This can is a brake problem. Have the brake
happen if the 12-volt battery has system inspected right away.
recently been replaced or run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
The DLC is under the instrument several days of routine driving.
panel to the left of the steering If this has been done and the Metric English
wheel. See your dealer if assistance vehicle still does not pass the
is needed. inspection for lack of OBD II This light should come on briefly
The vehicle may not pass system readiness, your dealer when the ignition key is turned to
inspection if: can prepare the vehicle for ON/RUN. If it does not come on
inspection. then, have it fixed so it will be ready
. The malfunction indicator lamp is to warn if there is a problem.
on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when
This light may also come on due to Antilock Brake System

low brake fluid. See Brake Fluid on { WARNING (ABS) Warning Light
page 10‑21.
The brake system might not be
When the ignition is on, the brake working properly if the brake
system warning light also comes on system warning light is on.
when the parking brake is set. The Driving with the brake system
light will stay on if the parking brake warning light on can lead to a
does not release fully. If it stays on crash. If the light is still on after
after the parking brake is fully
the vehicle has been pulled off
released, it means there is a brake
the road and carefully stopped, The ABS warning light comes on
problem.
have the vehicle towed for briefly when the ignition key is
If the light comes on while driving, service. turned to ON/RUN. This is normal.
pull off the road and stop carefully. If the light does not come on then,
Make sure the parking brake is fully have it fixed so it will be ready to
released. The pedal may be harder The brake message remains on until warn you if there is a problem.
to push or, the pedal may go closer any DIC button is pressed. The
to the floor. It may take longer to brake light remains on until the If the light stays on, turn the ignition
stop. If the light is still on, have the problem is fixed. See Brake System to LOCK/OFF. If the light comes on
vehicle towed for service. See Messages on page 5‑32. while driving, stop as soon as
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑69. possible and turn the ignition off.
Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the
vehicle needs service. If the regular
brake system warning light is not
on, there are still brakes, but no
antilock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on,
there are no antilock brakes and StabiliTrak® Indicator Engine Coolant

there is a problem with the regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning
Light Temperature Warning
Light on page 5‑19. Light
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light comes on briefly while

starting the engine. If it does not, The engine coolant temperature
have the vehicle serviced by your warning light comes on briefly when
dealer. If the system is working the vehicle is started.
This light comes on when the Tow/ normally, the indicator light goes off.
Haul mode has been activated. If it does not, have the vehicle
If it stays on, or comes on while serviced by your dealer. If the
For more information, see Tow/Haul driving, there could be a problem
Mode on page 9‑24. system is working normally, the
with the StabiliTrak system and the indicator light then goes off.
vehicle might need service. When
this warning light is on, the system If the light comes on and stays on
is off and will not limit wheel spin. while driving, the vehicle may have
a problem with the cooling system.
This light flashes when the Stop and turn off the vehicle to
StabiliTrak system is active. avoid damage to the engine.
See StabiliTrak® System on A warning chime sounds when this
page 9‑27 for more information. light is on.
See Engine Overheating on
Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and

Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle. The oil pressure light should come
See Tire Pressure Monitor on briefly as the engine is started.
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Operation on page 10‑45. If it does not come on, have the
Monitor System (TPMS), this light vehicle serviced by your dealer.
comes on briefly when the engine is Engine Oil Pressure Light If the light comes on and stays on, it
started. It provides information Notice: Lack of proper engine oil means that oil is not flowing through
about tire pressures and the TPMS. maintenance can damage the the engine properly. The vehicle
engine. Driving with the engine could be low on oil and might have
When the Light Is On Steady
oil low can also damage the some other system problem. See
This indicates that one or more of engine. The repairs would not be your dealer.
the tires are significantly covered by the vehicle warranty.
underinflated. Check the oil level as soon as
A Driver Information Center (DIC) possible. Add oil if required, but
tire pressure message may also if the oil level is within the
display. See Tire Messages on operating range and the oil
page 5‑39. Stop as soon as pressure is still low, have the
possible, and inflate the tires to the vehicle serviced. Always follow
pressure value shown on the Tire the maintenance schedule for
and Loading Information label. See changing engine oil.
Tire Pressure on page 10‑42.
Security Light For information regarding this light Cruise Control Light
and the vehicle's security system,
see Vehicle Alarm System on
page 2‑12.
High-Beam On Light
The security light should come on This light comes on whenever the
briefly as the engine is started. If the cruise control is set.
system is working normally, the The light goes out when the cruise
indicator light turns off. If it does not control is turned off. See Cruise
come on, have the vehicle serviced Control on page 9‑29 for more
by your dealer. The high-beam on light comes on
information.
when the high-beam headlamps are
If the light stays on and the engine
in use.
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
system. Changer on page 6‑2 for more
information.
This light is also used to indicate the
status of the anti-theft alarm system
when the ignition is turned off. The
light will flash rapidly if the alarm
system is arming and one or more
of the monitored entry points is not
closed. The light will stay on if the
alarm is arming and all entry points
are closed.
Information Displays The outside air temperature and

compass, if equipped, also display
DIC Buttons
The DIC has different displays
on the DIC when viewing the trip
Driver Information Center and fuel information. The outside air
which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons located in the
(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) temperature automatically appears center of the instrument panel.
in the top right corner of the DIC
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the
display. If there is a problem with
information below explains the
the system that controls the
operation of this system.
temperature display, the numbers
The DIC displays information about will be replaced with dashes. If this
your vehicle. It also displays occurs, have the vehicle serviced.
warning messages if a system The compass will be shown in the
problem is detected. bottom right corner of the DIC
display. See Compass on page 5‑5 The buttons are the set/reset,
All messages will appear in the DIC
for more information. customization, vehicle information,
display located at the top of the
and trip/fuel buttons. The button
instrument panel cluster. The DIC also allows some features functions are detailed in the
The DIC comes on when the ignition to be customized. See Vehicle following pages.
is on. After a short delay, the DIC Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
will display the information that was on page 5‑41 for more information. V (Set/Reset): Press this button to
set or reset certain functions and to
last displayed before the engine If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you turn off or acknowledge messages
was turned off. can also use the trip odometer reset on the DIC.
The DIC also displays a shift lever stem to view the odometer and trip
position indicator on the bottom line odometers. U (Customization): Press this
button to customize the feature
of the display. See Automatic
settings on your vehicle. See
Transmission on page 9‑21 for more
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
information.
Buttons) on page 5‑41 for more
information.
T (Vehicle Information): Press will alert you to change the oil on a SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
this button to display the oil life, schedule consistent with your If the vehicle has the Side Blind
park assist on vehicles with this driving conditions. Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this
feature, units, tire pressure readings When the remaining oil life is low, display allows the system to be
on vehicles with this feature, and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON turned on or off. Once in this
compass calibration and zone message will appear on the display. display, press the set/reset button to
setting on vehicles with this feature. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” select between ON or OFF. If you
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button under Engine Oil Messages on choose ON, the system will be
to display the odometer, trip page 5‑34. You should change the turned on. If you choose OFF, the
odometers, fuel range, average oil as soon as you can. See Engine system will be turned off. When the
economy, timer, fuel used, and Oil on page 10‑7. In addition to the SBZA system is turned off, the DIC
average speed. engine oil life system monitoring the will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE
oil life, additional maintenance is ALERT SYSTEM OFF message as
Vehicle Information Menu recommended in the Maintenance a reminder that the system has
Items Schedule in this manual. See been turned off. See Object
T (Vehicle Information): Press Maintenance Schedule on Detection System Messages on
this button to scroll through the page 11‑2 for more information. page 5‑36 and Side Blind Zone Alert
following menu items: Remember, you must reset the OIL (SBZA) on page 9‑32 for more
LIFE display yourself after each oil information.
OIL LIFE change. It will not reset itself. Also, PARK ASSIST
Press the vehicle information button be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
until OIL LIFE REMAINING display accidentally at any time If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
displays. This display shows an other than when the oil has just Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
estimate of the oil's remaining useful been changed. It cannot be reset press the vehicle information button
life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE accurately until the next oil change. until PARK ASSIST displays. This
REMAINING on the display, that To reset the engine oil life system, display allows the system to be
means 99% of the current oil life see Engine Oil Life System on turned on or off. Once in this
remains. The engine oil life system page 10‑9. display, press the set/reset button to
select between ON or OFF. If you message as a reminder that the information button again until the
choose ON, the system will be system has been turned off. See DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa
turned on. If you choose OFF, the Object Detection System Messages (PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
system will be turned off. The URPA on page 5‑36 and Rear Vision If a low tire pressure condition is
system automatically turns back on Camera (RVC) on page 9‑35. detected by the system while
after each vehicle start. When the driving, a message advising you to
URPA system is turned off and the UNITS
add air to a specific tire will appear
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the Press the vehicle information button in the display. See Tire Pressure on
DIC will display the PARK ASSIST until UNITS displays. This display page 10‑42 and Tire Messages on
OFF message as a reminder that allows you to select between metric page 5‑39 for more information.
the system has been turned off. See or English units of measurement.
Object Detection System Messages Once in this display, press the set/ If the tire pressure display shows
on page 5‑36 and Ultrasonic reset button to select between dashes instead of a value, there
Parking Assist on page 9‑31 for METRIC or ENGLISH units. All of may be a problem with your vehicle.
more information. the vehicle information will then be If this consistently occurs, see your
displayed in the unit of dealer for service.
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT measurement selected. COMPASS ZONE SETTING
If the vehicle has the Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) system, this FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES This display will be available if the
display allows the system to be On vehicles with the Tire Pressure vehicle has a compass. See
turned on or off. Once in this Monitor System (TPMS), the Compass on page 5‑5 for more
display, press the set/reset button to pressure for each tire can be viewed information.
select between ON or OFF. If you in the DIC. The tire pressure will be COMPASS RECALIBRATION
choose ON, the system will be shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or
turned on. If you choose OFF, the pounds per square inch (psi). Press This display will be available if the
system will be turned off. When the the vehicle information button until vehicle has a compass. See
RCTA system is turned off, the DIC the DIC displays FRONT Compass on page 5‑5 for more
will display the REAR CROSS TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ## information.
TRAFFIC ALERT SYSTEM OFF RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle
Blank Display time. Pressing the trip odometer again, and then the retroactive reset
This display shows no information. reset stem will also display the trip feature is activated, the display will
odometers. show 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle
Trip/Fuel Menu Items Each trip odometer can be reset to begins moving, the display will then
increase to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button zero separately by pressing the set/
(5.2 mi), etc.
to scroll through the following menu reset button or the trip odometer
items: reset stem while the desired trip If the retroactive reset feature is
odometer is displayed. activated after the vehicle is started,
ODOMETER but before it begins moving, the
The trip odometer has a feature
Press the trip/fuel button until called retroactive reset. This can be display will show the number of
ODOMETER displays. This display used to set the trip odometer to the kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven
shows the distance the vehicle has number of kilometers (miles) driven during the last ignition cycle.
been driven in either kilometers (km) since the ignition was last turned on. RANGE
or miles (mi). Pressing the trip This can be used if the trip
odometer reset stem will also odometer is not reset at the Press the trip/fuel button until
display the odometer. beginning of the trip. RANGE displays. This display
shows the approximate number of
To switch between English and To use the retroactive reset feature, remaining kilometers (km) or
metric measurements, see “UNITS” press and hold the set/reset button miles (mi) the vehicle can be driven
earlier in this section. for at least four seconds. The trip without refueling. The display will
TRIP A and TRIP B odometer will display the number of show LOW if the fuel level is low.
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven
Press the trip/fuel button until since the ignition was last turned on The fuel range estimate is based on
TRIP A or TRIP B displays. This and the vehicle was moving. Once an average of the vehicle's fuel
display shows the current distance the vehicle begins moving, the trip economy over recent driving history
traveled in either kilometers (km) or odometer will accumulate mileage. and the amount of fuel remaining in
miles (mi) since the last reset for For example, if the vehicle was the fuel tank. This estimate will
each trip odometer. Both trip driven 8 km (5 mi) before it is started change if driving conditions change.
odometers can be used at the same For example, if driving in traffic and
making frequent stops, this display estimate of the vehicle fuel 99 hours, 59 minutes and
may read one number, but if the economy under a given driving 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the condition at a specific moment. For the display will return to zero.
number may change even though example, if the vehicle is To stop the timer, press the set/reset
the same amount of fuel is in the accelerating and achieving low fuel button briefly while TIMER is
fuel tank. This is because different efficiency this display will show displayed.
driving conditions produce different fewer bars, but if the vehicle is
fuel economies. Generally, freeway cruising on a flat freeway and To reset the timer to zero, press and
driving produces better fuel getting high fuel efficiency, the hold the set/reset button while
economy than city driving. Fuel display will show more bars. Fuel TIMER is displayed.
range cannot be reset. economy cannot be reset. FUEL USED
AVG (Average) ECONOMY TIMER Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG Press the trip/fuel button until USED displays. This display shows
ECONOMY displays. This display TIMER displays. This display can be the number of liters (L) or
shows the approximate average used as a timer. gallons (gal) of fuel used since the
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) last reset of this menu item. To reset
To start the timer, press the set/ the fuel used information, press and
or miles per gallon (mpg). This reset button while TIMER is
number is calculated based on the hold the set/reset button while FUEL
displayed. The display will show the USED is displayed.
number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded amount of time that has passed
since the last time this menu item since the timer was last reset, not AVG (Average) SPEED
was reset. To reset AVG including time the ignition is off.
ECONOMY, press and hold the set/ Press the trip/fuel button until AVG
Time will continue to be counted as SPEED displays. This display
reset button. long as the ignition is on, even if shows the average speed of the
Fuel Economy another display is being shown on vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)
the DIC. The timer will record up to or miles per hour (mph). This
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL
ECONOMY displays. The FUEL average is calculated based on the
ECONOMY display shows an various vehicle speeds recorded
since the last reset of this value. To If your vehicle does not have DIC TRIP A or TRIP B
reset the value to zero, press and buttons, you can use the trip Press the trip odometer reset stem
hold the set/reset button. odometer reset stem to view the until TRIP A or TRIP B displays. This
following displays: odometer, trip display shows the current distance
Blank Display odometers, oil life, park assist menu traveled in either kilometers (km) or
This display shows no information. for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear miles (mi) since the last reset for
Parking Assist (URPA) system, each trip odometer. Both trip
Driver Information Center units, and display language. odometers can be used at the
(DIC) (Without DIC If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you same time.
Buttons) can use the trip odometer reset Each trip odometer can be reset to
stem to view the following displays: zero separately by pressing and
If your vehicle does not have DIC odometer and trip odometers.
buttons, the information below holding the trip odometer reset stem
explains the operation of this Trip Odometer Reset Stem while the desired trip odometer is
system. Menu Items displayed.
The DIC has different displays The trip odometer has a feature
ODOMETER
which can be accessed by pressing called the retroactive reset. This can
Press the trip odometer reset stem be used to set the trip odometer to
the trip odometer reset stem located
until ODOMETER displays. This the number of kilometers (miles)
on the instrument panel cluster.
display shows the distance the driven since the ignition was last
Pressing the trip odometer reset
vehicle has been driven in either turned on. This can be used if the
stem will also turn off,
kilometers (km) or miles (mi). trip odometer is not reset at the
or acknowledge, DIC messages.
To switch between English and beginning of the trip.
The DIC displays trip and vehicle
metric measurements, see “UNITS” To use the retroactive reset feature,
system information, and warning
later in this section. press and hold the trip odometer
messages if a system problem is
detected. reset stem for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display the
number of kilometers (km) or
miles (mi) driven since the ignition display, that means 99% of the To reset the engine oil life system,
was last turned on and the vehicle current oil life remains. The engine see Engine Oil Life System on
was moving. Once the vehicle oil life system will alert you to page 10‑9.
begins moving, the trip odometer change the oil on a schedule
will accumulate mileage. For consistent with your driving PARK ASSIST
example, if the vehicle was driven conditions. To access this display, the vehicle
8 km (5 mi) before it is started again, When the remaining oil life is low, must be in P (Park). If your vehicle
and then the retroactive reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
feature is activated, the display will message will appear on the display. Assist (URPA) system, press the trip
show 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” odometer reset stem until PARK
begins moving, the display will then under Engine Oil Messages on ASSIST displays. This display
increase to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km page 5‑34. You should change the allows the system to be turned on or
(5.2 mi), etc. oil as soon as you can. See Engine off. Once in this display, press and
If the retroactive reset feature is Oil on page 10‑7. In addition to the hold the trip odometer reset stem to
activated after the vehicle is started, engine oil life system monitoring the select between ON or OFF. If you
but before it begins moving, the oil life, additional maintenance is choose ON, the system will be
display will show the number of recommended in the Maintenance turned on. If you choose OFF, the
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven Schedule in this manual. See system will be turned off. The URPA
during the last ignition cycle. Maintenance Schedule on system automatically turns back on
page 11‑2 for more information. after each vehicle start. When the
OIL LIFE URPA system is turned off and the
Remember, you must reset the OIL vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the
To access this display, the vehicle LIFE display yourself after each oil
must be in P (Park). Press the trip DIC will display the PARK ASSIST
change. It will not reset itself. Also, OFF message as a reminder that
odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display the system has been turned off. See
display accidentally at any time Object Detection System Messages
shows an estimate of the oil's other than when the oil has just
remaining useful life. If you see on page 5‑36 and Ultrasonic
been changed. It cannot be reset Parking Assist on page 9‑31 for
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the accurately until the next oil change. more information.
UNITS 2. Continue to press and hold the Vehicle Messages

To access this display, the vehicle trip odometer reset stem to scroll
through all of the available Messages are displayed on the DIC
must be in P (Park). Press the trip
languages. to notify the driver that the status of
odometer reset stem until UNITS
the vehicle has changed and that
displays. This display allows you to The available languages are
some action may be needed by the
select between metric or English ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS
driver to correct the condition.
units of measurement. Once in this (French), ESPANOL (Spanish),
Multiple messages may appear one
display, press and hold the trip and NO CHANGE.
after another.
odometer reset stem to select 3. Once the desired language is
between METRIC or ENGLISH Some messages may not require
displayed, release the trip
units. All of the vehicle information immediate action, but you can press
odometer reset stem to set your
will then be displayed in the unit of any of the DIC buttons on the
choice.
measurement selected. instrument panel or the trip
odometer reset stem on the
DISPLAY LANGUAGE instrument panel cluster to
To access this display, the vehicle acknowledge that you received the
must be in P (Park). This display messages and to clear them from
allows you to select the language in the display.
which the DIC messages will Some messages cannot be cleared
appear. To select a language: from the DIC display because they
1. Press the trip odometer reset are more urgent. These messages
stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE require action before they can be
displays. cleared. You should take any
messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that
clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not
correct the problem.
The following are the possible SERVICE BATTERY when you begin driving, the brake
messages that can be displayed CHARGING SYSTEM system needs service as soon as
and some information about them. possible. See your dealer.
On some vehicles, this message
displays if there is a problem with
Battery Voltage and the battery charging system. Under
Cruise Control Messages
Charging Messages certain conditions, the charging CRUISE SET TO XXX
system light may also turn on in the
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE instrument cluster. See Charging This message displays whenever
This message displays when the System Light on page 5‑16. Driving the cruise control is set. See Cruise
system detects that the battery with this problem could drain the Control on page 9‑29 for more
voltage is dropping below expected battery. Turn off all unnecessary information.
levels. The battery saver system accessories. Have the electrical
starts reducing certain features of system checked as soon as Door Ajar Messages
the vehicle that you may be able to possible. See your dealer.
notice. At the point that the features
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
are disabled, this message is Brake System Messages This message displays and a chime
displayed. It means that the vehicle sounds if the driver door is not fully
is trying to save the charge in the SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM closed and the vehicle is shifted out
battery. This message displays along with of P (Park). Stop and turn off the
Turn off all unnecessary the brake system warning light if vehicle, check the door for
accessories to allow the battery to there is a problem with the brake obstructions, and close the door
recharge. system. See Brake System Warning again. Check to see if the message
Light on page 5‑19. If this message still appears on the DIC.
The normal battery voltage range is appears, stop as soon as possible
11.5 to 15.5 volts. HOOD OPEN
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message On some models, this message
on the DIC display. If the message displays and a chime sounds if the
is still displayed or appears again hood is not fully closed. Stop and
turn off the vehicle, check the hood PASSENGER DOOR OPEN Engine Cooling System
for obstructions, and close the hood
again. Check to see if the message
This message displays and a chime Messages
sounds if the passenger door is not
still appears on the DIC. ENGINE HOT A/C (Air
fully closed and the vehicle is
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn Conditioning) OFF
off the vehicle, check the door for This message displays when the
This message displays and a chime obstructions, and close the door
sounds if the driver side rear door is engine coolant becomes hotter than
again. Check to see if the message the normal operating temperature.
not fully closed and the vehicle is still appears on the DIC.
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn See Engine Coolant Temperature
off the vehicle, check the door for POWER LIFTGATE OFF Gauge on page 5‑13. To avoid
obstructions, and close the door added strain on a hot engine, the air
This message displays when the conditioning compressor
again. Check to see if the message
power liftgate has been turned off automatically turns off. When the
still appears on the DIC.
by pressing the power liftgate button coolant temperature returns to
LIFTGATE OPEN on the center console. normal, the air conditioning
This message displays and a chime RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN compressor turns back on. You can
sounds if the liftgate is open while continue to drive your vehicle.
This message displays and a chime
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off If this message continues to appear,
sounds if the passenger side rear
the vehicle and check the liftgate. have the system repaired by your
door is not fully closed and the
Restart the vehicle and check for dealer as soon as possible to avoid
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
the message on the DIC display. damage to the engine.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the door for obstructions, and close ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
the door again. Check to see if the ENGINE
message still appears on the DIC.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine is overheating,
severe engine damage may
occur. If an overheat warning the engine speed above normal Acknowledging the CHANGE
appears on the instrument cluster idling speed. See Engine ENGINE OIL SOON message will
and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as Overheating on page 10‑16 for not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING.
soon as possible. Do not increase more information. See “Oil Life” under Driver
the engine speed above normal This message displays and a Information Center (DIC) (Without
idling speed. See Engine continuous chime sounds if the DIC Buttons) on page 5‑29 or Driver
Overheating on page 10‑16 for engine cooling system reaches Information Center (DIC) (With DIC
more information. unsafe temperatures for operation. Buttons) on page 5‑24 and Engine
This message displays when the Stop and turn off the vehicle as Oil Life System on page 10‑9.
engine coolant temperature is too soon as it is safe to do so to avoid ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to severe damage. This message
idle until it cools down. See Engine clears when the engine has cooled On some vehicles, this message
Coolant Temperature Gauge on to a safe operating temperature. displays when the engine oil level
page 5‑13. may be too low. Check the oil level
before filling to the recommended
See Overheated Engine Protection Engine Oil Messages level. If the oil is not low and this
Operating Mode on page 10‑18 for CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message remains on, take the
information on driving to a safe vehicle to your dealer for service.
place in an emergency. This message displays when See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.
service is required for the vehicle.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP See your dealer. See Engine Oil on OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
ENGINE page 10‑7 and Maintenance ENGINE
Notice: If you drive the vehicle Schedule on page 11‑2 for more
information. Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine is overheating, while the engine oil pressure is
severe engine damage may low, severe engine damage may
occur. If an overheat warning occur. If a low oil pressure
appears on the instrument cluster warning appears on the Driver
and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as Information Center (DIC), stop the
soon as possible. Do not increase
vehicle as soon as possible. Do coolant protection mode. See TIGHTEN GAS CAP
not drive the vehicle until the Engine Overheating on page 10‑16
This message may display along
cause of the low oil pressure is for further information.
with the check engine light on the
corrected. See Engine Oil on This message also displays when instrument cluster if the vehicle's
page 10‑7 for more information. the vehicle's engine power is fuel cap is not tightened properly.
This message displays when the reduced. Reduced engine power See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
vehicle's engine oil pressure is low. can affect the vehicle's ability to page 5‑17. Reinstall the fuel cap
The oil pressure light also appears accelerate. If this message is on, fully. See Filling the Tank on
on the instrument cluster. See but there is no reduction in page 9‑41. The diagnostic system
Engine Oil Pressure Light on performance, proceed to your can determine if the fuel cap has
page 5‑22. destination. The performance may been left off or improperly installed.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as be reduced the next time the vehicle A loose or missing fuel cap allows
engine damage can result from is driven. The vehicle may be driven fuel to evaporate into the
driving a vehicle with low oil at a reduced speed while this atmosphere. A few driving trips with
pressure. Have the vehicle serviced message is on, but acceleration and the cap properly installed should
by your dealer as soon as possible speed may be reduced. Anytime turn this light and message off.
when this message is displayed. this message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer for Key and Lock Messages
service as soon as possible.
Engine Power Messages REPLACE BATTERY IN
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED Fuel System Messages REMOTE KEY
This message displays and a chime FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays if a Remote
sounds when the cooling system Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
temperature gets too hot and the This message displays and a chime battery is low. The battery needs to
engine further enters the engine sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel be replaced in the transmitter. See
as soon as possible. See Fuel “Battery Replacement” under
Gauge on page 5‑12 and Fuel on Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
page 9‑38 for more information. System Operation on page 2‑2.
Lamp Messages Object Detection System REAR CROSS TRAFFIC

Messages ALERT SYSTEM OFF
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL OFF If the vehicle has the Rear Cross
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE Traffic Alert (RCTA) system, this
This message displays when the OWNERS MANUAL message displays when the RCTA
automatic headlamps are turned off. This message displays if there is system has been turned off. See
This message clears itself after something interfering with the park Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
10 seconds. assist system. See Ultrasonic page 9‑35 and Driver Information
Parking Assist on page 9‑31 for Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
AUTOMATIC LIGHT on page 5‑29 or Driver Information
CONTROL ON more information.
Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
This message displays when the PARK ASSIST OFF page 5‑24.
automatic headlamps are turned on. After the vehicle has been started,
This message clears itself after SERVICE PARK ASSIST
this message displays to remind the
10 seconds. driver that the URPA system has This message displays if there is a
been turned off. Press the set/reset problem with the Ultrasonic Rear
TURN SIGNAL ON Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do
button or the trip odometer reset
This message displays and a chime stem to acknowledge this message not use this system to help you
sounds if a turn signal is left on for and clear it from the DIC display. To park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turn turn the URPA system back on, see on page 9‑31 for more information.
signal lever to the off position. Ultrasonic Parking Assist on See your dealer for service.
page 9‑31. SERVICE SIDE DETECTION
SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system and this
message displays, both SBZA
displays will remain on indicating
there is a problem with the SBZA blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, drive, however, you do not have the
system. If these displays remain on or slush. This message may also benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
after continued driving, the system display during heavy rain or due to your speed and drive accordingly.
needs service. See your dealer. See road spray. It may also come on
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on when driving in isolated areas with SERVICE TRACTION
page 9‑32 for more information. no guardrails, trees, or road signs CONTROL
and light traffic. Your vehicle does This message displays when there
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT not need service. For cleaning is a problem with the Traction
SYSTEM OFF instructions, see “Washing Your Control System (TCS). When this
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Vehicle” in Exterior Care on message is displayed, the system
Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this page 10‑73. See Side Blind Zone will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
message displays when the SBZA Alert (SBZA) on page 9‑32 for more driving accordingly. See your dealer
system has been turned off. See information. for service. See StabiliTrak® System
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on on page 9‑27 for more information.
page 9‑32 and Driver Information Ride Control System
Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) TRACTION CONTROL OFF
Messages
on page 5‑29 or Driver Information This message displays when the
Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on SERVICE STABILITRAK Traction Control System (TCS) is
page 5‑24 for more information. This message displays if there is a turned off. Adjust your driving
problem with the StabiliTrak® accordingly. See StabiliTrak®
SIDE DETECTION SYS System on page 9‑27 for more
TEMPORARILY OFF system. If this message appears, try
to reset the system. Stop; turn off information. This message clears
If your vehicle has the Side Blind the engine for at least 15 seconds; itself after 10 seconds.
Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this then start the engine again. If this
message displays when the SBZA message still comes on, it means
system is disabled because the there is a problem. See your dealer
sensor cannot detect vehicles in for service. The vehicle is safe to
your blind zone. The sensor may be
TRACTION CONTROL ON vehicle to your dealer before turning SERVICE POWER STEERING
off the engine. See Immobilizer
This message displays when the This message displays when a
Operation on page 2‑13 for more
Traction Control System (TCS) is problem is detected with the power
information.
turned on. See StabiliTrak® System steering system. When this
on page 9‑27 for more information. THEFT ATTEMPTED message is displayed, you may
This message clears itself after notice that the effort required to
10 seconds. This message displays if the content steer the vehicle increases or feels
theft-deterrent system has detected heavier, but you will still be able to
a break-in attempt while you were
Airbag System Messages away from your vehicle. See Vehicle
steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer immediately.
SERVICE AIR BAG Alarm System on page 2‑12 for
more information. SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays if there is a
problem with the airbag system. This message displays when a
Service Vehicle Messages non-emissions related malfunction
Have your dealer inspect the
system for problems. See Airbag SERVICE A/C (Air occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
Readiness Light on page 5‑15 and Conditioning) SYSTEM by your dealer as soon as possible.
Airbag System on page 3‑23 for STARTING DISABLED
more information. This message displays when the
electronic sensors that control the SERVICE THROTTLE
air conditioning and heating
Security Messages systems are no longer working.
This message displays when your
vehicle's throttle system is not
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT Have the climate control system functioning properly. Have your
SYSTEM serviced by your dealer if you notice vehicle serviced by your dealer.
a drop in heating and air
This message displays when there conditioning efficiency.
is a problem with the theft-deterrent
system. The vehicle may or may not
restart so you may want to take the
Tire Messages You can receive more than one tire comes on and stays on, there may
pressure message at a time. To be a problem with the TPMS. See
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE read the other messages that may your dealer.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure have been sent at the same time,
press the set/reset button or the trip TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the odometer reset stem. The DIC also This message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the shows the tire pressure values. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
vehicle's tires is low. Driver Information Center (DIC) (TPMS) is relearning the tire
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 5‑29 positions on your vehicle. The tire
This message also displays LEFT or Driver Information Center (DIC) positions must be relearned after
FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (right (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑24. rotating the tires or after replacing a
front), LEFT RR (left rear), tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on
or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate SERVICE TIRE MONITOR page 10‑48, Tire Pressure Monitor
the location of the low tire. SYSTEM System on page 10‑44, and Tire
The low tire pressure warning light On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Pressure on page 10‑42 for more
will also come on. See Tire Monitor System (TPMS), this information.
Pressure Light on page 5‑22. message displays if a part on the
If a tire pressure message appears
TPMS is not working properly. The Transmission Messages
tire pressure light also flashes and
on the DIC, stop as soon as you ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
then remains on during the same
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure If your vehicle has the All-Wheel
until the tire pressure is equal to the
Light on page 5‑22. Several Drive (AWD) system, this message
values shown on the Tire and
conditions may cause this message displays when there is a temporary
Loading Information label. See Tires
to appear. See Tire Pressure condition making the AWD system
on page 10‑35, Vehicle Load Limits
Monitor Operation on page 10‑45 for unavailable. The vehicle will run in
on page 9‑9, and Tire Pressure on
more information. If the warning 2WD. This could be caused by:
page 10‑42.
. A compact spare tire on the
vehicle

. AWD system overheat If this message appears, stop as transmission fluid temperature high
. Loss of wheel or vehicle speed soon as possible and turn off the can cause damage to the vehicle.
.
ignition for 30 seconds. Restart the Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
Certain other vehicle electrical vehicle and check for the message allow the transmission to cool. This
conditions on the DIC display. If the message message clears when the fluid
This message turns off when the still displays or appears again when temperature reaches a safe level.
compact spare tire is replaced by a you begin driving, the system needs
full-size tire, the differential fluid service. See your dealer right away. Vehicle Reminder
cools or the above conditions are no Messages
longer present and the warning SERVICE TRANSMISSION
message is reset. To reset the This message displays when there ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
warning message manually, turn the is a problem with the transmission. WITH CARE
ignition off and then back on again See your dealer for service.
after 30 seconds. If the message This message displays when the
stays on, see your dealer. See TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE outside air temperature is cold
All-Wheel Drive on page 9‑24. ENGINE enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE Notice: Do not drive the vehicle accordingly.
while the transmission fluid is
This message displays if a problem overheating and the transmission
occurs with the All-Wheel Drive temperature warning is displayed Vehicle Speed Messages
(AWD) system. The vehicle will run on the instrument cluster and/or SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH
in 2WD. This could be caused by: DIC, or the transmission can be (KM/H)
. An electronics problem damaged. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be This message displays when your
. Worn out or overheated clutch covered by the warranty. vehicle speed is limited to 128 km/h
plates (80 mph) because the vehicle
This message displays and a chime detects a problem in the speed
. Various electrical issues sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
variable assist steering system. Vehicle To change customization

Have your vehicle serviced by your preferences, use the following
dealer. Personalization procedure.
Washer Fluid Messages Entering the Feature

Vehicle Personalization Settings Menu
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD (With DIC Buttons)
1. Turn the ignition on and place
FLUID Your vehicle may have the vehicle in P (Park).
This message displays when the customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to To avoid excessive drain on the
windshield washer fluid is low. Fill battery, it is recommended that
the windshield washer fluid reservoir one preferred setting. Customization
features can only be programmed to the headlamps are turned off.
as soon as possible. See Engine
Compartment Overview on one setting on the vehicle and 2. Press the customization button
page 10‑5 for the location of the cannot be programmed to a to enter the feature
windshield washer fluid reservoir. preferred setting for two different settings menu.
Also, see Washer Fluid on drivers.
If the menu is not available,
page 10‑19 for more information. All of the customization options may FEATURE SETTINGS
not be available on your vehicle. AVAILABLE IN PARK will
Only the options available will be display. Before entering the
displayed on the DIC. menu, make sure the vehicle is
The default settings for the in P (Park).
customization features were set
when your vehicle left the factory,
but may have been changed from
their default state since then.
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
Feature Settings Menu Items Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen This feature allows you to select
The following are customization
appears on the DIC display. Press when the doors will automatically
features that allow you to program
the set/reset button once to access lock. See Automatic Door Locks on
settings to the vehicle:
the settings for this feature. Then page 2‑8 for more information.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings: Press the customization button until
This feature will only display if a AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the
language other than English has ENGLISH (default): All messages DIC display. Press the set/reset
been set. This feature allows you to will appear in English. button once to access the settings
change the language in which the FRANCAIS: All messages will for this feature. Then press the
DIC messages appear to English. appear in French. customization button to scroll
Press the customization button until ESPANOL: All messages will through the following settings:
the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN appear in Spanish. SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):
ENGLISH screen appears on the The doors will automatically lock
NO CHANGE: No change will be
DIC display. Press the set/reset when the vehicle is shifted out of
made to this feature. The current
button once to display all DIC P (Park).
setting will remain.
messages in English.
To select a setting, press the set/ AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors
DISPLAY LANGUAGE reset button while the desired will automatically lock when the
setting is displayed on the DIC. vehicle speed is above 13 km/h
This feature allows you to select the
(8 mph) for three seconds.
language in which the DIC You can also change the language
messages will appear. by pressing the trip odometer reset NO CHANGE: No change will be
stem. See “DISPLAY LANGUAGE” made to this feature. The current
under Driver Information Center setting will remain.
(DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) earlier To select a setting, press the set/
in this section for more information. reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors Press the customization button until
This feature allows you to select will unlock when the key is taken REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on
whether or not to turn off the out of the ignition. the DIC display. Press the set/reset
automatic door unlocking feature. ALL IN PARK (default): All of the button once to access the settings
It also allows you to select which doors will unlock when the vehicle is for this feature. Then press the
doors and when the doors will shifted into P (Park). customization button to scroll
automatically unlock. See Automatic through the following settings:
NO CHANGE: No change will be
Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more made to this feature. The current OFF: There will be no feedback
information. setting will remain. when you press the lock button on
Press the customization button until the RKE transmitter.
To select a setting, press the set/
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on reset button while the desired LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps
the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. will flash when you press the lock
button once to access the settings button on the RKE transmitter.
for this feature. Then press the REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN ONLY: The horn will sound
customization button to scroll This feature allows you to select the on the second press of the lock
through the following settings: type of feedback you will receive button on the RKE transmitter.
OFF: None of the doors will when locking the vehicle with the HORN & LIGHTS (default): The
automatically unlock. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) exterior lamps will flash when you
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the transmitter. You will not receive press the lock button on the RKE
driver door will unlock when the key feedback when locking the vehicle transmitter, and the horn will sound
is taken out of the ignition. with the RKE transmitter if the doors when the lock button is pressed
are open. See Remote Keyless again within five seconds of the
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver Entry (RKE) System Operation on
door will unlock when the vehicle is previous command.
shifted into P (Park). NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/ LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lock button on the RKE transmitter
reset button while the desired lamps will flash when you press the twice. See Delayed Locking on
setting is displayed on the DIC. unlock button on the RKE page 2‑7 for more information.
transmitter. Press the customization button until
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
NO CHANGE: No change will be DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on
This feature allows you to select the made to this feature. The current the DIC display. Press the set/reset
type of feedback you will receive setting will remain. button once to access the settings
when unlocking the vehicle with the for this feature. Then press the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired customization button to scroll
transmitter. You will not receive through the following settings:
feedback when unlocking the setting is displayed on the DIC.
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if OFF: There will be no delayed
DELAY DOOR LOCK locking of the vehicle's doors.
the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System This feature allows you to select ON (default): The doors will not
Operation on page 2‑2 for more whether or not the locking of the lock until five seconds after the last
information. vehicle's doors and liftgate will be door or the liftgate is closed.
delayed. When locking the doors
Press the customization button until and liftgate with the power door lock NO CHANGE: No change will be
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears switch and a door or the liftgate is made to this feature. The current
on the DIC display. Press the set/ open, this feature will delay locking setting will remain.
reset button once to access the the doors and liftgate until
settings for this feature. Then press To select a setting, press the set/
five seconds after the last door is reset button while the desired
the customization button to scroll closed. You will hear three chimes
through the following settings: setting is displayed on the DIC.
to signal that the delayed locking
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps feature is in use. The key must be EXIT LIGHTING
will not flash when you press the out of the ignition for this feature to This feature allows you to select the
unlock button on the RKE work. You can temporarily override amount of time you want the
transmitter. delayed locking by pressing the exterior lamps to remain on when it
power door lock switch twice or the
is dark enough outside. This APPROACH LIGHTING See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
happens after the key is turned from This feature allows you to select System Operation on page 2‑2 for
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. whether or not to have the exterior more information.
Press the customization button until lights turn on briefly during low light NO CHANGE: No change will be
EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC periods after unlocking the vehicle made to this feature. The current
display. Press the set/reset button using the Remote Keyless Entry setting will remain.
once to access the settings for this (RKE) transmitter. To select a setting, press the set/
feature. Then press the Press the customization button until reset button while the desired
customization button to scroll APPROACH LIGHTING appears on setting is displayed on the DIC.
through the following settings: the DIC display. Press the set/reset
OFF: The exterior lamps will not button once to access the settings CHIME VOLUME
turn on. for this feature. Then press the This feature allows you to select the
30 SECONDS (default): The customization button to scroll volume level of the chime.
exterior lamps will stay on for through the following settings: Press the customization button until
30 seconds. OFF: The exterior lights will not CHIME VOLUME appears on the
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will turn on when you unlock the vehicle DIC display. Press the set/reset
stay on for one minute. with the RKE transmitter. button once to access the settings
ON (default): If it is dark enough for this feature. Then press the
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will customization button to scroll
stay on for two minutes. outside, the exterior lights will turn
on briefly when you unlock the through the following settings:
NO CHANGE: No change will be vehicle with the RKE transmitter. NORMAL: The chime volume will
made to this feature. The current be set to a normal level.
setting will remain. The lights will remain on for
20 seconds or until the lock button LOUD: The chime volume will be
To select a setting, press the set/ on the RKE transmitter is pressed, set to a loud level.
reset button while the desired or the vehicle is no longer off.
setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/
made to this feature. The current PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on reset button while the desired
setting will remain. the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC.
There is no default for chime button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the EASY EXIT SEAT
volume. The volume will stay at the
last known setting. customization button to scroll If your vehicle has this feature, it
through the following settings: allows you to select your preference
To select a setting, press the set/ for the automatic easy exit seat
reset button while the desired OFF (default): Neither outside
mirror will be tilted down when the feature. See Memory Seats on
setting is displayed on the DIC. page 3‑6 for more information.
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
PARK TILT MIRRORS DRIVER MIRROR: The driver's Press the customization button until
If your vehicle has this feature, it outside mirror will be tilted down EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the
allows you to select whether or not when the vehicle is shifted into DIC display. Press the set/reset
the outside mirror(s) will R (Reverse). button once to access the settings
automatically tilt down when the for this feature. Then press the
PASSENGER MIRROR: The customization button to scroll
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). passenger's outside mirror will be
See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑17 through the following settings:
tilted down when the vehicle is
for more information. shifted into R (Reverse). OFF (default): No automatic seat
exit recall will occur.
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's and
passenger's outside mirrors will be ON: The driver seat will move back
tilted down when the vehicle is when the key is removed from the
shifted into R (Reverse). ignition.
NO CHANGE: No change will be The automatic easy exit seat

made to this feature. The current movement will only occur one time
setting will remain. after the key is removed from the
ignition. If the automatic movement
has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and Press the customization button until outside of the vehicle using the
remove it again, the seat and MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
steering column will stay in the on the DIC display. Press the set/ transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
original exit position, unless a reset button once to access the Start on page 2‑4 for more
memory recall took place prior to settings for this feature. Then press information.
removing the key again. the customization button to scroll Press the customization button until
NO CHANGE: No change will be through the following settings: REMOTE START appears on the
made to this feature. The current OFF (default): No remote memory DIC display. Press the set/reset
setting will remain. seat recall will occur. button once to access the settings
To select a setting, press the set/ ON: The driver seat and outside for this feature. Then press the
reset button while the desired mirrors will automatically move to customization button to scroll
setting is displayed on the DIC. the stored driving position when the through the following settings:
unlock button on the Remote OFF: The remote start feature will
MEMORY SEAT RECALL Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is be disabled.
If your vehicle has this feature, it pressed. ON (default): The remote start
allows you to select your preference NO CHANGE: No change will be feature will be enabled.
for the remote memory seat recall made to this feature. The current
feature. See Memory Seats on NO CHANGE: No change will be
setting will remain. made to this feature. The current
To select a setting, press the set/ setting will remain.
reset button while the desired To select a setting, press the set/
setting is displayed on the DIC. reset button while the desired
REMOTE START setting is displayed on the DIC.
If your vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to turn the remote start
off or on. The remote start feature
allows you to start the engine from
FACTORY SETTINGS Press the customization button until Universal Remote

This feature allows you to set all of FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V
the customization features back to TO EXIT appears in the DIC display. System
their factory default settings. Press the set/reset button once to See Radio Frequency Statement on
exit the menu. page 13‑21 for information
Press the customization button until
FACTORY SETTINGS appears on If you do not exit, pressing the regarding Part 15 of the Federal
the DIC display. Press the set/reset customization button again will Communications Commission (FCC)
button once to access the settings return you to the beginning of the rules and Industry Canada
for this feature. Then press the feature settings menu. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Exiting the Feature Universal Remote System
Settings Menu Programming
RESTORE ALL (default): The
customization features will be set to The feature settings menu will be
their factory default settings. exited when any of the following
occurs:
DO NOT RESTORE: The
customization features will not be
. The vehicle is shifted out of
set to their factory default settings. P (Park).
To select a setting, press the set/
. The vehicle is no longer in
reset button while the desired ON/RUN.
If the vehicle has this feature, you
setting is displayed on the DIC. . The trip/fuel or vehicle
will see these buttons with one
information DIC buttons are
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS indicator light next to them in the
pressed.
overhead console.
This feature allows you to exit the . The end of the feature settings
feature settings menu. This system provides a way to
menu is reached and exited.
replace up to three remote control
. A 40-second time period has transmitters used to activate
elapsed with no selection made.
devices such as garage door When programming a garage door, To program up to three devices:
openers, security systems, and park outside of the garage. Park 1. Hold the end of the hand-held
home automation devices. directly in line with and facing the transmitter about 3 to 8 cm
Do not use the Universal Remote garage door opener motor-head or (1 to 3 in) away from the
system with any garage door opener gate motor-head. Be sure that Universal Remote system
that does not have the stop and people and objects are clear of the buttons while keeping the
reverse feature. This includes any garage door or gate being indicator light in view. The
garage door opener model programmed. hand-held transmitter was
manufactured before April 1,1982. It is recommended that a new supplied by the manufacturer of
Read the instructions completely battery be installed in the hand-held the garage door opener receiver
before attempting to program the transmitter for quicker and more (motor-head unit).
Universal Remote system. Because accurate transmission of the 2. At the same time, press and
of the steps involved, it may be radio-frequency signal. hold both the hand-held
helpful to have another person Programming the Universal transmitter button and one of the
available to assist with programming Remote System three Universal Remote system
the Universal Remote system. buttons to be used to operate
For questions or help programming the garage door. Do not release
Keep the original hand-held the Universal Remote system, call
transmitter for use in other vehicles the Universal Remote system
1-800-355-3515 or go to button or the hand-held
as well as for future Universal www.homelink.com.
Remote system programming. It is transmitter button until the
also recommended that upon the Programming a garage door opener indicator light changes from a
sale of the vehicle, the programmed involves time-sensitive actions, so slowly to a rapidly flashing light.
Universal Remote system buttons read the entire procedure before You now may release both
be erased for security purposes. starting. Otherwise, the device will buttons.
See “Erasing Universal Remote time out and the procedure will have Some entry gates and garage
System Buttons” later in this to be repeated. door openers may require
section. substitution of Step 2 with the
procedure noted in “Gate

. If the Universal Remote 5. Firmly press and release the
Operator and Canadian system indicator light blinks “Learn” or “Smart” button. After
Programming” later in this rapidly for two seconds, pressing this button, you will
section. then turns to a constant have 30 seconds to complete
light and the garage door Step 6.
3. Press and hold for five seconds does not move, continue
the newly trained Universal with programming 6. Immediately return to the
Remote system button (the Steps 4–6. vehicle. Firmly press and hold
button selected in Step 2) while for two seconds the Universal
observing the indicator light and It may be helpful to have Remote system button, selected
garage door activation. another person assist with in Step 2 to control the garage
the remaining Steps 4–6. door, and then release it. If the
. If the indicator light stays on
continuously or the garage garage door does not move or
door starts to move when the lamp on the garage door
the Universal Remote opener receiver (motor-head
system button is pressed unit) does not flash, press and
and released, then the hold the same button a second
programming is complete. time for two seconds, then
There is no need to release it. Again, if the door
continue programming does not move or the garage
Steps 4–6. door lamp does not flash, press
“Learn” or “Smart” Button and hold the same button a third
time for two seconds, then
4. After Steps 1–3 have been
release.
completed, locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button inside the garage The Universal Remote system
on the garage door opener should now activate the
receiver (motor-head unit). The garage door.
name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
To program the remaining two If you live in Canada, or you are Universal Remote System
Universal Remote system buttons, having difficulty programming a gate
begin with Step 1 of “Programming operator or garage door opener by
Operation
the Universal Remote System.” using the “Programming the Using Universal Remote
Universal Remote System”
Gate Operator and Canadian procedures, regardless of where Press and hold the appropriate
Programming you live, replace Step 2 under Universal Remote button for at least
“Programming the Universal Remote half of a second. The indicator light
If you have questions or need help
System” with the following: will come on while the signal is
programming the Universal Remote
being transmitted.
system, call 1-800-355-3515 or go Continue to press and hold the
to www.homelink.com. Universal Remote system button
Canadian radio-frequency laws while you press and release every
require transmitter signals to time two seconds (cycle) the hand-held
out or quit after several seconds of transmitter button until the
transmission. This may not be long frequency signal has been
enough for the Universal Remote successfully accepted by the
system to pick up the signal during Universal Remote system. The
programming. Similarly, some U.S. Universal Remote system indicator
gate operators are manufactured to light will flash slowly at first and then
time out in the same manner. rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
“Programming the Universal Remote
System” to complete.
Erasing Universal Remote Reprogramming a Single

Buttons Universal Remote Button
All programmed buttons should be To reprogram any of the three
erased when the vehicle is sold or Universal Remote buttons, repeat
the lease ends. the programming instructions earlier
To erase all programmed buttons on in this section, beginning with
the Universal Remote device: Step 2.
For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑5 or Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
1. Press and hold down the two
outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash,
after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Lighting Features
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Daytime Running Lamps Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-7
(DRL)/Automatic Headlamp Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-8
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9
Turn and Lane-Change
The exterior lamp control is on the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
instrument panel to the left of the
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
steering wheel.
There are four positions:
O (Off): Briefly turn to this position
to turn the automatic light control off
or on again.
6-2 Lighting
. Instrument Panel Lights
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the Flash-to-Pass
headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with the Headlamp High/ This feature is used to signal to the
vehicle ahead that you want
following: Low-Beam Changer to pass.
. Parking Lamps 2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam If the headlamps are off or in the
. Taillamps Changer): Push the turn signal low-beam position, pull the turn
lever away from you to turn the high signal lever toward you to
. License Plate Lamps beams on. momentarily switch to high beams.
. Instrument Panel Lights Pull the lever toward you to return to Release the lever to turn the
; (Parking Lamps): Turns the low beams. high-beam headlamps off.
parking lamps on together with the
following:
Daytime Running Lamps
. Taillamps
(DRL)/Automatic
. License Plate Lamps Headlamp System
. Instrument Panel Lights
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
5 (Headlamps): Turns the make it easier for others to see the
headlamps on together with the This indicator light turns on in the front of your vehicle during the day.
following lamps. A warning chime instrument cluster when the Fully functional daytime running
sounds if the driver door is opened high-beam headlamps are on. lamps are required on all vehicles
when the ignition switch is off and first sold in Canada.
the headlamps are on.
. Parking Lamps
. Taillamps
. License Plate Lamps
Lighting 6-3
The DRL system makes the When the DRLs are active and a Delayed Headlamps
low-beam headlamps come on at a turn signal is operated, the DRL on
reduced brightness when the the side the turn signal is activated, Delayed headlamps provide a
following conditions are met: will turn off until the turn signal is period of exterior lighting as you
turned off. leave the area around the vehicle.
. The ignition is in the ON/RUN This feature is activated when the
position. The regular headlamp system headlamps are on due to the
. The exterior lamp control is should be turned on when needed. automatic headlamps control
in AUTO. Do not cover the light sensor on top feature, and when the ignition is
of the instrument panel because it turned off. The headlamps remain
. The engine is running.
works with the DRL. on until the exterior lamp control is
When the DRL are on, the regular moved to the parking lamps position
headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, Lights On with Wipers or until the pre-selected delayed
and other lamps will not be on. The If the windshield wipers are headlamp lighting period has ended.
instrument cluster will also not be lit. activated in daylight with the engine If the ignition is turned off with the
The headlamps automatically on, and the exterior lamp control is exterior lamp control in the ; or
change from DRL to the regular in AUTO, the headlamps, parking
lamps, and other exterior lamps
5 position, the delayed headlamps
headlamps depending on the cycle will not occur.
darkness of the surroundings. The come on. The transition time for the
other lamps that come on with the lamps coming on varies based on To disable the delayed headlamps
headlamps will also come on. wiper speed. When the wipers are feature or change the time of delay,
not operating, these lamps turn off. see Vehicle Personalization (With
When it is bright enough outside, DIC Buttons) on page 5‑41.
the headlamps will go off and the Move the exterior lamp control to P
DRL will come on. or ; to disable this feature.
6-4 Lighting
Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change The lever returns to its starting
position whenever it is released.
Signals
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out.
Have any burned out bulbs
replaced. If a bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑29.
Turn Signal On Chime
Move the turn signal lever all the If either one of the turn signals is left
way up or down to signal a turn. on and the vehicle has been driven
An arrow on the instrument cluster more than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): will sound.
Press this button to make the front flashes in the direction of the turn or
and rear turn signal lamps flash on lane change.
and off. This warns others that you Raise or lower the lever until the
are having trouble. Press again to arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
turn the flashers off. change. Hold it there until the lane
The turn signals do not work while change is completed. If the lever is
the hazard warning flashers are on. briefly pressed and released, the
turn signal flashes three times.
Lighting 6-5
Fog Lamps # (Fog Lamps): Press the fog Interior Lighting

lamp button to turn the fog lamps on
or off. A light comes on in the Instrument Panel
instrument cluster when the fog
lamps are in use. The ignition must Illumination Control
be on for the fog lamps to work.
When the headlamps are changed
to high beam, the fog lamps turn off.
The fog lamps come back on again
when the high-beam headlamps are
turned off.
For vehicles with front fog lamps,
the fog lamp button is on the Some localities have laws that
exterior lamp control to the left of require the headlamps to be on
the steering column. along with the fog lamps.
Use the fog lamps for better vision

in foggy or misty conditions.
The instrument panel brightness
knob is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
column.
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): Push the knob in all
the way until it extends out and then
turn the knob clockwise or
6-6 Lighting
counterclockwise to brighten or dim Dome Lamps Dome Lamp Override

the lights. Push the knob back in
when finished. The dome lamps are in the
overhead console and above the
Courtesy Lamps rear seat passengers.
The dome lamps come on when a
The courtesy lamps automatically
door is opened, unless the dome
come on when a door is opened.
lamp override button is pressed in.
The lamps can also be turned on
manually by fully turning the The lamps can also be turned on
instrument panel brightness control and off by turning the instrument
clockwise. panel brightness control clockwise
to the farthest position.
The reading lamps, located on the
headliner above the rearview mirror,
can be turned on or off
independently of the automatic The dome lamp override button is
next to the exterior lamps control.
courtesy lamps, when the doors are
closed. E DOME OFF (Dome Lamp
Override): Press the button and
the dome lamps remain off when a
door is opened. An indicator light on
the button comes on to show that
the dome lamps are off. Press the
button again so the dome lamps
come on when a door is opened.
Lighting 6-7
Lighting Features When the ignition is on, illuminated

entry is inactive, which means the
courtesy lamps will not come on
Entry Lighting unless a door is opened.
For vehicles with courtesy lamps,
they come on and stay on for a set Delayed Entry Lighting
time whenever K is pressed on the Delayed entry lighting illuminates
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the interior for a period of time after
transmitter. all the doors have been closed.
If a door is opened, the lamps stay The ignition must be off for delayed
on while it is open and then turn off entry lighting to work. Immediately
automatically about 20 seconds after all the doors have been closed,
AMBIENT OFF (If Equipped): after the door is closed. If K is the delayed entry lighting feature
Press the button to turn the ambient pressed and no door is opened, the continues to work until one of the
lights off. Press the button again to lamps turn off after about following occurs:
turn ambient lights on. 20 seconds. . The ignition is in ON/RUN.
Entry lighting includes a feature . The doors are locked.
Reading Lamps called theater dimming. With theater
dimming, the lamps do not turn off
. An illumination period of about
Press the button near each lamp to 25 seconds has elapsed.
turn them on or off. at the end of the delay time.
Instead, they slowly dim and then If during the illumination period a
go out. The delay time is canceled if door is opened, the timed
the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN illumination period is canceled and
or the power door lock switch is the interior lamps remain on.
pressed. The lamps will dim
right away.
6-8 Lighting
Delayed Exit Lighting Parade Dimming When the battery's state of charge
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
Delayed exit lighting illuminates the This feature automatically prohibits to quickly bring the charge back up.
interior for a period of time after the the dimming of the instrument panel When the state of charge is high,
key is removed from the ignition. displays in daylight while the the voltage is lowered slightly to
The ignition must be off for delayed headlamps are on so that the prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
exit lighting to work. When the key displays are still able to be seen. has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
is removed, interior illumination display on the Driver Information
activates and remains on until one Battery Load Center (DIC), you may see the
of the following occurs: Management voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an
. The ignition is in ON/RUN. The vehicle has Electric Power alert will be displayed.
. The power door locks are Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery's temperature and state The battery can be discharged at
activated. idle if the electrical loads are very
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
. An illumination period of for best performance and extended high. This is true for all vehicles.
20 seconds has elapsed. life of the battery. This is because the generator
If during the illumination period a (alternator) may not be spinning fast
door is opened, the timed enough at idle to produce all of the
illumination period will be canceled power needed for very high
and the interior lamps will remain on electrical loads.
because a door is open.
Lighting 6-9
A high electrical load occurs when Normally, these actions occur in Battery Power Protection
several of the following are on, such steps or levels, without being
as: headlamps, high beams, fog noticeable. In rare cases at the This feature helps prevent the
lamps, rear window defogger, highest levels of corrective action, battery from being drained, if the
climate control fan at high speed, this action may be noticeable to the interior courtesy lamps or reading
heated seats, engine cooling fans, driver. If so, a DIC message might lamps are accidentally left on. If any
trailer loads, and loads plugged into be displayed, such as BATTERY of these lamps are left on, they
accessory power outlets. SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY automatically turn off after
VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The
EPM works to prevent excessive lamps will not come back on again
discharge of the battery. It does this If one of these messages displays, it
is recommended that the driver until one of the following occurs:
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs. reduce the electrical loads as much . The ignition is turned on.
It can increase engine idle speed to as possible. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
. The exterior lamps control is
generate more power whenever turned off, then on again.
needed. It can temporarily reduce on page 5‑29 or Driver Information
the power demands of some Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on The headlamps will time out after
accessories. page 5‑24. 10 minutes, if they are manually
turned on while the ignition is on
or off.
6-10 Lighting
2 NOTES
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player (Radio without
Introduction
System Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD Player (Radio with
7-21
Infotainment
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Read the following pages to
Introduction MP3 (Radio with become familiar with the
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 infotainment system featured in this
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 MP3 (Radio without owner manual.
Overview (Radio without Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview (Radio with
7-3 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
{ WARNING
Rear Seat Infotainment
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Taking your eyes off the road
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Operation (Radio without for too long or too often while
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 using any infotainment features
Rear Audio
Operation (Radio with can cause a crash resulting in
Controller (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 injury or death. Do not give
Phone extended attention to
Radio Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
AM-FM Radio (Radio without infotainment tasks while
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Settings driving. Focus your attention
AM-FM Radio (Radio with Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53 on driving and limit glances to
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 the instrument cluster or center
Satellite Radio (Radio without Trademarks and License stack screens. Use voice
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Agreements guidance whenever possible.
Satellite Radio (Radio with Trademarks and License
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7-2 Infotainment System
The infotainment system has built-in The vehicle has Retained Theft-Deterrent Feature
features intended to help with this Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
by disabling some functions when the audio system can be played TheftLock® is designed to
driving. A grayed-out function is not even after the ignition is turned off. discourage theft of the vehicle's
available when the vehicle is See Retained Accessory Power radio by learning a portion of the
moving. (RAP) on page 9‑18. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
All functions are available when the The vehicle has a base radio stolen or moved to a different
vehicle is parked. Before driving: included in this manual. See the vehicle.
. Become familiar with the separate infotainment manual for
infotainment system operation information on the uplevel radios,
and buttons on the faceplate. audio players, phone, navigation
system, and voice or speech
. Set up the audio by presetting recognition. There is also
favorite stations, setting the information on settings and
tone, and adjusting the downloadable applications (if
speakers. equipped).
. Set up phone numbers in
advance so they can be called
easily by pressing a single
button or a single voice
command for vehicles equipped
with phone capability.
See Defensive Driving on page 9‑2.
Overview (Radio without Touchscreen) 3. MENU
For information on using the radio, see Operation (Radio without

. Press to open the tone
Touchscreen) on page 7‑6 or Operation (Radio with Touchscreen) on menu to adjust the bass,
page 7‑8. midrange, treble, fade, and
balance.
4. Buttons 1 - 6
. Saves and selects favorite
stations.
5. EQ (Equalizer)
. Press to adjust the
equalizer.
6. f (Tone/Tune)
. Press to set the bass or
treble.
. Turn to manually select
radio stations.
7. CAT (Category)
. Press to display a list of
SiriusXM® categories.
1. 4 (Information) 2. FAV (Favorites Pages)
. Press to show information
. Press to scroll through the
on the current station or favorite pages.
track.
8. H (Clock) 12. P (Power/Volume) 15. CD/AUX

. Press to set the clock. . Press to turn the
. Press to scroll through
infotainment system on selecting the CD or an
9. BAND auxiliary device.
or off.
. Press to scroll through the . Turn to adjust the volume. 16. Auxiliary Input Jack
available bands AM, FM,
or SiriusXM if equipped.
. Use to connect external
13. s REV (Reverse) audio devices.
10. © SEEK . Press and hold to go
backward fast through a 17. Z EJECT
. Seeks the previous
station. track. . Press to eject the
loaded CD.
11. ¨ SEEK 14. \ FWD (Forward)
. Seeks the next station.
. Press and hold to fast
forward through a track.
Overview (Radio with Touchscreen) 1. PUSH / O (Volume/Power)

The infotainment system is controlled by using the buttons, touch screen, 2. Z (Eject)
steering wheel controls, and voice recognition. See Operation (Radio
without Touchscreen) on page 7‑6 or Operation (Radio with Touchscreen) on 3. CD Slot
page 7‑8. 4. AUX Port
5. PUSH/SEL (Select)
6. D (Home Page)
7. SRCE (Source)
8. FAV (Favorites Menu)
9. © SEEK (Previous/Reverse)
10. SEEK ¨ (Next/Forward)
11. / BACK
Operation (Radio without song title information displays on information will page every
the top line of the display and artist five seconds when Auto Text is
Touchscreen) information displays on the bottom activated.
Playing the Radio line. When information is not Speed Compensated Volume
available, “NO INFO” displays. (SCV): The Speed Compensated
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
the system on and off. Turn to Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, Volume (SCV) feature automatically
increase or decrease the volume. CD, MP3, and WMA features): If adjusts the radio volume to
additional information is available compensate for road and wind noise
A lock symbol displays next to the for the current song being played, as the vehicle speeds up or slows
clock display while the parental Auto Text will automatically page/ down, so that the volume level is
control feature is being used. The scroll the information every consistent.
feature remains on until O is five seconds above the FAV presets To activate SCV:
pressed and held for more than on the radio display.
two seconds, or the driver turns the 1. Set the radio volume.
To activate Auto Text:
ignition off and exits the vehicle. 2. Press the MENU button to
1. Press MENU to display the radio
4 (Information): Press to switch setup menu.
display the radio setup menu.
the display between the radio 3. Press the softkey under the
station frequency and the time. 2. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM (automatic
When the ignition is in the OFF AUTO TXT tab on the radio volume) tab on the radio display.
position, press 4 to display the time. display.
4. Press the softkey under the
For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, 3. Press the softkey under the ON Speed Compensated Volume
or RDS features, press 4 to display tab on the radio display. setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High)
additional text information related to If 4 is pressed and the song title or to select the level of radio
the current FM-RDS or XM station; artist information is longer than what volume compensation. Press the
or CD, MP3, or WMA song. can be displayed, the extra softkey located below the BACK
If information is available during XM, tab on the MENU SETUP
CD, MP3, or WMA playback, the display or let the display time out
after approximately 10 seconds. To quickly adjust bass, midrange, Adjusting the Speakers
Each higher setting allows for or treble to the middle position, (Balance/Fade)
more radio volume press the softkey under the BASS,
compensation at faster vehicle MID, or TREB tab for more than BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
speeds. two seconds. A beep sounds and adjust the balance or fade:
the level adjusts to the middle 1. Press f until the speaker control
Setting the Tone (Bass/ position.
Midrange/Treble) tabs display.
To quickly adjust all tone and
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, speaker controls to the middle 2. Continue pressing f to highlight
or Treble): To adjust bass, the tab, or press the softkey
position, press f for more than under the tab.
midrange, or treble:
two seconds until a beep sounds.
1. Press f until the tone control 3. To adjust the highlighted setting,
EQ (Equalization): Press to do one of the following until the
tabs display. choose bass and treble equalization levels are obtained:
2. Continue pressing f to highlight settings designed for different types
of music. The choices are pop, rock, . Turn f clockwise or
the tab, or press the softkey
country, talk, jazz, and classical. counterclockwise.
under the tab.
Selecting MANUAL or changing
3. To adjust the highlighted setting, bass or treble, returns the EQ to the
. Press \ FWD, or s REV.
do one of the following until the manual bass and treble settings. To quickly adjust balance or fade to
levels are obtained: the middle position, press the
Unique EQ settings can be saved
. Turn f clockwise or for each source. softkey under the BAL or FADE tab
counterclockwise. for more than two seconds. A beep
If the radio has a Bose® audio sounds and the level adjusts to the
system, the EQ settings are either
. Press \ FWD, or s REV. MANUAL or TALK.
middle position.
If a station's frequency is weak or if
there is static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust all speaker and Operation (Radio with SRCE (Source): Press to change
tone controls to the middle position, the audio source to AM, FM,
Touchscreen) SiriusXM® (if equipped), CD, USB,
press f for more than two seconds
until a beep sounds. Infotainment Controls iPod®, or AUX.
FAV (Favorites Menu): In AM, FM,
Radio Messages PUSH/O (Volume/Power):
or SiriusXM, press to display or
Calibration Error: The audio . Press to turn the system on change the current favorite page
system has been calibrated for the and off. number above the preset buttons.
vehicle from the factory. Keep pressing to scroll through the
. Turn to adjust the volume.
If Calibration Error displays, it favorites pages. The stored stations
means that the radio has not been Z (Eject): Press to eject a disc for each list display on the bottom of
configured properly for the vehicle from the CD player. See CD Player the screen. The number of preset
and it must be returned to your (Radio without Touchscreen) on Favorite Pages can be changed by
dealer for service. page 7‑21 or CD Player (Radio with pressing the Settings button on a
Touchscreen) on page 7‑23. Home Page, then pressing
Locked: This message displays
when the TheftLock® system has AUX Port: 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Favorites Pages, and then selecting
locked up the radio. Take the connection for external audio the number of Favorite Pages.
vehicle to your dealer for service. devices. © SEEK (Previous/Reverse):
If any error occurs repeatedly or if PUSH/SEL (Select): 1. AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped):
an error cannot be corrected, . Turn to manually find a station or Press to seek to the previous
contact your dealer. highlight a menu selection. strong station. Press and hold
for Scan. Press © again to stop
. Press to select a highlighted
selection. the scan.
D (Home Page): Press to go to 2. CD, USB: Press to seek to the

the Home Page. See “Home Page” beginning of the current or
in this section. previous track.
3. CD, USB: Press and hold to / BACK: Press to return to the Back: Press to go back to the
quickly reverse through a track. previous screen in a menu. previous page or menu.
Release the button to return to Home: From any page, press to
playing speed. See CD Player Touchscreen Buttons
cycle through the Home Pages to
(Radio without Touchscreen) on Touchscreen buttons show visibly start a different application. The
page 7‑21 or CD Player (Radio on the screen when available. When Home Page can have up to three
with Touchscreen) on page 7‑23 a function is unavailable, the button pages with eight icons per page .
and Auxiliary Devices on may gray-out. When a function is Each of these three pages can be
page 7‑35. selected, the button may highlight, customized to contain your choice
SEEK ¨ (Next/Forward): or animate. of up to eight per screen. They may
also be re-ordered on each screen
1. AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped): Home Page to taste.
Press to seek to the next strong
station. Press and hold for Scan. FAV (Favorites): Press to display
the favorite list or add a favorite.
Press ¨ again to stop the scan.
2. CD, USB: Press to seek or skip
g (Voice Recognition): Press to
begin voice recognition. See
the next track or program. Bluetooth on page 7‑46.
3. CD, USB: Press and hold to fast Menu: Press to enter the Home
forward through a track. Release Page menu.
the button to return to playing
speed. See CD Player (Radio More r : Press to go to the next
without Touchscreen) on The infotainment system displays a Home Page.
page 7‑21 or CD Player (Radio Home Page to access all of the
with Touchscreen) on page 7‑23 applications. The current selected Home Page Features
and Auxiliary Devices on source is framed with a red box Some features are disabled when
page 7‑35. outline. the vehicle is moving and some
icons may not be active.
Now Playing: Press to display the Tone Settings: Press to adjust the DSP Mode: Press o or p to adjust
active source page. The sources tone settings. The following may the DSP mode (if equipped).
available are AM, FM, XM (if display:
equipped), CD, USB, Bluetooth, Language
or AUX Input.
. EQ: Press o or p to adjust the
equalizer. To change the language of the
} (Navigation): Press to display screens. See Vehicle
the OnStar® Turn-by-Turn
. Bass: Press + or − to adjust Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
Navigation. See OnStar Overview the bass. on page 5‑41.
on page 14‑1. . Middle: Press + or − to adjust
English or Metric Units
5 (Phone): Press to display the the middle.
Phone main page. See Bluetooth on To change the screens from English
. Treble: Press + or − to adjust the
page 7‑46. or metric. See Driver Information
treble.
Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
Settings: Press to display the . Balance: Press L to hear more on page 5‑29 or Driver Information
Settings menu. See Settings on sound from the left speakers or Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
page 7‑53. R for more sound from the right page 5‑24.
Tone : Press to display the Tone speakers. The middle position
Settings menu. The following may balances the sound between the
display: left and right speakers.
. Fade: Press F for more sound
from the front speakers or R for
more sound from the rear
speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the
front and rear speakers.
Radio © SEEK and ¨ SEEK: Press to go tabs and by using the radio favorites
to the previous or next station and page button (FAV button). Press to
stay there. go through up to six pages of
AM-FM Radio (Radio favorites, each having six favorite
without Touchscreen) To scan stations, press and hold © stations available per page. Each
or ¨ until a beep sounds. The radio page of favorites can contain any
Radio Data System (RDS) combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM
goes to a station, plays for a few
The Radio Data System (RDS) seconds, then goes to the next stations.
feature is available for use only on station. Press either arrow again to The balance/fade and tone settings
FM stations that broadcast RDS stop scanning. that were previously adjusted are
information. This system relies upon stored with the favorite stations.
The radio only seeks and scans
receiving specific information from
stations with a strong signal that are To store a station as a favorite:
these stations and only works when
in the selected band.
the information is available. While 1. Tune to the desired radio station.
the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS Storing a Radio Station as a
station, the station name or call 2. Press FAV to display the page to
Favorite store the station.
letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station could broadcast incorrect Drivers are encouraged to set up 3. Press and hold one of the
information that causes the radio their radio station favorites while the six softkeys until a beep sounds.
features to work improperly. If this vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to When that softkey is pressed
happens, contact the radio station. favorite stations using the presets, and released, the station that
favorites button, and steering wheel was set returns.
Finding a Station controls. See Steering Wheel
Controls on page 5‑2. 4. Repeat the steps for each radio
BAND: Press to switch between station to be stored as a favorite.
AM, FM, or SiriusXM®. The FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
selection displays. 36 stations can be programmed as
f (Tune): Turn to select radio favorites using the six softkeys
stations. below the radio station frequency
To set up the number of favorites AM-FM Radio (Radio with Infotainment System Settings
pages:
Touchscreen) Tone Settings
1. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu. Playing the Radio To access the tone settings, press
the Tone Settings button on the
2. Press the softkey below the PUSH/O (Power/Volume): Home Page.
FAV 1-6 tab. . Press to turn the radio on or off. To adjust the settings:
3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing the
. Turn to increase or decrease the . Bass: Press + or − to change
softkey below the displayed volume of the active source. the level.
page numbers. The steering wheel controls can . Middle: Press + or − to change
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time also be used to adjust the volume. the level.
out, to return to the original main See Steering Wheel Controls on . Treble: Press + or − to change
radio screen showing the radio page 5‑2.
the level.
station frequency tabs and to Audio Source
begin the process of
. EQ: Press o or p to scroll
programming favorites for the To access AM, FM, or SiriusXM® if through the preset EQ options.
chosen number of favorites equipped, do one of the following:
. DSP Mode: Press o or p to
pages. . Press the AM, FM, or XM (if
scroll through the preset DSP
equipped) screen button.
modes.
. Press the SRCE radio button to . Fade: Press the F or R button
scroll through the options.
for more sound from the front or
A source ribbon will appear at
rear speakers. The middle
the bottom of the screen
position balances the sound
allowing you to select the one
between the front and rear
you want.
speakers.

. Balance: Press the L or R button AM AM Station List: Press to display a
for more sound from the left or list of AM stations.
right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound Update Station List: Press to
between the left and right display the list of AM stations. Press
speakers. refresh to update the list.
Tag Song: Press to tag a song to
Finding a Station download to an iPod when it is
Press SRCE to select AM, FM, connected to be purchased at a
SiriusXM (if equipped). later time.
Turn the PUSH/SEL knob to find a HD On/Off: Press to turn the HD
radio station. To select a preset To access the AM menu press the Radio receiver on or off. This
station, press FAV to scroll through Menu screen button and the feature is not available in SiriusXM if
the favorite pages and then press a following may display: equipped.
preset button on the radio or the
screen button. FM
Seeking a Station
Press © SEEK or SEEK ¨ to search
for a station. You may also use the
¨ on the steering wheel
control (SWC).
Favorites List: Press to display the

AM favorites list.
To access the FM Menu press the HD On/Off: Press to turn the HD Favorites List: Press to display the
Menu screen button and the Radio receiver on or off. SiriusXM favorites list.
following may display: XM Channel List: Press to display
SiriusXM (If Equipped)
a list of SiriusXM channels.
XM Category List: Press to display
a list of SiriusXM categories.
Tune Select: If equipped with
SiriusXM, press and the following
may display:
. Artist: Press to set an audio alert
when the current artist is playing
on a SiriusXM channel.
Favorites List: Press to display the To access the XM Menu press the . Song: Press to set an audio alert
FM favorites list. Menu screen button and the when the current song is playing
following may display: on a SiriusXM channel.
FM Station List: Press to display a
list of FM stations. . Tune Select Manager: Press
FM Category List: Press to display Disable/Enable All Alerts to
a list of FM categories. enable or disable all alerts.
A checkmark next to the alert
Update Station List: Press to means it is turned on. Press an
display the list of FM stations. Press alert to turn it off. Press Delete
refresh to update the list. to delete an alert.
Tag Song: Press to tag a song to
download to an iPod when it is
connected to be purchased at a
later time.

. Audible Alert: This feature will
give an audio alert when certain
To scroll through the pages, press Satellite Radio (Radio
FAV or the FAV screen button on the
artists or songs are available on top bar. The current page number
without Touchscreen)
a specific station. Press to turn
on or off.
displays above the preset buttons. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
The stored stations for each favorite Service
Storing Radio Station Presets page display on the preset buttons.
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
Up to 30 preset stations can be To change the number of favorite based in the 48 contiguous United
stored. AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if pages displayed: States and 10 Canadian provinces.
equipped) can be mixed. 1. Press Settings on the SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide
Home Page. variety of programming and
1. From the AM, FM, or SiriusXM
commercial-free music, coast to
main page, press and hold any 1 2. Press Favorite Pages.
coast, and in digital-quality sound.
−5 buttons or one of the preset 3. Select the number of pages to A service fee is required to receive
screen buttons at the bottom of display. the SiriusXM service. If SiriusXM
the screen. After a few seconds,
Service needs to be reactivated, the
a beep is heard and the new Recalling a Preset Station
radio will display “No Subscription
preset information displays on To recall a preset station from a Please Renew” on channel XM1.
that screen button. favorites page, do one the following: For more information, contact
2. Repeat for each preset. . Press the FAV screen button at SiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com or
the top bar to display the preset 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
Mixed-Band Presets www.xmradio.ca or call
pop-up. Press one of the preset
Each favorite page can store screen buttons to go to the 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
five preset stations. The presets selected preset station.
within a page can be from different
radio bands.
. In the AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if
equipped) main page, press one
of the preset screen buttons to
go to the selected preset station.
Finding a Station Finding a Category (CAT) 5. To go to the next or previous

Station SiriusXM station within the
BAND: Press to switch between
selected category, do one of the
AM, FM, or SiriusXM. The selection CAT (Category): The CAT button is following:
displays. used to find SiriusXM stations when
f (Tune): Turn to select radio the radio is in the XM mode. To find . Turn f.
stations. SiriusXM channels within a desired . Press the buttons below the
category:
© SEEK and ¨ SEEK: Press to go right or left arrows on the
to the previous or next station and 1. Press BAND until the SiriusXM display.
stay there. frequency displays. . Press either SEEK arrow.
2. Press CAT to display the
To scan stations, press and hold © 6. To exit the category search
category tabs.
or ¨ until a beep sounds. The radio mode, press the FAV button or
3. Continue pressing CAT until the BAND button to display the
goes to a station, plays for a few
desired category name displays. favorites again.
seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again to . Radios with CD and DVD Undesired SiriusXM categories can
stop scanning. can also navigate the be removed through the setup
The radio only seeks and scans category list by pressing s menu. To remove an undesired
stations with a strong signal that are REV or \ FWD. category, perform the following:
in the selected band. 1. Press MENU to display the radio
4. Press either of the two buttons
setup menu.
below the desired category tab
to immediately tune to the first 2. Press the softkey below the XM
SiriusXM station associated with CAT tab.
that category.
3. Turn f to display the category to
be removed.
4. Press the softkey under the FAV (Favorites): A maximum of To set up the number of favorites
Remove tab until the category 36 stations can be programmed as pages:
name along with the word favorites using the six softkeys 1. Press MENU to display the radio
Removed displays. below the radio station frequency setup menu.
5. Repeat the steps to remove tabs and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press to 2. Press the softkey below the
more categories. FAV 1-6 tab.
go through up to six pages of
Removed categories can be favorites, each having six favorite 3. Select the desired number of
restored by pressing the softkey stations available per page. Each favorites pages by pressing the
under the Add tab when a removed page of favorites can contain any softkey below the displayed
category is displayed or by pressing combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM page numbers.
the softkey under the Restore stations.
All tab. 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time
The balance/fade and tone settings out, to return to the original main
Categories cannot be removed or that were previously adjusted are radio screen showing the radio
added while the vehicle is moving stored with the favorite stations. station frequency tabs and to
faster than 8 km/h (5 mph). begin the process of
To store a station as a favorite:
Storing a Radio Station as a programming favorites for the
1. Tune to the desired radio station. chosen number of favorites
Favorite
2. Press FAV to display the page to pages.
Drivers are encouraged to set up store the station.
their radio station favorites while the SiriusXM Radio Messages
vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to 3. Press and hold one of the
six softkeys until a beep sounds. XL (Explicit Language
favorite stations using the presets, Channels): These channels, or any
favorites button, and steering wheel When that softkey is pressed
and released, the station that others, can be blocked at a
controls. See Steering Wheel customer's request, by calling
Controls on page 5‑2. was set returns.
1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
4. Repeat the steps for each radio 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
station to be stored as a favorite.
XM Updating: The encryption code If this station was one of the No Subscription Please Renew:
in the receiver is being updated, and presets, choose another station for SiriusXM subscription needs to be
no action is required. This process that preset button. reactivated. Contact SiriusXM at
should take no longer than No Artist Info: No artist www.siriusxm.com or
30 seconds. information is available at this time 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
No XM Signal: The system is on this channel. The system is www.xmradio.ca or call
functioning correctly, but the vehicle working properly. 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
is in a location that is blocking the No Title Info: No song title CAT Not Found: There are no
SiriusXM signal. When the vehicle is information is available at this time channels available for the selected
moved into an open area, the signal on this channel. The system is category. The system is working
should return. working properly. properly.
Loading XM: The audio system is No CAT Info: No category XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver
acquiring and processing audio and information is available at this time in the vehicle could have previously
text data. No action is needed. This on this channel. The system is been in another vehicle. For security
message should disappear shortly. working properly. purposes, XM receivers cannot be
Channel Off Air: This channel is swapped between vehicles. If this
No Information: No text or message is received after having
not currently in service. Tune in to informational messages are
another channel. the vehicle serviced, check with
available at this time on this your dealer.
Channel Unauth: This channel is channel. The system is working
blocked or cannot be received with properly. XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
your SiriusXM subscription package. this message alternates with the XM
Radio eight-digit radio ID label. This
Channel Unavail: This previously label is needed to activate the
assigned channel is no longer service.
assigned. Tune to another station.
Unknown: If this message is For more information, see Using the XM playing screen:
received when tuned to channel 0, www.siriusxm.com or call 1. Press the Menu screen button.
there could be a receiver fault. 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) and
Consult with your dealer. www.xmradio.ca or call 2. Select XM Categories.
Check XM Receivr: If this 1-877-209-0079 (Canada). 3. Select or deselect a category.
message does not clear within a When SiriusXM is active, the station A checkmark will indicate that
short period of time, the receiver name, number, category name, the category is selected.
could have a fault. Consult with your song title, and artist display on the
dealer.
SiriusXM Messages
screen. SiriusXM may update the
background picture at any time. XL (Explicit Language
XM Not Available: If this message
Channels): These stations, or any
does not clear within a short period SiriusXM Categories others, can be blocked by request,
of time, the receiver could have a
SiriusXM stations are organized in by calling 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.),
fault. Consult with your dealer.
categories. and 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
Satellite Radio (Radio Adding or Removing SiriusXM XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated. No
with Touchscreen) Categories
action is required.
Satellite Radio Using the home page:
Loading XM: The audio system is
Vehicles with a valid SiriusXM ® 1. Press the Settings screen button acquiring and processing audio and
satellite radio subscription can on the Home Page. text data. No action is needed.
receive SiriusXM programming. 2. Select XM Categories. Channel Off Air: This station is not
SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide 3. Select or deselect a category. currently in service.
variety of programming and A checkmark will indicate that Channel Unauth: This station is
commercial-free music, coast to the category is selected. blocked or cannot be received.
coast, and in digital-quality sound.
Press “Show All XM Categories” to
restore all SiriusXM categories.
Channel Unavailable: This XM Radio ID: If tuned to station 0, FM

previously assigned station is no this message alternates with the
FM signals only reach about
longer assigned. SiriusXM radio eight-digit radio ID
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although
No Artist Info: No artist label. This label is needed to
the radio has a built-in electronic
information is available at this time activate the service.
circuit that automatically works to
on this station. Unknown: If this message is reduce interference, some static can
No Title Info: No song title received when tuned to station 0, occur, especially around tall
information is available at this time there could be a receiver fault. buildings or hills, causing the sound
on this station. Consult with your dealer. to fade in and out.
No CAT Info: No category XM Not Available: If this message AM
information is available at this time does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a The range for most AM stations is
on this station. greater than for FM, especially at
fault. Consult with your dealer.
No Information: No text or night. The longer range can cause
informational messages are Radio Reception station frequencies to interfere with
available at this time on this station. each other. Static can also occur
Frequency interference and static when things like storms and power
No XM Signal: The vehicle may be can occur during normal radio lines interfere with radio reception.
in a location where the SiriusXM reception if items such as phone When this happens, try reducing the
signal is being blocked. When the chargers, vehicle convenience treble on the radio.
vehicle is moved into an open area, accessories, and external electronic
the signal should return. devices are plugged into the
CAT Not Found: There are no accessory power outlet. If there is
stations available for the selected interference or static, unplug the
category. item from the accessory power
outlet.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Multi-Band Antenna Audio Players

Service
The multi-band antenna is located
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service on the roof of the vehicle. This type CD Player (Radio without
provides digital radio reception. Tall of antenna is used with the AM/FM Touchscreen)
buildings or hills can interfere with radio, as well as OnStar and the
satellite radio signals, causing the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service Playing a CD
sound to fade in and out. In System, if the vehicle has these Insert a CD partway into the slot,
addition, traveling or standing under features. Keep this antenna clear of label side up. The player pulls it in
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, snow and ice build up for clear radio and the CD should begin playing.
or tunnels may cause loss of the reception. If the vehicle has a
SiriusXM signal for a period of time. sunroof, the performance of the Z EJECT: Press and release to
radio system may be affected if the eject the disc that is currently
Cell Phone Usage sunroof is open. Loading items onto playing. A beep sounds and
Cell phone usage, such as making the roof of the vehicle can interfere Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
or receiving phone calls, charging, with the performance of the radio disc is ejected, Remove Disc
or just having the phone on may system and, if the vehicle has this displays. The disc can be removed.
cause static interference in the feature, OnStar. Make sure the If the disc is not removed, after
radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off multi-band antenna is not several seconds, the disc
if this happens. obstructed. automatically pulls back into the
player.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
the CD that is currently playing.
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press ©
SEEK to go to the start of the
current track, if more than
10 seconds on the CD have played. BAND: Press to listen to the radio surface of a CD is damaged, such
Press ¨ SEEK to go to the next when a CD is playing. The CD as cracked, broken, or scratched,
track. remains inside the radio for future the CD does not play properly or not
listening. at all. Do not touch the bottom side
If either arrow is held, or pressed of a CD while handling it; this could
multiple times, the player continues CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
select between CD, or Auxiliary. damage the surface. Pick up CDs
moving backward or forward by grasping the outer edges or the
through the tracks on the CD. . When a CD is in the player, the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track If the surface of a CD is soiled, take
and hold to reverse playback quickly a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen a
within a track. Sound will be heard number display.
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
at a reduced volume. Release to . If an auxiliary input device is not detergent solution mixed with water,
resume playing the track. The connected, “No Input Device and clean it. Make sure the wiping
elapsed time of the track displays. Found” displays. process starts from the center to
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Care of CDs the edge.
and hold to advance playback Care of the CD Player
quickly within a track. Sound will be If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
heard at a reduced volume. Release can be reduced due to CD-R or Do not add any label to a CD; it
to resume playing the track. The CD-RW quality, the method of could get caught in the CD player.
elapsed time of the track displays. recording, the quality of the music If a CD is recorded on a personal
that has been recorded, and the computer and a description label is
RDM (Random): CD tracks can be way the CD-R or CD-RW has been needed, try labeling the top of the
listened to in random, rather than handled. Handle them carefully. recorded CD with a marking pen.
sequential order with the random Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
setting. To use random, press the original cases or other protective The use of CD lens cleaners for
softkey under the RDM label until cases and away from direct sunlight CDs is not advised.
Random Current Disc displays. and dust. The CD player scans the
Press the softkey again to turn off bottom surface of the disc. If the
random play.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD Messages

. The label is caught in the CD
CD, more than one CD is inserted player.
Check Disc: Radios with a single
into the slot at a time, or an If the CD is not playing correctly for
CD player display Check Disc and/
attempt is made to play scratched any other reason, try a known
or eject the CD if an error occurs.
or damaged CDs, the CD player good CD.
could be damaged. While using Optical Error: The disc was
the CD player, use only CDs in inserted upside down. If any error occurs repeatedly or if
good condition without any label, an error cannot be corrected,
Disk Read Error: A disc was contact your dealer. If the radio
load one CD at a time, and keep inserted with an invalid or unknown
the CD player and the loading slot displays an error message, write it
format. down and provide it to your dealer
free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris. Player Error: There are disc LOAD when reporting the problem.
or disc EJECT problems.
If an error displays, see “CD CD Player (Radio with
Messages” later in this section. . It is very hot. When the
temperature returns to normal, Touchscreen)
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or the CD should play. The player can be used for CD,
CD-RW Disc . The road is very rough. When MP3 audio, and Video.
The radio has the capability of the road becomes smoother, the With the vehicle on, insert a disc
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD should play. into the slot, label side up. The
CD-RW disc. For more information . player pulls it in and begins playing.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R
or upside down. The system is capable of playing:
or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio
with Touchscreen) on page 7‑25 or . The air is very humid. If so, wait . Most audio CDs
MP3 (Radio without Touchscreen) about an hour and try again.
on page 7‑29. .
. CD-R
There was a problem while
burning the CD.
. CD-RW

. MP3 or unprotected WMA . Use a marking pen to label the 2. From the Discscreen, press the
formats top of the disc. Menu screen button to display
When playing any compatible Loading and Ejecting Discs the menu options.
recordable disc, the sound quality 3. Press to select the desired
can be reduced due to disc quality, To load a disc:
option.
the method of recording, the quality 1. Turn the vehicle on.
of the music that has been On the Disc main page a track
2. Insert a disc into the slot, label number displays at the beginning of
recorded, or the way the disc has
side up. The player pulls it in the each track. Song, Artist, elapsed
been handled.
rest of the way. If the disc is time, and Album information
There can be increased skipping, damaged or improperly loaded, displays when available.
difficulty in recording tracks, there is an error and the disc
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or ejects. Use the following controls to play
difficulty in loading and ejecting. the disc:
The disc automatically plays once
If these problems occur, check the
loaded. © SEEK:
disc for damage or try a known . Press to seek to the beginning of
good disc. Press Z to eject a disc from the the current or previous track.
To avoid damage to the CD player: CD player. If the disc is not removed If the track has been playing for
.
within a short period of time, it is less than eight seconds, it seeks
Do not use scratched or automatically pulled back into the
damaged discs. to the previous track. If longer
player. than eight seconds, the current
. Do not apply labels to discs. The track starts from the beginning.
labels could get caught in the Playing an Audio CD
player. 1. Press the Disc screen button on
. Press and hold to fast reverse
the Home Page or select through a track. Release the
. Insert only one disc at a time. button to return to playing
the disc.
. Keep the loading slot free of speed. Elapsed time displays.
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.

. The road is very rough. Try the
SEEK ¨: MP3 (Radio with
disc again when the road is
. Press to seek to the next track. smoother. Touchscreen)
. Press and hold to fast forward . The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, Playing an MP3 CD
through a track. Release the or upside down.
button to return to playing To play an MP3 CD, follow the same
. The air is very humid. Try the instructions as “Playing an
speed. Elapsed time displays.
disc again later. Audio CD.”
PUSH/SEL (Select): Turn to the . There was a problem while The following guidelines must be
right or left to select the next or
burning the disc. met when creating an MP3 disc,
previous track.
. The label is caught in the player. otherwise the CD might not play:
Error Messages . Sampling rate: 16 kHz,
If the CD is not playing correctly, for
If Disc Error displays and/or the disc any other reason, try a known 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
comes out, it could be for one of the good CD. 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
following reasons: . Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,
If any error continues, contact your
. The disc has an invalid or dealer. 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,
unknown format. 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,
and 320 kbps.
. The disc is very hot. Try the disc
again when the temperature . Maximum number of folders:
returns to normal. eight folders with 255 files per
folder.

. Maximum of 1,000 files on by the artist. There might be a delay
a disc. before the list displays. Select a
. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW song from the list to begin playback.
with a maximum capacity of Genres: Press to view the genres.
700 MB. Select a genre to view a list of all
. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/ songs of that genre. Select a song
Genre information requires a CD from the list to begin playback.
to be fully scanned before the Albums: Press to view the albums
music navigator works with on the disc. Select the album to
these menus. Press any of the following buttons
on the CD Audio Menu: view a list of all songs on the album.
MP3 Audio There might be a delay before the
Folders: Press to view the folders list displays. Select a song from the
stored on the disc. Select a folder to list to begin playback.
view the list of all songs in that
folder. There might be a delay Composers: Press to view the
before the list displays. Select a Composers stored on the disc.
song from the list to begin playback. There might be a delay before the
list displays. The Composers menu
Playlists: Press to view the displays. Select a composer to
playlists stored on the disc. Select a display a list of albums from the
playlist to view the list of all songs in composer.
that playlist. There might be a delay
Press the Menu screen button while before the list displays. Select a Tracks (Song Titles): Press to
that source is active to access the song from the list to begin playback. display a list of all songs on the
CD Audio Menu. disc. Songs are displayed as stored
Artists: Press to view the list of on the disc. There might be a delay
artists stored on the disc. Select an before the list displays. To begin
artist name to view a list of all songs playback, select a song from the list.
Root Directory present in the ID3 tag, the radio

The root directory is treated as a displays the file name as the
folder. All files contained directly track name.
under the root directory are Preprogrammed Playlists
accessed prior to any root directory
folders. The radio recognizes
preprogrammed playlists; however,
Empty Folders there is no editing capability. These
If a root directory or folder is empty playlists are treated as special
or contains only folders, the player folders containing compressed Press one of the options from the
advances to the next folder in the audio song files. Root Folder to display other folders
file structure that contains a Music Navigator of that option type. Keep pressing to
compressed audio file. The empty display each screen until all levels
folder(s) are not displayed or Folders have been reached. The last level
numbered. usually contains the desired song
to play.
No Folder
Playlists
When the CD only contains
compressed audio files without any
folders or playlists, all files are
under the root folder.
File System and Naming
The song titles, artists, albums, and
genres are taken from the file's ID3 The folder structure can support up
tag and are only displayed if present to five levels of depth. The folders
in the tag. If a song title is not and then songs will display in
alphabetical order.
Press the Playlist screen button Press the Artist screen button Select an album from the Albums
displayed on the Root Folder menu. displayed on the Root Folder menu. menu to display a list of songs.
The Playlist menu displays. The Artist menu displays. Select a song for playback.
Genres
Press the Genre screen button
displayed on the Root Folder menu.
The Genre menu displays.
Follow the same instructions as
given for Artist. Each menu
selection will eventually lead to the
song for playback.
Select one of the options listed on Select an artist from the Artist menu Tracks
the Playlist menu. A list displaying to display a list of albums.
the song titles, then Artists
associated with the titles appear. Albums
Artists
Press the Song Titles screen button

displayed on the Root Folder menu.
The Song Titles menu displays.
Select the desired song for
playback.
Composers Select the Album to display a list of Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
songs. Select the desired song for Discs
playback. The radio can play discs that
contain both uncompressed CD
MP3 (Radio without audio and MP3/WMA files. If both
Touchscreen) formats are on the disc, the radio
plays both file formats in the order in
Format which they were recorded to
Radios that have the capability of the disc.
playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File
Press the Composers screen button files that were recorded onto a and Folder Structure
displayed on the Root Folder menu. CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can
be recorded with the following fixed The radio supports:
The Composers menu displays.
Select a composer to display a list bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, . Up to 50 folders.
of Albums from the composer. 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps,
. Up to eight folders in depth.
192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and . Up to 15 playlists.
320 kbps or a variable bit rate. . Up to 512 files and folders.
Radios that have a USB port can . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
play .mp3 and .wma files stored on a
extension.
USB storage device as well as AAC
files that are stored on an iPod. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
file extension.
USB Supported File and Folder If a disc contains both track of the last playlist has
Structure uncompressed CD audio and MP3/ played, play continues from the
The radio supports: WMA files, a folder under the root first track of the first playlist.
directory called CD accesses all of . Play begins from the first track in
. Up to 700 folders. the CD audio tracks on the disc. the first folder and continues
. Up to eight folders in depth. Empty Folder sequentially through all tracks in
. Up to 65,535 files. each folder. When the last track
Folders that do not contain files are of the last folder has played,
. Folder and file names up to skipped, and the player advances to play continues from the first
64 bytes. the next folder that contains files. track of the first folder.
. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file Order of Play When play enters a new folder, the
extension. Compressed audio files are display does not automatically show
. AAC files stored on an iPod. accessed in the following order: the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as
. FAT16 . Playlists (Px).
the default display. The new track
. FAT32 . Files stored in the root directory. name displays.
Root Directory . Files stored in folders in the root File System and Naming
directory.
The root directory of the disc is The song name that displays is the
treated as a folder. If the root Tracks are played in the following song name contained in the ID3 tag.
directory has compressed audio order: If the song name is not present in
files, the directory displays on the . Play begins from the first track in the ID3 tag, the radio displays the
radio as the CD label. the first playlist and continues file name without the extension
sequentially through all tracks in (such as .mp3) as the track name.
each playlist. When the last
Track names longer than 32 ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next random, press the softkey under the
characters or four pages are track. Press and hold or press RDM tab until Random Current Disc
shortened. Parts of words on the multiple times to continue moving displays to play songs in random
last page of text and the extension forward through tracks. order. Press the same softkey again
of the filename do not display. to turn off random play.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
Preprogrammed Playlists to reverse playback quickly. Sound h (Music Navigator): Press the
Preprogrammed playlists that were is heard at a reduced volume and softkey below h to play files in
created using WinAmp™, the elapsed time of the file displays. order by artist or album.
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ Release s REV to resume playing. The player scans the disc to sort the
software can be accessed; however, \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press files by artist and album ID3 tag
they cannot be edited using the and hold to advance playback information. It can take several
radio. These playlists are treated as quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced minutes to scan the disc depending
special folders containing volume and the elapsed time of the on the number of files on the disc.
compressed audio song files. The radio may begin playing while it
file displays. Release \ FWD to
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls is scanning in the background.
resume playing. The elapsed time of
file extension and are stored on a the file displays. When the scan is finished, the disc
USB device may be supported by begins playing files in order by
the radio with a USB port. S c (Previous Folder): Press artist. The current artist playing is
the softkey below S c to go to the shown on the second line of the
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3 first track in the previous folder. display. Once all songs by that artist
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA c T (Next Folder): Press the are played, the player moves to the
files. next artist in alphabetical order and
softkey below c T to go to the first
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of begins playing files by that artist.
track in the next folder.
the track, if more than 10 seconds To listen to files by another artist,
have played. Press and hold or RDM (Random): Files on the disc
press the softkey below either arrow
press multiple times to continue can be listened to in random, rather
tab. The disc goes to the next or
moving backward through tracks. than sequential order. To use previous artist in alphabetical order.
Continue pressing either softkey Connecting a USB Storage connector and connect the other
below the arrow tab until the artist Device or iPod® end to the USB port located in the
displays. instrument panel storage area. If the
To change from playback by artist to vehicle is on and the USB
playback by album: connection works, “OK to
disconnect” and a GM logo may
1. Press the softkey below the Sort appear on the iPod, and iPod
By tab. appears on the radio's display. The
2. Press one of the softkeys below iPod music appears on the radio’s
the Album tab from the sort display and begins playing.
screen. The iPod charges while it is
3. Press the softkey below the connected to the vehicle if the
Back tab to return to the main vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
music navigator screen. or ON/RUN position. When the
vehicle is turned off, the iPod
The album name displays on the automatically powers off and will not
second line between the arrows and To connect a USB storage device,
connect the device to the USB port charge or draw power from the
songs from the current album vehicle's battery.
begins to play. Once all songs from located in the instrument panel
that album have played, the player storage area. See Instrument Panel If you have an older iPod model that
moves to the next album in Storage on page 4‑1 for more is not supported, it can still be used
alphabetical order on the CD and information. by connecting it to the Auxiliary
begins playing MP3 files from that The USB port can be used to Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm
album. control an iPod or a USB storage (1/8 in) stereo cable. See Clock
device. (Radio with Touchscreen) on
To exit music navigator mode, press page 5‑8 or Clock (Radio without
the softkey below the Back tab to To connect an iPod, connect one Touchscreen) on page 5‑7 for more
return to normal MP3 playback. end of the USB cable that came information.
with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
Using the Radio to Control a volume. Release \ FWD to j (Pause): Press the softkey below
USB Storage Device or iPod resume playing. The elapsed time of j to pause the track. The tab
The radio can control a USB the file displays. appears raised when pause is being
storage device or an iPod using the 4 (Information): Press to display used. Press the softkey below j
radio buttons and knobs and display additional information about the again to resume playback.
song information on the radio’s selected track. Back: Press the softkey below the
display. Back tab to go back to the main
Using Softkeys to Control a
f (Tune): Turn to select files. USB Storage Device or iPod
display screen on an iPod, or the
root directory on a USB storage
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of The five softkeys below the radio device.
the track, if more than 10 seconds display are used to control the
have played. Press and hold or functions listed below.
c (Folder View): Press the
press multiple times to continue softkey below c to view the
moving backward through tracks. To use the softkeys: contents of the current folder on the
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next 1. Press the first or fifth softkey USB drive. To browse and select
track. Press and hold or press below the radio display to files:
multiple times to continue moving display the functions listed
forward through tracks. below, or press the softkey 1. Press the softkey below c.
below the function if it is 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold currently displayed.
to reverse playback quickly. Sound of folders.
is heard at a reduced volume. 2. Press the softkey below the tab
with the function on it to use that 3. Press f to select the folder.
Release s REV to resume playing. If there is more than one folder,
The elapsed time of the file function.
repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the
displays. folder is reached.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press 4. Turn f to scroll through the files
and hold to advance playback
in the selected folder.
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced

. Genres . Third softkey, 5% through the list
5. Press f to select the file to be
. Songs each time the softkey is pressed.
played.
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
. Composers
To skip through large lists, the five
list each time the softkey is
softkeys can be used to navigate in To select files: pressed.
the following order:
. First softkey, first item in the list.
1. Press the softkey below h. . Fifth softkey, end of the list.
. Second softkey, 1% through the 2. Turn f to scroll through the list Repeat Functionality
list each time the softkey is of menus. To use Repeat:
pressed.
3. Press f to select the menu. Press the softkey below " or '
. Third softkey, 5% through the list to select between Repeat All and
each time the softkey is pressed. 4. Turn f to scroll through the Repeat Track.
folders or files in the
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the " (Repeat All): Press the softkey
selected menu.
list each time the softkey is
below " to repeat all tracks. The
pressed. 5. Press f to select the file to be
tab appears lowered when Repeat
. Fifth softkey, end of the list. played. All is being used. This is the default
h (Music Navigator): Press the To skip through large lists, the five mode when a USB storage device
softkeys can be used to navigate in or iPod is first connected.
softkey below h to view and
the following order: ' (Repeat Track): Press the
select a file on an iPod, using the
iPod's menu system. Files are . First softkey, first item in the list. softkey below ' to repeat one
sorted by: . Second softkey, 1% through the track. The tab appears raised when
. Playlists list each time the softkey is Repeat Track is being used.
pressed.
. Artists
. Albums
Shuffle Functionality Auxiliary Devices To use an auxiliary input device,

To use Shuffle: connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
Press the softkey below >, 2, (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack on the
faceplate. For vehicles with a USB Press CD/AUX or SRCE to select
C , or = to select between port, it is in the instrument panel the device.
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, storage area. Using the USB Port
or Shuffle Folder. Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) For vehicles with a USB port, the
> (Shuffle Off): This is the Auxiliary Input Jack connector is in the instrument panel
default mode when a USB storage This is not an audio output; do not storage area. See Instrument Panel
device or iPod is first connected. plug a headphone set into the front Storage on page 4‑1.
2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle auxiliary input jack. Connect an Radios with a USB port can control
Songs): Shuffles all songs on the auxiliary input device such as an a USB storage device or an iPod
USB storage device or iPod. iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, using the radio buttons and knobs.
CD player, or cassette tape player See MP3 (Radio with Touchscreen)
C (Shuffle Album): Shuffles all
to the auxiliary input jack for use as on page 7‑25 or MP3 (Radio without
songs in the current album on
another source for audio listening. Touchscreen) on page 7‑29 for
an iPod.
Drivers are encouraged to set up information about how to connect
= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all
any auxiliary device while the and control a USB storage device or
songs in the current folder on a USB an iPod.
vehicle is in P (Park). See
storage device.
Defensive Driving on page 9‑2 for
more information on driver
distraction.
USB Supported Devices Rear Seat In severe or extreme weather

. USB Flash Drives conditions, the RSE system might or
Infotainment might not work until the temperature
. Portable USB Hard Drives is within the operating range. The
. Fifth generation or later iPod Rear Seat Audio (RSA) operating range for the RSE system
is above −20°C (−4°F) or below
. iPod nano ® System 60°C (140°F). If the temperature of
. iPod touch® The vehicle may have a DVD Rear the vehicle is outside of this range,
. ® Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. heat or cool the vehicle until the
iPod classic The RSE system works with the temperature is within the operating
Not all iPods and USB drives are vehicle's audio system. The DVD range of the RSE system.
compatible with the USB port. player is part of the front radio. The
RSE system includes a radio with a Parental Control
Make sure the iPod has the latest
firmware from Apple® for proper DVD player, a video display screen, The RSE system may have a
operation. iPod firmware can be audio/video jacks, two wireless Parental Control feature, depending
updated using the latest iTunes® headphones, and a remote control. on the radio. To enable Parental
application. See www.apple.com/ See Operation (Radio without Control, press and hold the radio
itunes. Touchscreen) on page 7‑6 or power button for more than
Operation (Radio with Touchscreen) two seconds to stop all system
For help identifying your iPod, go to on page 7‑8 for more information on features such as: radio, video
www.apple.com/support. the vehicle's infotainment system. screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While
Before Driving Parental Control is on, Q displays.
The RSE is designed for rear seat When the radio is turned back on,
passengers only. The driver cannot Parental Control is unlocked.
safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
Headphones CDs, DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As, are shut off or if the headphones are
radio, any auxiliary source out of range of the transmitters for
connected to A/V jacks, or the more than three minutes. Moving too
auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle far forward or stepping out of the
has this feature. The wireless vehicle, can cause the headphones
headphones have a power button, to lose the audio signal.
channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volume For optimal audio performance, the
control. Switch the headphones off headphones must be worn correctly.
when not in use. Headphones should be worn with
Push the power button to turn on the headband over the top of the
the headphones. An indicator light head for best audio reception. The
located on the headphones comes symbol L (Left) appears on the
on. If the light does not come on, outside bottom edge of the ear cup
the batteries might need to be and should be positioned on the left
A. Battery cover replaced. Intermittent sound or static ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
B. Channel 1 or 2 switch on the headphones can also be an on the outside bottom edge of the
indication of weak batteries. See ear cup and should be positioned on
C. Power button “Battery Replacement” later in this the right ear.
D. Volume control section for more information. Notice: Do not store the
E. Power indicator light To adjust the volume on the headphones in heat or direct
headphones, use the volume control sunlight. This could damage the
The RSE includes two 2-channel located on the right side. headphones and repairs will not
wireless headphones that are be covered by the warranty.
dedicated to this system. Channel 1 Infrared transmitters are located at
the rear of the RSE overhead Storage in extreme cold can
is dedicated to the video screen, weaken the batteries. Keep the
while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery headphones stored in a cool, dry
selections. These headphones are place.
used to listen to media such as power if the RSE system and RSA
If the foam ear pads attached to the If the headphones are to be stored The A/V jacks, located on the rear
headphones become worn or for a long period of time, remove the of the floor console, allow audio or
damaged, the pads can be replaced batteries and keep them in a cool, video signals to be connected from
separately from the headphone set. dry place. an auxiliary device such as a
To purchase replacement ear pads, camcorder or a video game unit to
call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then prompt Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks the RSE system. Adapter
zero (0), or contact your dealer. connectors or cables (not supplied)
Headphones should be stored in the might be required to connect the
front floor console and not in the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks.
front seat back pocket. Headphone Refer to the manufacturer’s
damage can occur when the second instructions for proper usage.
row seats are folded forward. Power for auxiliary devices is not
supplied by the radio system.
Battery Replacement
To use the auxiliary inputs of the
To change the batteries on the RSE system, connect an external
headphones: auxiliary device to the color-coded
1. Turn the screw to loosen the A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary
battery door located on the left device and the video screen power
side of the headphones. Slide A. Yellow: Video Input on. If the video screen is in the DVD
the battery door open. player mode, pressing the AUX
B. White: Left Audio Input (auxiliary) button on the remote
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that C. Red: Right Audio Input control switches the video screen
they are installed correctly, using The A/V jacks are color coded to from the DVD player mode to the
the diagram on the inside of the match typical home entertainment auxiliary device. The radio can listen
battery compartment. system equipment. to the audio of the connected
auxiliary device by sourcing to
3. Replace the battery door and auxiliary. See Auxiliary Devices on
tighten the door screw. page 7‑35 for more information.
How to Change the RSE Video The RSE system always transmits Video Screen
Screen Settings the audio signal to the wireless
The video screen is located in the
The screen display mode (normal, headphones, if there is audio
overhead console. When the video
full, and zoom), screen brightness, available. See “Headphones” earlier
screen is not in use, push it up into
and setup menu language can be in this section for more information.
its locked position.
changed from the on screen setup The DVD player is capable of
To use the video screen:
menu by using the remote control. outputting audio to the wired
To change a setting: headphone jacks on the RSA 1. Push the release button located
system, if the vehicle has this on the overhead console.
1. Press z. feature. The DVD player can be 2. Move the screen to the desired
2. Use n, q, p, o and r to selected as an audio source on the position.
navigate and use the RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) System on page 7‑36 for If a DVD is playing and the screen
setup menu. is raised to its locked position, the
more information.
3. Press z again to remove the screen remains on; this is normal,
When a device is connected to the and the DVD continues to play
setup menu from the screen. A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary through the previous audio source.
Audio Output input jack, if the vehicle has this
feature, the rear seat passengers Press P on the remote control or
Audio from the DVD player or are able to hear audio from the eject the disc to turn off the screen.
auxiliary inputs can be heard auxiliary device through the wireless The infrared receivers for the
through the following sources: or wired headphones. The front seat wireless headphones and the
. Wireless headphones passengers are able to listen to remote control are located at the
playback from this device through rear of the overhead console.
. Vehicle speakers the vehicle speakers by selecting
. Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks AUX as the source on the radio.
on the RSA system, if the
vehicle has this feature.
Notice: Avoid directly touching not seem to be working, the Remote Control Buttons
the video screen, as damage may batteries might need to be replaced. O (Power): Press to turn the video
occur. See “Cleaning the Video See “Battery Replacement” later in screen on and off.
Screens” later in this section for this section. Objects blocking the
more information. line of sight could also affect the P (Illumination): Press to turn the
function of the remote control. remote control backlight on. The
Remote Control backlight automatically times out
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD after seven to 10 seconds if no
slot, the remote control O button other button is pressed while the
can be used to turn on the video backlight is on.
screen display and start the disc.
The radio can also turn on the video v (Title): Press to return the DVD
screen display. See Operation to the main menu of the DVD. This
(Radio without Touchscreen) on function could vary for each disc.
page 7‑6 or Operation (Radio with y (Main Menu): Press to access
Touchscreen) on page 7‑8 for more the DVD menu. The DVD menu is
information. different on every DVD. Use the
Notice: Storing the remote navigation arrows to move the
control in a hot area or in direct cursor around the DVD menu. After
sunlight can damage it, and the making a selection press the enter
repairs will not be covered by the button. This button only operates
To use the remote control, aim it at when using a DVD.
the transmitter window at the rear of warranty. Storage in extreme cold
the overhead console and press the can weaken the batteries. Keep n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation
desired button. Direct sunlight or the remote control stored in a Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
very bright light could affect the cool, dry place. navigate through a menu.
ability of the RSE transmitter to r (Enter): Press to select the
receive signals from the remote choice that is highlighted in
control. If the remote control does any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press to adjust t (Previous Track/Chapter): or CD, release [. This button might
the brightness, screen display mode Press to return to the start of the not work when the DVD is playing
(normal, full, or zoom), and display current track or chapter. Press again the copyright information or the
the language menu. to go to the previous track or previews.
q (Return): Press to exit the chapter. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the
e (Audio): Press to change audio
current active menu and return to tracks on DVDs that have this
the previous menu. This button copyright information or the
feature when the DVD is playing.
operates only when the display previews.
The format and content of this
menu or a DVD menu is active. u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to function vary for each disc.
c (Stop): go to the beginning of the next
Press to stop playing,
chapter or track. This button might
{ (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. OFF subtitles and to move through
Press twice to return to the not work when the DVD is playing
subtitle options when a DVD is
beginning of the DVD. the copyright information or the
playing. The format and content of
previews.
s (Play/Pause): Press to start this function vary for each disc.
playing a DVD. Press while a DVD r (Fast Reverse): Press to AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch
is playing to pause it. Press again to quickly reverse the DVD or CD. To
the system between the DVD player
continue playing the DVD. stop fast reversing a DVD video,
and an auxiliary source.
press s. To stop fast reversing a
When the DVD is playing,
DVD audio or CD, release r. This
2 (Camera): Press to change
depending on the radio, play may camera angles on DVDs that have
button might not work when the
be slowed down by pressing s this feature when a DVD is playing.
DVD is playing the copyright The format and content of this
then [. The DVD continues playing information or the previews. function vary for each disc.
in a slow play mode. Depending on
the radio, perform reverse slow play [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast The numeric keypad provides the
by pressing s then r. To cancel
forwarding a DVD video, press s. capability of direct chapter or track
slow play mode, press s again. To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio number selection.
\ (Clear): Press within Battery Replacement

three seconds after entering a To change the remote control
numeric selection, to clear all batteries:
numerical inputs.
1. Slide the rear cover back on the
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press remote control.
to select chapter or track numbers
greater than nine. Press this button 2. Replace the two batteries in the
before entering the number. compartment. Make sure that
they are installed correctly, using
If the remote control becomes lost the diagram on the inside of the
or damaged, a new universal battery compartment.
remote control can be purchased.
If this happens, make sure the 3. Replace the battery cover.
universal remote control uses a If the remote control is to be stored
Toshiba® code set. for a long period of time, remove the
batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action
There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen. There are black Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by
borders on the top and bottom or on both sides, or the pressing the display menu button on the remote control.
picture looks stretched out.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the
remote control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or
installed incorrectly.
After stopping the player, and pushing Play, sometimes If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD player
the DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at the resumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If the
beginning. stop button was pressed two times, the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is running, but there is no picture or Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary
sound. source mode.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)

Problem Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,
buzzes. and interference from cellular telephone towers, or use a
cellular telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L
(left) and R (right) on the headphones.
The remote and/or the headphones are lost. See your dealer for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD
player.
DVD Display Error Messages Disc Region Error: This message DVD Distortion
displays if the disc is not from a
The DVD display error message Video distortion can occur when
correct region.
depends on which radio the vehicle operating cellular phones, scanners,
has. The video screen might display No Disc Inserted: This message CB radios, Global Position Systems
one of the following: displays if no disc is present when (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile
Disc Load/Eject Error: This the Z EJECT button is pressed on faxes, or walkie talkies.
message displays when there are the radio. It might be necessary to turn off the
disc load or eject problems. DVD player when operating one of
Disc Format Error: This message these devices in or near the vehicle.
displays if the disc is inserted with *Excludes the OnStar® System.
the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Rear Audio © SEEK ¨ : Press the SEEK
Console Controller (RAC) arrows to go to the previous or to
When cleaning the RSE overhead the next radio station while in AM,
console surface, use only a clean FM, or SiriusXM® (if equipped).
cloth dampened with clean water. Press the SEEK arrows to go to the
previous or to the next track or
Cleaning the Video Screen chapter while sourced to a CD or
DVD slot.
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water. Use care when SRCE (Source): Press this button
directly touching or cleaning the to switch between the radio (AM,
screen, as damage could result. The vehicle may have the Rear FM), SiriusXM (if equipped), CD,
Audio Controller (RAC). Certain and if the vehicle has these
radio functions can be controlled features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
with RAC. rear auxiliary.
x w (Next/Previous): Press the > (Mute): Press this button to
down or up arrows to go to the next silence the system. Press this
or to the previous radio station button again, or any other radio
stored as a favorite. button, to turn the sound on.
When a CD/DVD is playing, press
the down or up arrows to go to the + / − x (Volume): Press the plus or
next or previous track or chapter. minus volume buttons to increase or
to decrease the volume.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
Phone The system may not work with
A Bluetooth system can use a
Bluetooth-capable cell phone with a
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in Hands-Free Profile to make and
Bluetooth this section for more information. receive phone calls. The system
For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice can be used while the key is in the
Bluetooth capability, the system can dialing capability, learn to use ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the position. The range of the Bluetooth
allowing: address book or contact list. See system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this section Not all phones support all functions,
. Placement and receipt of calls in and not all phones work with the
a hands-free mode. for more information.
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
. Sharing of the cell phone’s
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
address book or contact list with Numbers” in this section for information on compatible phones.
the vehicle. more information.
Voice Recognition
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
{ WARNING The Bluetooth system uses voice
parked: recognition to interpret voice
When using a cell phone, it can commands to dial phone numbers
. Become familiar with the be distracting to look too long or and name tags.
features of the cell phone. too often at the screen of the
Organize the phone book and phone or the infotainment For additional information, say
contact lists clearly and delete (navigation) system. Taking your “Help” while you are in a voice
duplicate or rarely used entries. eyes off the road too long or too recognition menu.
If possible, program speed dial often could cause a crash Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
or other shortcuts. resulting in injury or death. Focus a minimum. The system may not
. Review the controls and your attention on driving. recognize voice commands if there
operation of the infotainment is too much background noise.
system.

. The pairing process is disabled
When to Speak: A short tone b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
when the vehicle is moving.
sounds after the system responds answer incoming calls, confirm
indicating when it is waiting for a system information, and start . Pairing only needs to be
voice command. Wait until the tone speech recognition. completed once, unless the
and then speak. pairing information on the cell
c / x (End): Press to end a call,
phone changes or the cell phone
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a reject a call, or cancel an operation.
calm and natural voice. is deleted from the system.
Pairing . Only one paired cell phone can
Audio System
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone be connected to the Bluetooth
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth must be paired to the Bluetooth system at a time.
system, sound comes through the system and then connected to the . If multiple paired cell phones are
vehicle's front audio system vehicle before it can be used. See within range of the system, the
speakers and overrides the audio the cell phone manufacturer's user system connects to the first
system. Use the audio system guide for Bluetooth functions before available paired cell phone in the
volume knob, during a call, to pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth order that they were first paired
change the volume level. The phone is not connected, calls will be to the system. To connect to a
adjusted volume level remains in made using OnStar Hands-Free different paired phone, see
memory for later calls. To prevent Calling, if equipped. See OnStar “Connecting to a Different
missed calls, a minimum volume Overview on page 14‑1. Phone” later in this section.
level is used if the volume is turned
down too low. Pairing Information Pairing a Phone
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3
Bluetooth Controls
capability cannot be paired to
1. Press and hold b / g for
Use the buttons located on the the vehicle as a phone and an two seconds.
steering wheel to operate the MP3 player at the same time. 2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See can be skipped.
. Up to five cell phones can be
Steering Wheel Controls on
paired to the Bluetooth system.
page 5‑2.
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone
with instructions and a four-digit Phones To connect to a different cell phone,
Personal Identification Number The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the
4. Start the pairing process on the also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all the available cell
cell phone that you want to pair. system responds with “is connected” phones were paired. Depending on
For help with this process, see after that phone name. which cell phone you want to
the cell phone manufacturer's connect to, you may have to use
user guide. 1. Press and hold b / g for this command several times.
two seconds.
5. Locate the device named “Your
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Vehicle” in the list on the cell two seconds.
phone. Follow the instructions 3. Say “List.”
on the cell phone to enter the 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
PIN provided in Step 3. After the Deleting a Paired Phone 3. Say “Change phone.”
PIN is successfully entered, the If the phone name you want to
system prompts you to provide a
. If another cell phone is
delete is unknown, see “Listing All found, the response will be
name for the paired cell phone. Paired and Connected Phones.”
This name will be used to “<Phone name> is now
indicate which phones are 1. Press and hold b / g for connected.”
paired and connected to the two seconds. . If another cell phone is not
vehicle. The system responds 2. Say “Bluetooth.” found, the original phone
with “<phone name> has been remains connected.
successfully paired” after the 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
pairing process is complete. which phone to delete.
6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pair 4. Say the name of the phone you
additional phones. want to delete.
Storing and Deleting Phone Using the “Store” Command repeats back the digit it heard
Numbers followed by a tone. After the last
1. Press and hold b / g for digit has been entered, say
The system can store up to 30 two seconds. “Store,” and then follow the
phone numbers as name tags in the directions given by the system to
2. Say “Store.”
Hands-Free Directory that is shared save a name tag for this number.
between the Bluetooth and OnStar 3. Say the phone number or group
systems, if equipped. of numbers you want to store all Using the “Delete” Command
at once with no pauses, then
The following commands are used
follow the directions given by the 1. Press and hold b / g for
to delete and store phone numbers. two seconds.
system to save a name tag for
Store: This command will store a this number. 2. Say “Delete.”
phone number, or a group of
numbers as a name tag. Using the “Digit Store” Command 3. Say the name tag you want to
If an unwanted number is delete.
Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a recognized by the system, say Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
name tag by entering the digits one “Clear” at any time to clear the last Command
at a time. number.
This command deletes all stored
Delete: This command is used to To hear all of the numbers name tags in the Hands-Free
delete individual name tags. recognized by the system, say Calling Directory and the OnStar
“Verify” at any time. Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,
Delete All Name Tags: This if equipped.
command deletes all stored name 1. Press and hold b / g for
tags in the Hands-Free Calling two seconds. To delete all name tags:
Directory and the OnStar 2. Say “Digit Store.” 1. Press and hold b / g for
Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,
3. Say each digit, one at a time, two seconds.
if equipped.
that you want to store. After 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
each digit is entered, the system
Listing Stored Numbers Using the “Dial” or “Call” If an unwanted number is

Command recognized by the system, say
The list command will list all stored
“Clear” at any time to clear the last
numbers and name tags. 1. Press and hold b / g for number.
Using the “List” Command two seconds.
To hear all of the numbers
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” recognized by the system, say
two seconds. 3. Say the entire number without “Verify” at any time.
pausing, or say the name tag.
2. Say “Directory.” 1. Press and hold b / g for
Once connected, the person called two seconds.
3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.” will be heard through the audio
speakers. 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
4. Say “List.”
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
Making a Call Calling 911 Emergency that you want to dial. After each
Calls can be made using the 1. Press and hold b / g for digit is entered, the system
following commands. two seconds. repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last
Dial or Call: The dial or call 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” digit has been entered,
command can be used say “Dial.”
3. Say “911.”
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag. 4. Say "Dial" or "Call.” Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
Digit Dial: This command allows a Using the “Digit Dial” Command speakers.
phone number to be dialed by
The digit dial command allows a Using the “Re-dial” Command
entering the digits one at a time.
phone number to be dialed by
Re-dial: This command is used to entering the digits one at a time. 1. Press and hold b / g for
dial the last number used on the cell After each digit is entered, the two seconds.
phone. system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone. 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”
Once connected, the person called . Press c / x to disconnect the Muting a Call
will be heard through the audio current call and switch to the call
During a call, all sounds from inside
speakers. on hold.
the vehicle can be muted so that the
Receiving a Call Three-Way Calling person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
When an incoming call is received, Three-way calling must be
the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the cell phone and . To mute a call, press b / g , and
tone is heard in the vehicle. enabled by the wireless service then say “Mute call.”
carrier.
. Press b / g to answer the call. . To cancel mute, press b / g ,
1. While on a call, press b / g. and then say “Un-mute call.”
. Press c / x to ignore a call.
2. Say “Three-way call.” Transferring a Call
Call Waiting
3. Use the dial or call command to Audio can be transferred between
Call waiting must be supported on dial the number of the third party the Bluetooth system and the cell
the cell phone and enabled by the to be called. phone.
wireless service carrier.
4. Once the call is connected, The cell phone must be paired and
. Press b / g to answer an press b / g to link all callers connected with the Bluetooth
incoming call when another call together. system before a call can be
is active. The original call is transferred. The connection process
placed on hold. Ending a Call can take up to two minutes after the
Press c / x to end a call. ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
. Press b / g again to return to
the original call.
. To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required.
Transferring Audio from the Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone (DTMF) Tones
Voice pass-thru allows access to the
During a call with the audio in the voice recognition commands on the The Bluetooth system can send
vehicle: cell phone. See your cell phone numbers and the numbers stored as
manufacturer's user guide to see if name tags during a call. You can
1. Press b / g. the cell phone supports this feature. use this feature when calling a
2. Say “Transfer Call.” To access contacts stored in the cell menu-driven phone system.
phone: Account numbers can also be
Transferring Audio to the
stored for use.
Bluetooth System from a Cell
Phone
1. Press and hold b / g for Sending a Number or Name Tag
two seconds.
During a call with the audio on the During a Call
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
cell phone, press b / g. The audio can be skipped. 1. Press b / g. The system
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio responds “Ready,” followed by
does not transfer to the vehicle, use 3. Say “Voice.” The system a tone.
the audio transfer feature on the cell responds “OK, accessing
<phone name>.” 2. Say “Dial.”
phone. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for more The cell phone's normal prompt 3. Say the number or name tag
information. messages will go through their cycle to send.
according to the phone's operating
instructions.
Clearing the System Settings

Unless information is deleted out of Press Settings on the Home Page
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it to adjust features and preferences,
will be retained indefinitely. This such as Time, Date, Bluetooth
includes all saved name tags in the Device List, Voice Recognition,
phone book and phone pairing Favorite Pages, Display Settings,
information. For information on how Navigation Settings, etc.
to delete this information, see the
previous section “Deleting a Paired 1. Press the Settings screen button
Phone” and the previous sections on the Home Page.
on deleting name tags. 2. Touch-tap the scroll bar until the
Other Information desired option displays. Select
the desired settings to change. From the Settings menu, press the
The Bluetooth® word mark and Set Time or Set Date settings
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® A few of the setting options change screen button to display the different
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks the way the navigation system options for setting the time
by General Motors is under license. displays or reacts while in use. and date.
Other trademarks and trade names Bluetooth Device List: Press to
are those of their respective owners. display paired bluetooth devices.
See Radio Frequency Statement on Voice Recognition: Press to
page 13‑21 for information display voice recognition options.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) . Voice Prompt Volume: Press to
rules and Industry Canada adjust the prompt volume.
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. . Prompt Length: Press to select
short or long prompts.
Favorite Pages: Press to select Startup Volume: Press to set the Set Date:
the number of favorite pages maximum volume level for startup . Press the up or down arrows to
displayed on the screen. The choice that will be used even if a higher increase or decrease the Month,
is 1–6 pages. volume had been set when the radio Day, and Year settings.
Display Settings: Press to adjust was turned off.
. Press and hold to quickly
the screen settings. Radio Favorites: Press to select increase or decrease the date
. The Auto setting adjusts the the number of FAV pages to be settings.
screen background automatically used in the system.
. Press OK or the Back screen
depending on the exterior Add/Remove XM Categories: button to save the adjustments.
lighting conditions. Press to customize which available
. The Day setting brightens the XM Categories are displayed and Radio Settings
map background. used in the system.
Press the Config button on the
. The Night setting darkens the RDS Settings: Press to customize Home Page or the CONFIG button
map background. station name and radio text display on the faceplate to enter the menu
options. options. Turn the PUSH/SEL knob
Speed Dependent Volume: Select or touch-tap the scroll bar to scroll
OFF, Low, Medium, or High Set Time:
through the available options. Press
sensitivity to automatically adjust . Press the up or down arrows to the PUSH/SEL knob or press Radio
the volume to minimize the effects increase or decrease the Hours, Settings to display the radio settings
of unwanted background noise that Minutes, AM, PM, or 24 hr on menu. Press this feature to make
can result from changing road the clock. changes for radio information
surfaces, driving speeds, or open . Press and hold to quickly displayed, preset pages, Auto
windows. This feature works best at increase or decrease the time Volume Control, and XM Categories
lower volume settings where settings. Restore.
background noise is typically louder
than the sound system volume. . Press OK or the Back screen
button to save the adjustments.
See Satellite Radio (Radio without Rear Vision Camera (If

Touchscreen) on page 7‑15 or Equipped)
Satellite Radio (Radio with
Touchscreen) on page 7‑19 (if The rear vision camera can assist
equipped), for more information the driver when backing up by
about XM Categories. displaying a view of the area behind
the vehicle.
The Radio Settings are:
Phone Settings
See Bluetooth on page 7‑46 in the Press the Config button to access
“Phone” section for more the Display settings. Adjust the
information on phone settings. brightness of the screen by pressing
the − or + screen button. See Rear
Vehicle Settings Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑35.
See Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑41.
Display An image appears on the system’s
screen so that the driver can check
Mode: Press Mode to change the the surroundings for safety.
screen background. This setting
controls map colors.
Calibrate Touchscreen: Press to
display the Touchscreen Calibration
Screen.
Turn Display Off: Press to turn the
Display option off.
Trademarks and
License Agreements
Manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Copyright
Manufactured under license under 1992-2010 Dolby Laboratories. All
U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; rights reserved.
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
and the DTS logos and Symbol are
trademarks of DTS, Inc.©
1996-2010 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Rear Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Rear Climate Control System
(with Rear Seat Audio) . . . . . . 8-9
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
1. Fan Control 9 (Off): Turn the fan control all the

2. REAR (Rear Climate Control) way counterclockwise to turn the
front climate control system off.
3. Temperature Control
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
4. Recirculation or counterclockwise to increase or
5. Air Delivery Mode Control decrease the fan speed.
6. Air Conditioning
7. Rear Window Defogger
8-2 Climate Controls
Temperature Control: Turn automatically selects outside air. # (Air Conditioning): Press to
clockwise or counterclockwise to Recirculation cannot be selected turn the air conditioning system on
increase or decrease the while in floor mode. or off. An indicator light comes on
temperature of the air flowing from - (Defog): This clears the when A/C is on. The air conditioning
the system. windows of fog or moisture. Air is system does not operate when the
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn directed to the windshield, floor outside temperature is below 4°C
clockwise or counterclockwise to outlets, and side window vents. (40°F). The indicator light flashes
change the current airflow mode. When this mode is selected, the three times and turns off when
system turns off recirculation and outside conditions affect air
By positioning the right knob conditioning operation. This is
between two modes, a combination runs the air conditioning unless the
outside temperature is less than 4°C normal.
of those two modes is selected.
(40°F). Recirculation cannot be For quicker cool down on hot days:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the selected while in the defog mode.
instrument panel outlets. Do not drive the vehicle until all the 1. Open the windows to let hot air
windows are clear. escape.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and 0 (Defrost): This clears the 2. Select H mode.
floor outlets. Some air is directed windshield of fog or frost more
toward the windshield and side quickly. Air is directed to the 3. Select #.
window outlets. Cooler air is windshield and side window vents, 4. Select the coolest temperature.
directed to the upper outlets and with some to the floor vents. In this
warmer air to the floor outlets. 5. Select the highest fan speed.
mode, outside air is pulled inside
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the the vehicle. Recirculation cannot be 6. Close the windows after the hot
floor outlets, with some of the air selected while in the defrost mode. air has escaped.
directed to the windshield, side The air conditioning system runs 7. Once the vehicle's interior
window, and second row floor automatically in this setting, unless temperature is below the outside
outlets. In this mode, the system the outside temperature is less than
4°C (40°F). Do not drive the vehicle temperature, select @ mode
until all windows are clear. for faster cooling.
Using recirculation for long periods these modes, the indicator flashes turning off. The defogger will also
of time could cause the air inside three times and turns off. The air turn off when the engine is
the vehicle to become too dry. To conditioning also comes on when turned off.
prevent this from happening, after this mode is activated unless the Do not drive the vehicle until all
the inside of the vehicle has cooled, outside air temperature is less than windows are clear.
turn the recirculation mode off. 4°C (40°F). While in recirculation
mode the windows can fog when For vehicles with heated outside
The air conditioning system rearview mirrors, fog or frost is
removes moisture from the air, so the weather is cold and damp. To
clear the fog, select either the defog cleared from the surface of the
water might drip under the vehicle
while idling or after turning off the or defrost mode and increase the mirror when 1 is pressed.
engine. This is normal. fan speed.
Notice: Do not use anything
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn REAR (Rear Climate Control): sharp on the inside of the rear
the recirculation mode on or off. An Press to turn the rear heating and window. If you do, you could cut
indicator light comes on when air conditioning on or off. See Rear or damage the warming grid, and
recirculation is on. When the engine Climate Control System on page 8‑8 the repairs would not be covered
is turned off, the recirculation mode or Rear Climate Control System by the vehicle warranty. Do not
automatically turns off and must be (with Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑9. attach a temporary vehicle
re-selected when the engine is license, tape, a decal, or anything
Rear Window Defogger
turned on again. similar to the defogger grid.
The rear window defogger uses a
This mode recirculates and helps to warming grid to remove fog from the
quickly cool the air inside the rear window.
vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
the vehicle. Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. The rear window
The recirculation mode cannot be defogger stays on for about
used with floor, defrost, or defogging 10 minutes, before automatically
modes. If recirculation is selected in
Dual Automatic Climate Control System function along with the inside
temperature setting. The outside
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with temperature is displayed on the
this system. instrument cluster.
( (On/Off): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to turn the climate
control system on or off.
The climate control system will also
turn on if the defrost, AUTO, or air
conditioning buttons are pressed.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): The system
automatically controls the inside
temperature, the air delivery, and
the fan speed.
To use automatic mode:
1. Driver and Passenger Side 7. Rear Window Defogger
Temperature Controls 1. Press the AUTO button.
8. Fan Control
2. Air Delivery Mode Controls When AUTO is selected, the
9. Recirculation current temperature(s) is
3. SYNC (Synchronized 10. Air Conditioning displayed and the AUTO
Temperature) indicator light is on.
4. AUTO (Automatic Operation) Display Function
When AUTO is selected, the air
5. REAR (Rear Climate Control) Each time the temperature, mode,
conditioning and air inlet are
or fan controls are adjusted, the
6. Defrost automatically controlled. The air
climate control display shows that
conditioning runs when the
outside temperature is over 4°C is available. Turn the fan knob to temperature. The passenger side
(40°F). The system is override this delay and select display will show the temperature
automatically set to outside air, the fan speed. setting.
unless it is hot outside and then SYNC (Synchronized
the air inlet changes to Temperature Control
Temperature): Press to set the
recirculation mode to help The driver and passenger side passenger temperature to match the
quickly cool the vehicle. The temperature controls are used to driver temperature setting.
recirculation indicator light will adjust the temperature of the air
come on. coming through the system. The Manual Operation
2. Set the temperature for the temperature can be adjusted even if
The air delivery mode or fan speed
driver and passenger. the system is turned off since
can be manually adjusted.
outside air still enters the vehicle,
To find a comfortable setting, unless the recirculation mode is 9 (Fan Control): Turn the knob
start with a 22°C (73°F) selected. See “Recirculation” later in clockwise or counterclockwise to
temperature setting and allow this section. increase or decrease the fan speed.
about 20 minutes for the system
Driver Side Temperature Turning the fan control knob while in
to regulate. Use the driver side
Control: Turn clockwise or automatic control places the fan
or passenger side temperature
counterclockwise to increase or speed under manual control.
control to adjust the temperature
setting as necessary. The decrease the driver side The air delivery mode remains in
system will remain at the temperature. The driver side automatic control. The fan setting
selected setting. Choosing the temperature display will show the displays momentarily and then no
warmest or coolest temperatures temperature setting. longer displays.
does not cause the vehicle to Passenger Side Temperature
heat or cool more quickly. Control: Turn clockwise or Air Delivery Modes: Press H, ),
counterclockwise to increase or 6, or- to change the direction of
To avoid blowing cold air in cold the airflow in the vehicle. An
weather, the system delays decrease the passenger side
indicator light comes on in the
turning on the fan until warm air selected mode button. Pressing a
mode button while the system is off outlets, and side window vents. The A/C does not work when the
changes the air delivery mode When this mode is selected, the outside temperature is below 4°C
without turning the system on. system turns off recirculation and (40°F). If A/C is pressed the
Changing the air delivery mode runs the air conditioning compressor indicator flashes three times and
while in automatic control places the unless the outside temperature is turns off to show that the A/C mode
system into manual control. The air less than 4°C (40°F). Do not drive is not available. If the A/C is on and
delivery mode button indicator the vehicle until all the windows are the outside temperature drops
displays, and the AUTO button clear. below a temperature which is too
indicator light turns off. 0 (Defrost): Press to turn the cool for air conditioning to be
H (Vent): Air is directed to the defrost on or off. This mode quickly effective, the A/C indicator turns off
instrument panel outlets. clears the windshield of fog or frost. to show that the A/C mode has
Air is directed to the windshield, been canceled.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
side window, and floor vents. In this On hot days, open the windows
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets. Some air is directed mode, outside air is pulled inside briefly to let hot inside air escape.
towards the windshield and side the vehicle. The air conditioning This helps reduce the time it takes
window outlets. Cooler air is system runs automatically in this for the interior of the vehicle to
directed to the upper outlets and setting, unless the outside cool down.
warmer air to the floor outlets. temperature is less than 4°C (40°F). The air conditioning system
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the Do not drive the vehicle until all the removes moisture from the air, so
floor outlets, with some of the air windows are clear. water might drip under the vehicle
directed to the windshield, side while idling or after turning off the
Air Conditioning engine. This is normal.
window, and second row floor
outlets. In this mode, the system A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to @ (Recirculation): Press to turn
uses outside air. turn the air conditioning on and off. the recirculation mode on or off. An
An indicator light comes on when indicator light comes on when
- (Defog): This mode clears the A/C is on. recirculation is on. When the engine
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the windshield, floor is turned off, the recirculation mode
automatically turns off and must be Rear Window Defogger Sensors

re-selected when the engine is
The rear window defogger uses a The solar sensor in the defrost grille
turned on again.
warming grid to remove fog from the in the middle of the instrument
This mode recirculates and helps to rear window. panel, monitors the solar heat. Do
quickly cool the air inside the not cover the solar sensor or the
vehicle. It can be used to prevent R1 (Rear Window Defogger): system will not work properly.
outside air and odors from entering Press to turn the rear window
the vehicle. defogger on or off. The rear window
defogger stays on for about
The recirculation mode cannot be 10 minutes, before turning off. The
used with floor, defog, or defrosting defogger also turns off when the
modes. If recirculation is selected in engine is turned off. Do not drive the
these modes, the indicator flashes vehicle until all the windows are
three times and turns off. The air clear.
conditioning compressor also comes
on when this mode is activated. For vehicles with heated outside
While in recirculation mode the rearview mirrors, fog or frost is
windows can fog when the weather cleared from the surface of the
is cold and damp. To clear the fog, mirror when the rear window defog
select either the defog or defrost button is pressed.
mode and increase the fan speed. Notice: Do not use a razor blade The interior temperature sensor, on
REAR: Press to turn the rear or sharp object to clear the inside the instrument panel to the right of
heating and air conditioning on or rear window. Do not adhere the steering column, measures the
off. See Rear Climate Control anything to the defogger grid temperature of the air inside the
System on page 8‑8 or Rear lines in the rear glass. These vehicle.
Climate Control System (with Rear actions may damage the rear
There is also an exterior
Seat Audio) on page 8‑9. defogger. Repairs would not be
temperature sensor behind the front
covered by your warranty.
grille. This sensor reads the outside
air temperature and helps maintain Rear Climate Control System

the temperature inside the vehicle.
Any cover on the front of the vehicle
could cause a false reading in the
displayed temperature.
The climate control system uses the
information from these sensors to
maintain comfort settings by
adjusting the temperature, fan
speed, and air delivery mode. The
system may also supply cooler air to
the side of the vehicle facing the
sun. The recirculation mode will also
be used as needed to maintain cool
outlet temperatures.
1. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front
2. Temperature Control climate control system to control the
rear climate control system. The
3. Air Delivery Mode Control REAR text displays when the rear
For vehicles with the rear climate system is on.
control system, the controls are Sync Mode: This mode matches
located on the rear of the center the rear climate control to the front
console. The system can also be climate control settings. It comes on
controlled with the front controls. when REAR is pressed.
Independent Mode: This mode Rear Climate Control System (with Rear Seat Audio)
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the rear
controls. It comes on when any rear
control is adjusted.
Fan Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob to ( to turn the fan off.
Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the airflow
temperature.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
to the desired mode to change the 1. Fan Control rear controls, except C , are
airflow direction. 2. Air Delivery Mode Control pressed. The display is activated
H (Vent): Air is directed through when the rear system is on.
3. Temperature Control
the overhead outlets. The system can also be turned off,
For vehicles with the rear climate
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed control system, the controls are by pressingC until the fan goes off.
through the rear floor outlets, as located on the rear of the center Sync Mode: This mode matches
well as the overhead outlets. console. the rear climate control to the front
6 (Floor): Air is directed through Press the REAR button on the front climate control settings. It comes on
the floor outlets. The rear system climate control system to control the when REAR is pressed.
floor outlets are located under the rear climate control system. The
third row seats. system also turns on if any of the
Independent Mode: This mode N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Air Vents
directs rear seating airflow Press to manually change the
according to the settings of the rear direction of the airflow. Repeatedly Use the slider switch in the center of
controls. It comes on when any rear press the button until the desired the outlet, to change the direction of
control is adjusted. mode appears on the display. the airflow. Use the thumbwheel
near the outlet to control the amount
D and C (Fan Control): Press the H (Vent): Air is directed through of airflow or to shut off the airflow.
fan up or down buttons to increase the overhead outlets.
or decrease the fan speed. Keep all outlets open whenever
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed possible for best system
Temperature Control: Press + or through the rear floor outlets, as performance.
− to increase or decrease the air well as the overhead outlets.
temperature. The temperature
settings will display in 6 (Floor): Air is directed through
0-12 increments, going from the the floor outlets. The rear system
coolest (0) to the warmest (12) floor outlets are located under the
setting. third row seats.
Operation Tips Maintenance 1. Open the glove box.

. Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from the air inlets at Passenger Compartment
the base of the windshield that Air Filter
can block the flow of air into the
vehicle. The filter removes dust, pollen, and
. other airborne irritants from outside
Use of non-GM approved hood
air and inside air when in
deflectors can adversely affect
recirculation mode.
the performance of the system.
The filter should be replaced as part
. Keep the path under all seats
of routine scheduled maintenance.
clear of objects to help circulate
See Maintenance Schedule on
the air inside the vehicle more
page 11‑2. To find out what type of
effectively.
replacement filter to use, see 2. Twist the compartment
. If fogging reoccurs while in vent Maintenance Replacement Parts on retainers (1) and pull outward to
or bi-level modes with mild page 11‑13. remove.
temperature throughout the
vehicle, turn on the air 3. Lower the instrument panel
conditioner to reduce windshield compartment assembly (2)
fogging. beyond the stops.
4. If needed, unsnap the instrument 6. Remove the old air filter from the
panel compartment assembly (2) passenger compartment air filter
from the instrument panel. When housing (2).
reinstalling, be sure the 7. Install the new air filter.
instrument panel compartment
dampener arm is aligned 8. Replace the housing cover.
properly to the dampener gear 9. If removed, reinstall the
assembly. instrument panel compartment
assembly.
10. Reinstall the compartment
retainers.
5. Squeeze the housing cover (1) See your dealer if additional
tabs to remove. assistance is needed.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Object Detection Systems

Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-31
Operating Parking over Things Side Blind Zone
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Rear Vision
Driving Information Engine Exhaust Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Running the Vehicle While Fuel
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Automatic Transmission Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-39
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-21 California Fuel
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-39
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Drive Systems Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-6 Filling a Portable Fuel
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Brakes Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Antilock Brake
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Towing
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 General Towing
Starting and Operating Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-13 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-26 Driving Characteristics and
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Ride Control Systems Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Cruise Control Conversions and Add-Ons
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
9-2 Driving and Operating

. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential { WARNING
distractions.
Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Taking your eyes off the road too
long or too often could cause a
Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
and can take your focus from the crash resulting in injury or death.
programming favorite radio
task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate Focus your attention on driving.
judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into Refer to the Infotainment section
from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to and the infotainment manual for
governments have enacted laws driving. more information on using that
regarding driver distraction. Become system, including pairing and using
. Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in a cell phone.
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
to the floor.
To avoid distracted driving, always Defensive Driving
. Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands Defensive driving means “always
to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive. expect the unexpected.” The first
. Keep pets in an appropriate step in driving defensively is to wear
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint. the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations page 3‑13.
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a . Assume that other road users
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone. (pedestrians, bicyclists, and
. Watch the road. Do not read, other drivers) are going to be
take notes, or look up careless and make mistakes.
information on phones or other Anticipate what they might do
electronic devices. and be ready.

. Allow enough following distance
between you and the driver in
Control of a Vehicle If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating normally but do not pump the
are important factors in helping to brakes. Doing so could make the
. Focus on the task of driving.
control a vehicle while driving. pedal harder to push down. If the
Drunk Driving engine stops, there will be some
Braking power brake assist but it will be
Death and injury associated with used when the brake is applied.
Braking action involves perception
drinking and driving is a global Once the power assist is used up, it
time and reaction time. Deciding to
tragedy. can take longer to stop and the
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is brake pedal will be harder to push.
{ WARNING reaction time.
Steering
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In Variable Effort Steering
perceptions, attentiveness, and that time, a vehicle moving at
Some vehicles have a steering
judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
system that varies the amount of
a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
effort required to steer the vehicle in
can have a serious — or even distance in an emergency.
relation to the speed of the vehicle.
fatal — collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
The amount of steering effort
drinking. include:
required is less at slower speeds to
Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between make the vehicle more
a driver who has been drinking. you and the vehicle in front maneuverable and easier to park. At
Ride home in a cab; or if you are of you. faster speeds, the steering effort
with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking. increases to provide a sport-like feel
who will not drink. to the steering. This provides
. Keep pace with traffic. maximum control and stability.
If the vehicle seems harder to steer Curve Tips Off-Road Recovery

than normal when parking or driving . Take curves at a reasonable
slowly, there may be a problem with
speed.
the system. You will still have power
steering, but steering will be stiffer . Reduce speed before entering a
than normal at slow speeds. See curve.
your dealer for service. . Maintain a reasonable, steady
Hydraulic Power Steering speed through the curve.
If your vehicle has hydraulic power
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
steering, it may require the curve before accelerating
maintenance. See Power Steering gently into the straightaway.
Fluid on page 10‑18. Steering in Emergencies
If power steering assist is lost . There are some situations when
because the engine stops, or there steering around a problem may The vehicle's right wheels can drop
is a system malfunction, the vehicle be more effective than braking. off the edge of a road onto the
can be steered but may require shoulder while driving. Follow
increased effort. See your dealer if . Holding both sides of the
steering wheel allows you to turn these tips:
there is a problem.
180 degrees without removing 1. Ease off the accelerator and
a hand. then, if there is nothing in the
. Antilock Brake System (ABS) way, steer the vehicle so that it
allows steering while braking. straddles the edge of the
pavement.
2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
right front tire contacts the
pavement edge.
3. Turn the steering wheel to go If the vehicle starts to slide, follow Remember: Antilock brakes help
straight down the roadway. these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid.
. Ease your foot off the
Loss of Control accelerator pedal and steer the Driving on Wet Roads
Skidding way you want the vehicle to go. Rain and wet roads can reduce
The vehicle may straighten out. vehicle traction and affect your
There are three types of skids that Be ready for a second skid if it ability to stop and accelerate.
correspond to the vehicle's three occurs. Always drive slower in these types
control systems: of driving conditions and avoid
. Slow down and adjust your
. Braking Skid — wheels are not driving according to weather driving through large puddles and
rolling. conditions. Stopping distance deep‐standing or flowing water.
. Steering or Cornering Skid — can be longer and vehicle
too much speed or steering in a control can be affected when { WARNING
curve causes tires to slip and traction is reduced by water,
lose cornering force. snow, ice, gravel, or other Wet brakes can cause crashes.
material on the road. Learn to They might not work as well in a
. Acceleration Skid — too much recognize warning clues — such quick stop and could cause
throttle causes the driving as enough water, ice, or packed pulling to one side. You could
wheels to spin. snow on the road to make a lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt. After driving through a large
by taking reasonable care suited to puddle of water or a car/vehicle
existing conditions, and by not . Try to avoid sudden steering, wash, lightly apply the brake
overdriving those conditions. But acceleration, or braking, pedal until the brakes work
skids are always possible. including reducing vehicle speed normally.
by shifting to a lower gear. Any
sudden changes could cause (Continued)
the tires to slide.
Other Rainy Weather Tips

. Keep your eyes moving — scan
WARNING (Continued) the road ahead and to the sides.
Besides slowing down, other wet .
Flowing or rushing water creates weather driving tips include: Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
strong forces. Driving through . Allow extra following distance.
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
. Pass with caution. Hill and Mountain Roads
happens, you and other vehicle . Keep windshield wiping Driving on steep hills or through
occupants could drown. Do not equipment in good shape. mountains is different than driving
ignore police warnings and be . Keep the windshield washer fluid on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
very cautious about trying to drive reservoir filled. driving in these conditions include:
through flowing water. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
. Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on good shape.
Hydroplaning page 10‑35. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water . Turn off cruise control. tires, cooling system, and
can build up under the vehicle's transmission.
tires so they actually ride on the Highway Hypnosis . Shift to a lower gear when going
water. This can happen if the road is down steep or long hills.
wet enough and you are going fast Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no If you become tired or sleepy, find a { WARNING
contact with the road. safe place to park the vehicle
If you do not shift down, the
and rest.
There is no hard and fast rule about brakes could get so hot that they
hydroplaning. The best advice is to Other driving tips include: would not work well. You would
slow down when the road is wet. . Keep the vehicle well ventilated. then have poor braking or even
. Keep the interior (Continued)
temperature cool.

. Stay in your own lane. Do not Drive with caution, whatever the
WARNING (Continued) swing wide or cut across the condition. Accelerate gently so
center of the road. Drive at traction is not lost. Accelerating too
none going down a hill. You could speeds that let you stay in your quickly causes the wheels to spin
crash. Shift down to let the engine own lane. and makes the surface under the
assist the brakes on a steep tires slick, so there is even less
. Be alert on top of hills;
downhill slope. something could be in your lane traction.
(stalled car, accident). Try not to break the fragile traction.
. Pay attention to special road If you accelerate too fast, the drive
{ WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding wheels will spin and polish the
roads, long grades, passing or surface under the tires even more.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
or with the ignition off is appropriate action. improves vehicle stability during
dangerous. The brakes will have hard stops on slippery roads, but
to do all the work of slowing down Winter Driving apply the brakes sooner than when
and they could get so hot that on dry pavement. See Antilock
they would not work well. You Driving on Snow or Ice Brake System (ABS) on page 9‑25.
would then have poor braking or Drive carefully when there is snow
even none going down a hill. Allow greater following distance on
or ice between the tires and the any slippery road and watch for
Steering may also be affected road, creating less traction or grip. slippery spots. Icy patches can
when ignition is off. You could Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32° occur on otherwise clear roads in
crash. Always have the engine F) when freezing rain begins to fall, shaded areas. The surface of a
running and the vehicle in gear resulting in even less traction. Avoid curve or an overpass can remain icy
when going downhill. driving on wet ice or in freezing rain when the surrounding roads are
until roads can be treated with salt clear. Avoid sudden steering
or sand. maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
Turn off cruise control on slippery

surfaces. WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Blizzard Conditions cannot be seen or smelled. It can to the highest setting. See
cause unconsciousness and even “Climate Control Systems” in
Being stuck in snow can be a
death. the Index.
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
If possible, use Roadside carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
Assistance. See Roadside Exhaust on page 9‑20.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
especially any that is blocking
page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance
the exhaust pipe. To save fuel, run the engine for only
Program (U.S. and Canada) on
. Check again from time to short periods as needed to warm
page 13‑11. To get help and keep
time to be sure snow does the vehicle and then shut the engine
everyone in the vehicle safe:
not collect there. off and close the window most of
. Turn on the hazard warning the way to save heat. Repeat this
flashers. . Open a window about 5 cm until help arrives but only when you
(2 in) on the side of the feel really uncomfortable from the
. Tie a red cloth to an outside
vehicle that is away from the cold. Moving about to keep warm
mirror.
wind to bring in fresh air. also helps.
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
Snow can trap engine exhaust panel. the engine, push the accelerator
under the vehicle. This may . Adjust the climate control pedal slightly so the engine runs
cause exhaust gases to get system to a setting that faster than the idle speed. This
inside. Engine exhaust contains circulates the air inside the keeps the battery charged to restart
carbon monoxide (CO) which vehicle and set the fan speed the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
(Continued) (Continued) as possible to save fuel.
If the Vehicle Is Stuck system. Shift back and forth nonfactory-installed options.
between R (Reverse) and a low Two labels on your vehicle show
Slowly and cautiously spin the forward gear, spinning the wheels
wheels to free the vehicle when
how much weight it may
as little as possible. To prevent properly carry, the Tire and
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. transmission wear, wait until the
Loading Information label and
If stuck too severely for the traction wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator the Certification/Tire label.
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the pedal while shifting, and press
rocking method. See StabiliTrak® lightly on the accelerator pedal { WARNING
System on page 9‑27. when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
{ WARNING forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could Vehicle Weight Rating
If the vehicle's tires spin at high free the vehicle. If that does not get (GVWR), or either the
speed, they can explode, and you the vehicle out after a few tries, it maximum front or rear Gross
or others could be injured. The might need to be towed out. If the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
vehicle can overheat, causing an vehicle does need to be towed out, This can cause systems to
see Towing the Vehicle on break and change the way the
engine compartment fire or other
page 10‑69.
damage. Spin the wheels as little vehicle handles. This could
as possible and avoid going cause loss of control and a
above 56 km/h (35 mph).
Vehicle Load Limits crash. Overloading can also
It is very important to know how shorten the life of the vehicle.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get much weight your vehicle can
it Out carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
Turn the steering wheel left and includes the weight of all
right to clear the area around the
occupants, cargo, and all
front wheels. Turn off any traction
Tire and Loading Information The Tire and Loading never exceed XXX kg or
Label Information label also shows the XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
size of the original equipment placard.
tires (3) and the recommended 2. Determine the combined
cold tire inflation pressures (4). weight of the driver and
For more information on tires passengers that will be riding
and inflation see Tires on in your vehicle.
page 10‑35 and Tire Pressure
on page 10‑42. 3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
There is also important loading passengers from XXX kg or
information on the vehicle XXX lbs.
Certification/Tire label. It tells
you the Gross Vehicle Weight 4. The resulting figure equals
Example Label Rating (GVWR) and the Gross the available amount of cargo
A vehicle-specific Tire and Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for and luggage load capacity.
Loading Information label is the front and rear axle. See For example, if the “XXX”
attached to the center pillar “Certification/Tire Label” later in amount equals 1400 lbs and
(B-pillar). The tire and loading this section. there will be five 150 lb
information label shows the passengers in your vehicle,
Steps for Determining Correct the amount of available cargo
number of occupant seating Load Limit
positions (1), and the maximum and luggage load capacity is
1. Locate the statement “The 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
vehicle capacity weight (2) in combined weight of
kilograms and pounds. = 650 lbs).
occupants and cargo should
5. Determine the combined

weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this Example 1 Example 2
reduces the available cargo 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
and luggage load capacity for Example 1 = 453 kg Example 2 = 453 kg
your vehicle. (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
See Trailer Towing on page 9‑46 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
for important information on 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
towing a trailer, towing safety (300 lbs). (750 lbs).
rules and trailering tips.
3. Available Occupant and 3. Available Cargo Weight =
Cargo Weight = 317 kg 113 kg (250 lbs).
(700 lbs).
seating positions. The combined GVWR includes the weight of

weight of the driver, passengers, the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
and cargo should never exceed and cargo.
your vehicle's capacity weight. The Certification/Tire label also
Certification/Tire Label tells you the maximum weights
for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). To find out the
actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your
Example 3 vehicle. Your dealer can help
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for you with this. Be sure to spread
Example 3 = 453 kg out your load equally on both
(1,000 lbs). sides of the centerline.
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ Never exceed the GVWR for
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example your vehicle or the GAWR for
(1,000 lbs). either the front or rear axle.
A vehicle-specific Certification/
3. Available Cargo Weight = Tire label is attached to the
0 kg (0 lbs). center pillar (B-pillar). { WARNING
Refer to your vehicle's tire and The label shows the gross Do not load the vehicle any
loading information label for weight capacity of your vehicle. heavier than the Gross
specific information about your This is called the Gross Vehicle Vehicle Weight Rating
vehicle's capacity weight and Weight Rating (GVWR). The (Continued)
WARNING (Continued) { WARNING Starting and

Operating
(GVWR), or either the Things you put inside the
maximum front or rear Gross vehicle can strike and injure New Vehicle Break-In
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). people in a sudden stop or
This can cause systems to turn, or in a crash. Notice: The vehicle does not
break and change the way the need an elaborate break-in. But it
. Put things in the cargo will perform better in the long run
vehicle handles. This could area of the vehicle. Try to if you follow these guidelines:
cause loss of control and a spread the weight evenly.
crash. Overloading can also . If you have all-wheel drive,
shorten the life of the vehicle. . Never stack heavier keep your speed at 88 km/h
things, like suitcases, (55 mph) or less for the first
inside the vehicle so that 805 km (500 mi).
Notice: Overloading the
some of them are above . Do not drive at any one
vehicle may cause damage. constant speed, fast or slow,
the tops of the seats.
Repairs would not be covered for the first 805 km (500 mi).
by the vehicle warranty. Do . Do not leave an Do not make full-throttle
not overload the vehicle. unsecured child restraint starts. Avoid downshifting to
in the vehicle. brake or slow the vehicle.
If you put things inside your
vehicle — like suitcases, tools, . When you carry something . Avoid making hard stops for
packages, or anything else, they inside the vehicle, secure the first 322 km (200 mi) or
will go as fast as the vehicle it whenever you can. so. During this time the new
goes. If you have to stop or turn brake linings are not yet
. Do not leave a seat folded broken in. Hard stops with
quickly, or if there is a crash, down unless you need to. new linings can mean
they will keep going. premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every Ignition Positions and turn it only with your hand.
time you get new brake If the key cannot be turned by
linings. hand, see your dealer.
. Do not tow a trailer during ( (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
break-in. See Driving LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
Characteristics and Towing stopped, turn the ignition switch to
Tips on page 9‑43 for the LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
trailer towing capabilities of Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
your vehicle and more will remain active. See Retained
information. Accessory Power (RAP) on
Following break‐in, engine speed page 9‑18.
and load can be gradually This position locks the ignition,
increased. transmission, and the steering
wheel when the key Is removed
The ignition switch has four different from the ignition. The key can be
positions. removed in LOCK/OFF.
In order to shift out of P (Park), the The steering can bind with the
ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ wheels turned off center. If this
ACCESSORY and the brake pedal happens, move the steering wheel
must be applied. from right to left while turning the
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
Notice: Using a tool to force the
does not work, then the vehicle
key to turn in the ignition could
needs service.
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
Do not turn the engine off when the 4. Set the parking brake. See instrument panel warning and
vehicle is moving. This will cause a Parking Brake on page 9‑26. indicator lights. This position can
loss of power assist in the brake also be used for service and
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
{ WARNING diagnostics, and to verify the proper
operation of the malfunction
If the vehicle must be shut off in an Turning off the vehicle while indicator lamp as may be required
emergency: moving may cause loss of power for emission inspection purposes.
assist in the brake and steering The switch stays in this position
1. Brake using a firm and steady systems and disable the airbags. when the engine is running. The
pressure. Do not pump the While driving, only shut the transmission is also unlocked in this
brakes repeatedly. This may position. If you leave the key in the
vehicle off in an emergency.
deplete power assist, requiring ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
increased brake pedal force. position with the engine off, the
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, battery could be drained. You may
This can be done while the and must be shut off while driving, not be able to start the vehicle if the
vehicle is moving. After shifting turn the ignition to ACC/ battery is allowed to drain for an
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the ACCESSORY. extended period of time.
brakes and steer the vehicle to a ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is / (START): This is the position
safe location. the position in which you can that starts the engine. When the
3. Come to a complete stop, shift operate the electrical accessories or engine starts, release the key. The
to P (Park), and turn the ignition items plugged into the accessory ignition switch will return to ON/RUN
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with power outlets. This position unlocks for driving.
an automatic transmission, the the ignition and steering wheel. Use
this position if the vehicle must be Key Lock Release
shift lever must be in P (Park) to
turn the ignition switch to the pushed or towed. The vehicle has an electronic key
LOCK/OFF position. R (ON/RUN): This position can be lock release system. This system is
used to operate the electrical to prevent ignition key removal
accessories and to display some unless the shift lever is in P (Park).
The key lock release will not work if Starting Procedure the engine is already running.
the battery is charged less than 1. With your foot off the accelerator Engine cranking can be stopped
9-volts, or uncharged. Try charging pedal, turn the ignition to START. by turning the ignition switch to
or jump starting the battery. See When the engine starts, let go of the ACC/ACCESSORY or
Jump Starting on page 10‑66 the key. The idle speed will slow LOCK/OFF position.
down as the engine warms. Do Notice: Cranking the engine for
Starting the Engine not race the engine immediately long periods of time, by returning
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or after starting it. Operate the the key to the START position
N (Neutral). The engine will not start engine and transmission gently immediately after cranking has
in any other position. To restart the to allow the oil to warm up and ended, can overheat and damage
engine when the vehicle is already lubricate all moving parts. the cranking motor, and drain the
moving, use N (Neutral) only. The vehicle has a battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
Computer-Controlled Cranking between each try, to let the
Notice: Do not try to shift to cranking motor cool down.
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. System. This feature assists in
If you do, you could damage the starting the engine and protects 2. If the engine does not start after
transmission. Shift to P (Park) components. If the ignition key is five to 10 seconds, especially in
only when the vehicle is stopped. turned to the START position, very cold weather (below −18°C
and then released when the or 0°F), it could be flooded with
Notice: If you add electrical parts engine begins cranking, the too much gasoline. Try pushing
or accessories, you could change engine will continue cranking for the accelerator pedal all the way
the way the engine operates. Any a few seconds or until the to the floor and holding it there
resulting damage would not be vehicle starts. If the engine does as you hold the key in START
covered by the vehicle warranty. not start and the key is held in for up to a maximum of
See Add-On Electrical Equipment START, cranking will be stopped 15 seconds. Wait at least
on page 9‑50. after 15 seconds to prevent 15 seconds between each try, to
cranking motor damage. To allow the cranking motor to cool
prevent gear damage, this down. When the engine starts,
system also prevents cranking if let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but with an engine coolant heater

then stops again, repeat these should be plugged in at least four { WARNING
steps. This clears the extra hours before starting. Some models
gasoline from the engine. Do not may have an internal thermostat in Plugging the cord into an
race the engine immediately the cord which will prevent engine ungrounded outlet could cause an
after starting it. Operate the coolant heater operation at electrical shock. Also, the wrong
engine and transmission gently temperatures above 0°F (−18°C). kind of extension cord could
until the oil warms up and overheat and cause a fire. You
lubricates all moving parts. To Use the Engine Coolant could be seriously injured. Plug
Heater the cord into a properly grounded
Notice: The engine is designed to
1. Turn off the engine. three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts If the cord will not reach, use a
2. Open the hood and unwrap the heavy-duty three-prong extension
or accessories, you could change electrical cord. The bundled cord
the way the engine operates. cord rated for at least 15 amps.
is located on the driver side of
Before adding electrical the engine compartment,
equipment, check with your between the engine air cleaner 4. Before starting the engine, be
dealer. If you do not, the engine and the windshield washer fluid sure to unplug and store the
might not perform properly. Any reservoir. See Engine cord as it was before to keep it
resulting damage would not be Compartment Overview on away from moving engine parts.
covered by the vehicle warranty. page 10‑5. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
3. Plug the cord into a normal,
Engine Heater grounded 110-volt AC outlet. The length of time the heater should
The engine coolant heater can remain plugged in depends on
provide easier starting and better several factors. Ask a dealer in the
fuel economy during engine area where you will be parking the
warm-up in cold weather conditions vehicle for the best advice on this.
at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
Retained Accessory Shifting Into Park WARNING (Continued)

Power (RAP) 1. Hold the brake pedal down and
These vehicle accessories can be set the parking brake. See It is dangerous to get out of the
used for up to 10 minutes after the Parking Brake on page 9‑26 for vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
ignition key is turned off: more information. in P (Park) with the parking brake
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
. Audio System
by holding in the button on the Do not leave the vehicle when the
. Power Windows shift lever and pushing the shift engine is running. If you have left
. Sunroof (if equipped) lever all the way toward the front the engine running, the vehicle
of the vehicle. can move suddenly. You or others
Power to the windows and sunroof
will work up to 10 minutes or until a 3. Turn the ignition key to could be injured. To be sure the
door is opened. LOCK/OFF. vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
The radio continues to work for 4. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle always set the parking brake and
10 minutes or until the driver door is move the shift lever to P (Park).
opened. with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). See Shifting Into Park on
For an additional 10 minutes of page 9‑18. If you are towing a
operation, close all the doors and Leaving the Vehicle with the trailer, see Driving Characteristics
turn the key to ON/RUN and then Engine Running and Towing Tips on page 9‑43.
back to LOCK/OFF.
All these features will work when the { WARNING If you have to leave the vehicle with
key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ the engine running, be sure the
ACCESSORY positions. It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle is in P (Park) and the
vehicle with the engine running. parking brake is firmly set before
It could overheat and catch fire. you leave it. After you have moved
(Continued) the shift lever into P (Park), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, Shifting out of Park 2. Apply the brake pedal.
see if you can move the shift lever 3. Press the shift lever button.
away from P (Park) without first The vehicle is equipped with an
pushing the button. electronic shift lock release system. 4. Move the shift lever to the
The shift lock release is desired position.
If you can, it means that the shift designed to:
lever was not fully locked in If you still are unable to shift out of
P (Park).
. Prevent ignition key removal P (Park):
unless the shift lever is in
Torque Lock P (Park) with the shift lever 1. Fully release the shift lever
button fully released, and button.
Torque lock is when the weight of
the vehicle puts too much force on 2. While holding down the brake
. Prevent movement of the shift
the parking pawl in the pedal, press the shift lever
lever out of P (Park), unless the
transmission. This happens when ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ button again.
parking on a hill and shifting the ACCESSORY and the regular 3. Move the shift lever to the
transmission into P (Park) is not brake pedal is applied. desired position.
done properly and then it is difficult
The shift lock release is always If you still cannot move the shift
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
functional except in the case of an lever from P (Park), see your dealer.
torque lock, set the parking brake
uncharged or low voltage (less than
and then shift into P (Park). To find
9-volt) battery.
out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
listed previously. If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
If torque lock does occur, your
try charging or jump starting the
vehicle may need to be pushed
battery. See Jump Starting on
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park). To shift out of P (Park):
1. Place the ignition in ON/RUN.
Parking over Things Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

That Burn
{ WARNING . There are holes or openings
{ WARNING Engine exhaust contains carbon
in the vehicle body from
damage or aftermarket
Things that can burn could touch monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
hot exhaust parts under the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
vehicle and ignite. Do not park can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
over papers, leaves, dry grass, even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
or other things that can burn. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged, Running the Vehicle
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running.
If the vehicle is left with the engine Automatic

running, follow the proper steps to { WARNING
be sure the vehicle will not move. Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
See Shifting Into Park on page 9‑18
and Engine Exhaust on page 9‑20. vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
If parking on a hill and pulling a firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑43. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
P (Park): This position locks the page 9‑18 and Driving
front wheels. It is the best position Characteristics and Towing Tips
to use when starting the engine on page 9‑43.
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. With the ignition in ON/
RUN, fully apply the regular brake,
then press the button on the back of the vehicle is already moving, use D (Drive): This position is for
the shift lever before shifting from N (Neutral) only. Also, use normal driving. It provides the best
P (Park). If you cannot shift out of N (Neutral) when the vehicle is fuel economy. If you need more
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift being towed. power for passing, and you are:
lever, then push the shift lever all . Going less than 56 km/h
the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
{ WARNING (35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
press the shift lever button and Shifting into a drive gear while the
move the shift lever into another engine is running at high speed is
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
gear. See Shifting out of Park on dangerous. Unless your foot is more, push the accelerator all
page 9‑19. firmly on the brake pedal, the the way down.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to vehicle could move very rapidly. Notice: If the vehicle seems to
back up. You could lose control and hit accelerate slowly or not shift
people or objects. Do not shift gears when you go faster, and
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) you continue to drive the vehicle
while the vehicle is moving into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed. that way, you could damage the
forward could damage the transmission. Have the vehicle
transmission. The repairs would serviced right away. You can
not be covered by the vehicle Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or drive in L (Low) when you are
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only N (Neutral) with the engine driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph)
after the vehicle is stopped. running at high speed may and D (Drive) for higher speeds
To rock the vehicle back and forth to damage the transmission. The until then.
get out of snow, ice, or sand without repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the If the vehicle is stopped on a hill,
damaging the transmission, see If with your foot off the brake pedal,
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9. engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle. the vehicle may roll. This is normal
N (Neutral): In this position, the and is due to the torque converter
engine does not connect with the designed to improve fuel economy
wheels. To restart the engine when
and performance. Use the brake to When you shift from D (Drive) to
hold the vehicle on a hill. Do not use L (Low), the transmission will shift to
the accelerator pedal. a pre-determined lower gear range.
L (Low): This position gives you The highest gear available for this
access to gear ranges. This pre-determined range is displayed
provides more engine braking but next to the L in the DIC. See Driver
lower fuel economy than D (Drive). Information Center (DIC) (Without
You can use it on very steep hills, DIC Buttons) on page 5‑29 or Driver
or in deep snow or mud. See Information Center (DIC) (With DIC
Manual Mode on page 9‑23. Buttons) on page 5‑24 for more
information. The number displayed
in the DIC is the highest gear that
Manual Mode the transmission will be allowed to
To use this feature: operate in. This means that all
Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low). gears below that number are
2. Press the plus/minus button on available. For example, when
ERS mode allows you to choose the 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L,
top-gear limit of the transmission the shift lever, to increase or
decrease the gear range 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are
and the vehicle's speed while automatically shifted by the vehicle.
driving downhill or towing a trailer. available.
The transmission will not shift into
The vehicle has an electronic shift 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is
position indicator within the used or you shift back into D (Drive).
instrument panel cluster. When
using the ERS mode a number will While in L (Low), the transmission
display next to the L, indicating the will prevent shifting to a lower gear
current gear that has been selected. range if the engine speed is too
high. You have a brief period of time
to slow the vehicle. If vehicle speed
is not reduced within the time
allowed, the lower gear range shift When Tow/Haul is activated the Drive Systems
will not be completed. You must Tow/Haul symbol will come on in the
further slow the vehicle, then press instrument cluster. See “Tow/Haul
the − (Minus) button to the desired Mode” under Driving Characteristics All-Wheel Drive
lower gear range. and Towing Tips on page 9‑43 for Vehicles with this feature transfer
Automatic Engine Grade Braking is more information. engine power, as required, to all
not available when the ERS is four wheels. It is fully automatic, and
Automatic Engine Grade
active. It is available in D (Drive) for adjusts itself as needed for road
Braking conditions.
both normal and Tow/Haul mode.
While using the ERS, cruise control Automatic Engine Grade Braking When using a compact spare tire on
and the Tow/Haul mode can be assists when driving on a downhill an AWD vehicle, the system
used. See Tow/Haul Mode following. grade. It maintains vehicle speed by automatically detects the compact
automatically implementing a shift spare and reduces AWD
Tow/Haul Mode schedule that uses the engine and performance to protect the system.
the transmission to slow the vehicle. To restore full AWD operation and
_ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle may The system will automatically prevent excessive wear on the
have a Tow/Haul mode. command downshifts to reduce system, replace the compact spare
The button is located on the vehicle speed, until the brake pedal with a full-size tire as soon as
instrument panel under the climate is no longer being pressed. possible. See Compact Spare Tire
controls. While in the Electronic Range on page 10‑65.
Push the button to activate the Select (ERS) mode, grade braking
system. Push it again to deactivate is deactivated, allowing the driver to
the system. You can use this feature select a range and limiting the
to assist when towing or hauling a highest gear available. Grade
heavy load. braking is available for normal
driving and in Tow/Haul mode.
See Automatic Transmission on
page 9‑21.
Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
System (ABS), an advanced
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
electronic braking system that helps
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
prevent a braking skid.
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
When the vehicle begins to drive normal.
to each wheel, as required, faster
away, ABS checks itself.
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
A momentary motor or clicking noise
you steer around the obstacle while
might be heard while this test is ABS allows you to steer and brake
braking hard.
going on, and it might even be at the same time. In many
noticed that the brake pedal moves As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
If there is a problem with ABS, this there will not be enough time to
warning light stays on. See Antilock apply the brakes if that vehicle
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑20.
Parking Brake brake is fully released and the power brake system under
brake warning light is off before conditions where the driver has
driving. quickly and forcefully applied the
To release the parking brake, hold brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
the regular brake pedal down, then stop or slow down the vehicle. The
push down momentarily on the stability system hydraulic brake
parking brake pedal until you feel control module increases brake
the pedal release. Slowly pull your pressure at each corner of the
foot up off the park brake pedal. vehicle until the ABS activates.
If the parking brake is not released Minor brake pedal pulsation or
when you begin to drive, the brake pedal movement during this time is
system warning light will be on and normal and the driver should
a chime will sound warning you that continue to apply the brake pedal as
the parking brake is still on. the driving situation dictates. The
brake assist feature will
To set the parking brake, hold the If you are towing a trailer and are automatically disengage when the
regular brake pedal down, then parking on a hill, see Driving brake pedal is released or brake
push the parking brake pedal down. Characteristics and Towing Tips on pedal pressure is quickly
page 9‑43. decreased.
If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on Brake Assist Hill Start Assist (HSA)
page 5‑19. This vehicle has a brake assist This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist
Notice: Driving with the parking feature designed to assist the driver (HSA) feature, which may be useful
brake on can overheat the brake in stopping or decreasing vehicle when the vehicle is stopped on a
system and cause premature speed in emergency driving grade. This feature is designed to
wear or damage to brake system conditions. This feature uses the prevent the vehicle from rolling,
parts. Make sure that the parking stability system hydraulic brake either forward or rearward, during
control module to supplement the vehicle drive off. After the driver
completely stops and holds the Ride Control Systems SERVICE STABILITRAK, the
vehicle in a complete standstill on a StabiliTrak light will come on and
grade, HSA will be automatically stay and four chimes are heard.
activated. During the transition StabiliTrak® System If these conditions are observed,
period between when the driver The vehicle has the StabiliTrak turn the vehicle off, wait
releases the brake pedal and starts system which combines antilock 15 seconds, and then turn it back
to accelerate to drive off on a grade, brake, traction, and stability control on again to reset the system. If any
HSA holds the braking pressure to systems and helps the driver of these messages still appear on
ensure that there is no rolling. The maintain directional control of the the Driver Information Center (DIC),
brakes will automatically release vehicle in most driving conditions. the vehicle should be taken in for
when the accelerator pedal is service. For more information on the
applied within the two-second When you first start the vehicle and DIC messages, see Ride Control
window. It will not activate if the begin to drive away, the system System Messages on page 5‑37.
vehicle is in a drive gear and facing performs several diagnostic checks
downhill, or if the vehicle is facing to ensure there are no problems.
uphill and in R (Reverse). The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal
and does not mean there is a
problem with the vehicle. The
system should initialize before the
vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).
In some cases, it may take The StabiliTrak light will flash on the
approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of instrument cluster when the system
driving before the system initializes. is both on and activated.
If the system fails to turn on or The system may be heard or felt
activate, one of the following while it is working; this is normal.
messages will be displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC):
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,
system. See “Traction Control The traction control system is

Operation” following for more enabled automatically when the
information. vehicle is started. It will activate and
When the traction control system the StabiliTrak light will flash if it
has been turned off, system noises senses that any of the wheels are
may be heard and felt as a result of spinning or beginning to lose
The traction control button is located the brake-traction control working. traction while driving. If traction
on the instrument panel. control is turned off, only the
It is recommended to leave the brake-traction control portion of
The traction control part of system on for normal driving traction control will work. The
StabiliTrak can be turned off by conditions, but it may be necessary engine speed management will be
pressing and releasing the traction to turn the system off if the vehicle disabled. In this mode, engine
control button. is stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow, power is not reduced automatically
Traction control can be turned on by and you want to “rock” the vehicle to and the driven wheels can spin
pressing and releasing the traction attempt to free it. It may also be more freely. This can cause the
control button and the appropriate necessary to turn off the system brake-traction control to activate
TRACTION CONTROL ON when driving in extreme off-road constantly.
message will be displayed, if not conditions where high wheel spin is
required. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle
automatically shut off for any other is allowed to spin excessively
reason. on page 9‑9.
while the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brake
When the traction control system is Traction Control Operation warning lights, and any relevant
turned off, the appropriate DIC messages are displayed, the
The traction control system is part of
TRACTION CONTROL OFF transfer case could be damaged.
the StabiliTrak system. Traction
message will be displayed on the The repairs would not be covered
control limits wheel spin by reducing
DIC. The vehicle will still have by the vehicle warranty. Reduce
engine power to the wheels (engine
brake-traction control when traction engine power and do not spin the
speed management) and by
control is off, but will not be able to applying the brakes as necessary.
use the engine speed management
wheel(s) excessively while these Cruise Control

lights and messages are
displayed. With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
The traction control system may
be maintained without keeping your
activate on dry or rough roads or
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
under conditions such as heavy
control does not work at speeds
acceleration while turning or abrupt
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
upshifts/downshifts of the
transmission. When this happens, a When the brakes are applied, the
reduction in acceleration may be cruise control is disengaged.
noticed, or a noise or vibration may
be heard. This is normal. { WARNING
If cruise control is being used when The cruise control buttons are
the system activates, the StabiliTrak Cruise control can be dangerous located on left side of the steering
light will flash and cruise control will where you cannot drive safely at wheel.
a steady speed. So, do not use
automatically disengage. Cruise
the cruise control on winding
T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise
control may be reengaged when control on and off. The indicator
road conditions allow. See Cruise roads or in heavy traffic. comes on when the cruise control
Control on page 9‑29. Cruise control can be dangerous is on.
StabiliTrak may also turn off on slippery roads. On such roads, + RES (Resume/Accelerate):
automatically if it determines that a fast changes in tire traction can Press briefly to make the vehicle
problem exists with the system. cause excessive wheel slip, and resume to a previously set speed,
If the problem does not clear itself you could lose control. Do not use or press and hold to accelerate.
after restarting the vehicle, see your cruise control on slippery roads.
dealer for service. SET–: Press to set the speed and
activate cruise control or to make
the vehicle decelerate.
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using
cruise control without erasing the If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control
set speed from memory. desired speed and then the brakes If the cruise control system is
Setting Cruise Control are applied, the cruise control is already activated:
disengaged without erasing the set . Press and hold the SET– button
If the cruise button is on when not in speed from memory.
use, it could get bumped and go into on the steering wheel until the
cruise when not desired. Keep the Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h lower speed desired is reached,
cruise control switch off when cruise (25 mph) or greater, press the +RES then release it.
is not being used. button on the steering wheel. The . To slow down in small amounts,
vehicle returns to the previously set press the SET– button briefly.
The cruise control light on the speed and stays there.
instrument cluster comes on after Each time this is done, the
the cruise control has been set to Increasing Speed While Using vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
the desired speed. Cruise Control (1 mph) slower.
If the cruise control system is Passing Another Vehicle While
1. Press the I button to turn the
already activated: Using Cruise Control
cruise control system on.
. Press and hold the +RES button Use the accelerator pedal to
2. Get up to the speed desired.
on the steering wheel until the increase vehicle speed. When you
3. Press and release the SET– desired speed is reached, then take your foot off the pedal, the
button located on the steering release it. vehicle will slow down to the
wheel. . previously set cruise speed.
To increase vehicle speed in
4. Take your foot off the small increments, press the Using Cruise Control on Hills
accelerator. +RES button briefly. Each time
How well the cruise control will work
this is done, the vehicle goes
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the Object Detection

accelerator pedal to maintain the WARNING (Continued)
vehicle speed. When going Systems prevent injury, death, or vehicle
downhill, you might have to brake or
damage, even with URPA, always
shift to a lower gear to keep the Ultrasonic Parking Assist check the area around the vehicle
vehicle speed down. When the
brakes are applied the cruise control If available, the Ultrasonic Rear and check all mirrors before
is disengaged. Parking Assist (URPA) system backing.
assists the driver with parking and
Ending Cruise Control avoiding objects while in
R (Reverse). URPA operates at How the System Works
There are three ways to end cruise
control: speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph). URPA comes on automatically when
The sensors on the rear bumper are the shift lever is moved into
. Step lightly on the brake pedal. used to detect objects up to R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
. Press the [ button. 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and to indicate the system is working.
at least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground
. To turn off the cruise control, and below liftgate level. URPA operates only at speeds less
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
press T on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory { WARNING An obstacle is indicated by audible
beeps. The interval between the
The cruise control set speed is The URPA system does not beeps becomes shorter as the
erased from memory by pressing detect children, pedestrians, vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
T or if the ignition is turned off. bicyclists, animals, or objects When the distance is less than
below the bumper or that are too 30 cm (12 in) the beeping is a
close or too far from the vehicle. continuous tone for five seconds.
It is not available at speeds To be detected, objects must be at
greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground
(Continued) and below liftgate level. Objects
must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
. The bumper is damaged. Take
the rear bumper. This detection OWNERS MANUAL: This the vehicle to your dealer to
distance may be less during warmer message can occur under the repair the system.
or humid weather. following conditions: . Other conditions, such as
. The ultrasonic sensors are not vibrations from a jackhammer or
Turning the System On and Off
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear the compression of air brakes on
The system can be disabled through bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, a very large truck, are affecting
the Driver Information Center (DIC). ice, and slush. For cleaning system performance.
See “Park Assist” under Driver instructions, see Exterior Care
Information Center (DIC) (Without on page 10‑73. Side Blind Zone
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑29 or Driver
Information Center (DIC) (With DIC
. The park assist sensors are Alert (SBZA)
Buttons) on page 5‑24 for more covered by frost or ice. Frost or If available, the Side Blind Zone
information. ice can form around and behind Alert system is a lane changing aid
the sensors and may not always that assists drivers with avoiding
URPA defaults to the on setting be seen; this can occur after
each time the vehicle is started. crashes that occur with vehicles in
washing the vehicle in cold the side blind zones.
When the System Does Not weather. The message may not
clear until the frost or ice has
Seem to Work Properly
melted. { WARNING
The following messages may be . A trailer was attached to the SBZA does not detect vehicles
displayed on the DIC:
vehicle, or an object was rapidly approaching outside of the
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this hanging out of the liftgate during side blind zones, pedestrians,
message occurs, take the vehicle to the last drive cycle. Once the bicyclists, or animals. Failure to
your dealer to repair the system. object is removed, URPA will use proper care when changing
return to normal operation. lanes may result in injury, death,
. A tow bar is attached to the (Continued)
vehicle.
5.0 m (16 ft). The height of the zone When the vehicle is started, both
WARNING (Continued) is approximately between outside mirror SBZA displays will
0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2.0 m (6 ft) off the briefly come on to indicate the
or vehicle damage. Before ground. system is operating. When the
making a lane change, always vehicle is moving forward, the left or
check mirrors, glance over your Use caution while changing lanes
when towing a trailer, as the SBZA right side mirror display will light up
shoulder, and use the turn if a vehicle is detected in that blind
signals. detection zones that extend back
from the sides of the vehicle do not zone. If the turn signal is activated
move further back when a trailer is and a vehicle is also detected on
towed. the same side, the display will flash
to give you extra warning not to
How the System Works change lanes.
The SBZA symbol lights up in the At speeds greater then 32 km/h
side mirrors when the system (20 mph), SBZA displays may come
detects a vehicle in the side blind on when approaching or passing
zone, indicating it may be unsafe to other vehicles. SBZA displays may
change lanes. Before making a lane come on when a passed vehicle
change, check the SBZA display, remains in or drops back into the
check all mirrors, glance over your detection zone. SBZA can be
shoulder, and use the turn signals. disabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See Driver
Information Center (DIC) (Without
SBZA Detection Zones DIC Buttons) on page 5‑29 or Driver
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of Information Center (DIC) (With DIC
approximately one lane over from Buttons) on page 5‑24. If SBZA is
both sides of the vehicle, 3.5 m disabled by the driver, the SBZA
(11 ft). This zone starts at each side Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror mirror displays will not light up.
mirror and goes back approximately Display Display
When the System Does Not Seem TEMPORARILY OFF message after your blind zone, or the vehicle is
To Work Properly cleaning the bumper, see your passing through an open field of
Missed alerts can occur under dealer. view area, such as the desert,
normal circumstances and will The SBZA displays may remain on where there is insufficient data for
increase in wet conditions. The if a trailer is attached to the vehicle, operation. This message may also
system does not need to be or a bicycle or object is extending activate during heavy rain or due to
serviced. SBZA is designed to out to either side of the vehicle. road spray. The vehicle does not
ignore stationary objects; however, need service. For cleaning, see
When SBZA is disabled for any “Washing the Vehicle” under
the system may occasionally light reason other than the driver turning
up due to guard rails, signs, trees, Exterior Care on page 10‑73.
it off, it cannot be turned back on.
shrubs, and other stationary objects. The SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT ON SERVICE SIDE DETECTION
This is normal system operation, the option will not be selectable if the SYSTEM: If this message appears,
vehicle does not need service. conditions for normal system both SBZA displays will remain on
If the SBZA displays do not light up operation are not met. indicating there is a problem with
when the system is on and vehicles the SBZA system. If these displays
are in the blind zone, the system SBZA Error Messages remain on after continued driving,
may need service. Take the vehicle The following messages may the system needs service. Take the
to your dealer. appear in the DIC: vehicle to your dealer.
SBZA does not operate when the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT FCC Information
SBZA sensors in the left or right SYSTEM OFF: This message See Radio Frequency Statement on
corners of the rear bumper are indicates that the driver has turned page 13‑21 for information
covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, the system off. regarding Part 15 of the Federal
slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For SIDE DETECTION SYS Communications Commission (FCC)
cleaning instructions, see “Washing TEMPORARILY OFF: This rules and Industry Canada
the Vehicle” under Exterior Care on message indicates that the SBZA Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
page 10‑73. If the DIC still displays system is disabled either because
the SIDE DETECTION SYS the sensor cannot detect vehicles in
Rear Vision Vehicles with RVC on the system display is now enabled and
Rearview Mirror the display will appear in the mirror
Camera (RVC) normally.
The vehicle may have an RVC The rear vision camera system is
system. Read this entire section designed to help the driver when Vehicles with RVC on the
before using it. backing up by displaying a view of Infotainment System
the area behind the vehicle. When
the key is in the ON/RUN position The rear vision camera system is
{ WARNING and the driver shifts the vehicle into designed to help the driver when
R (Reverse), the video image backing up by displaying a view of
The RVC system does not display the area behind the vehicle. When
automatically appears on the inside
children, pedestrians, bicyclists, rearview mirror. Once the driver the driver shifts the vehicle into
animals, or any other object shifts out of R (Reverse), the video R (Reverse), the video image
located outside the camera's field image automatically disappears automatically appears on the
of view, below the bumper, from the inside rearview mirror. infotainment screen. Once the driver
or under the vehicle. Perceived shifts out of R (Reverse), the screen
distances may be different from Turning the Rear Vision Camera will go back to the last screen that
actual distances. Do not back the System Off or On had been displayed, after a delay.
vehicle using only the RVC To turn off the rear vision camera Turning the Rear Vision Camera
screen, during longer, higher system, press and hold z , located System On or Off
speed backing maneuvers, on the inside rearview mirror, until To turn the rear vision camera
or where there could be cross the left indicator light turns off. The system on or off:
traffic. Failure to use proper care rear vision camera display is now
before backing may result in disabled. 1. Shift into P (Park).
injury, death, or vehicle damage. 2. Press the Settings menu button
To turn the rear vision camera
Always check behind and around on the Home screen of the
the vehicle before backing. system on again, press and hold z
infotainment system.
until the left indicator light
illuminates. The rear vision camera
3. Select the Rear Camera screen The symbols appear when an object Use caution while backing up when
button. The Rear Camera screen has been detected by the URPA towing a trailer, as the RCTA
displays. system. The symbol may cover the detection zones that extend out
4. Select Rear Camera display and object when viewing the RVC from the back of your vehicle do not
then select ON or OFF. screen. move further back when a trailer is
To turn the symbols on or off: towed.
The display remains on after shifting
out of R (Reverse) for approximately 1. Shift into P (Park). The RCTA system can be disabled
10 seconds. The display can be through the Driver Information
2. Press the Settings menu button Center (DIC). See Driver
canceled during this time by on the Home screen of the
performing one of the following: Information Center (DIC) (Without
infotainment system. DIC Buttons) on page 5‑29 or Driver
. Press a hard key on the 3. Select the Rear Camera screen Information Center (DIC) (With DIC
infotainment system. button. The Rear Camera screen Buttons) on page 5‑24.
. Shift into P (Park). displays. Rear Vision Camera Location
. Reach a vehicle speed of 4. Select Park Assist Symbols and The camera is located above the
8 km/h (5 mph). then select ON or OFF. license plate.
Symbols Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) The area displayed by the camera is
The RVC system may have a On vehicles with RCTA, a red limited and does not display objects
feature that lets the driver view warning triangle with an arrow may that are close to either corner or
symbols on the RVC screen while also display on the RVC screen to under the bumper. The area
using the rear vision camera. The warn of traffic coming from either displayed can vary depending on
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist direction. Three beeps will sound vehicle orientation or road
(URPA) system must not be from the speaker on that side. This conditions. The distance of the
disabled to use the caution symbols. system detects objects coming from image that appears on the screen
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on up to 20 m (65 ft) from the left or differs from the actual distance.
page 9‑31. right side behind the vehicle.
The following illustrations show the 2. Corner of the rear bumper. camera and its position and
field of view that the camera mounting angle checked at your
provides. When the System Does Not dealer.
Seem To Work Properly . There are extreme temperature
The rear vision camera system changes.
might not work properly or display a
clear image if: The rear vision camera system
display in the rearview mirror may
. The RVC is turned off. See turn off or not appear as expected
“Turning the Rear Camera due to one of the following
System On or Off” earlier in this conditions. If this occurs the left
section. indicator light on the mirror will
. It is dark. flash.
. The sun or the beam of . A slow flash may indicate a loss
headlights is shining directly into of video signal, or no video
the camera lens. signal present during the reverse
1. View displayed by the camera. cycle.
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens. . A fast flash may indicate that the
Clean the lens, rinse it with display has been on for the
water, and wipe it with a soft maximum allowable time during
cloth. a reverse cycle, or the display
has reached an Over
. The back of the vehicle is in an Temperature limit.
accident. The position and
mounting angle of the camera The fast flash conditions are
can change or the camera can used to protect the video device
be affected. Be sure to have the from high temperature
1. View displayed by the camera. conditions. Once conditions
return to normal the device will Fuel

reset and the green indicator will
stop flashing. Use of the recommended fuel is an
important part of the proper
During any of these fault conditions,
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
the display will be blank and the
keep the engine clean and maintain
indicator will continue to flash as
optimum vehicle performance, we
long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
recommend the use of gasoline
or until the conditions return to
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
normal.
Gasoline.
Pressing and holding z when the Look for the TOP TIER label on the
left indicator light is flashing will turn fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
off the video display along with the enhanced detergency standards
left indicator light. developed by auto companies. A list Recommended Fuel
of marketers providing TOP TIER Use regular unleaded gasoline with
Detergent Gasoline can be found at a posted octane rating of 87 or
www.toptiergas.com. TOP TIER higher. If the octane rating is less
gasoline is only available in the U.S. than 87, an audible knocking noise,
and Canada. commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Prohibited Fuels methylcyclopentadienyl manganese label. If this fuel is not available in

Gasolines containing oxygenates, tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use states adopting California Emissions
such as ethers and ethanol, as well gasolines with MMT as they can Standards, the vehicle will operate
as reformulated gasolines are reduce spark plug life and affect satisfactorily on fuels meeting
available in some cities. If these emission control system federal specifications, but emission
gasolines comply with the performance. The malfunction control system performance might
previously described specification, indicator lamp may turn on. If this be affected. The malfunction
then they are acceptable to use. occurs, see your dealer for service. indicator lamp could turn on and the
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
other fuels containing more than Gasoline Specifications See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
15% ethanol must be used only in page 5‑17. If this occurs, return to
At a minimum, gasoline should meet your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
flex fuel vehicles. ASTM specification D 4814. Some If it is determined that the condition
gasolines contain an is caused by the type of fuel used,
{ CAUTION octane-enhancing additive called repairs might not be covered by the
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese vehicle warranty.
Do not use fuel containing tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
methanol. It can corrode metal against the use of gasolines
parts in the fuel system and also containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
Fuels in Foreign
damage plastic and rubber parts. on page 9‑40. Countries
That damage would not be If planning to drive in countries
covered under the vehicle California Fuel outside the U.S. or Canada, the
warranty. Requirements proper fuel might be hard to find.
Check regional auto club or fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet retail brand websites for availability
Some gasolines that are not California Emissions Standards, it is
reformulated for low emissions can in the country where driving. Never
designed to operate on fuels that use leaded gasoline, fuel containing
contain an octane-enhancing meet California specifications. See
additive called methanol, or any other fuel not
the underhood emission control recommended. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel marketers providing TOP TIER Notice: This vehicle was not
would not be covered by the vehicle Detergent Gasoline can be found at designed for fuel that contains
warranty. www.toptiergas.com. methanol. Do not use fuel
For customers who do not use TOP containing methanol. It can
Fuel Additives TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, corrode metal parts in the fuel
one bottle of Fuel System Treatment system and also damage plastic
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines and rubber parts. That damage
in the United States are now PLUS, part number 88861013,
added to the fuel tank at every would not be covered under the
required to contain additives that vehicle warranty.
help prevent engine and fuel system engine oil change, can help clean
deposits from forming, allowing the deposits from fuel injectors and Some gasolines that are not
emission control system to work intake valves. GM Fuel System reformulated for low emissions can
properly. In most cases, nothing Treatment PLUS is the only contain an octane-enhancing
should have to be added to the fuel. gasoline additive recommended by additive called
However, some gasolines contain General Motors. It is available at methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
only the minimum amount of your dealer. tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
additive required to meet U.S. Gasolines containing oxygenates, where you buy gasoline whether the
Environmental Protection Agency such as ethers and ethanol, and fuel contains MMT. We recommend
regulations. To help keep fuel reformulated gasolines might be against the use of such gasolines.
injectors and intake valves clean available in your area. We Fuels containing MMT can reduce
and avoid problems due to dirty recommend that you use these spark plug life and affect emission
injectors or valves, look for gasoline gasolines, if they comply with the control system performance. The
that is advertised as TOP TIER specifications described earlier. malfunction indicator lamp might
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the However, E85 (85% ethanol) and turn on. If this occurs, return to your
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to other fuels containing more than dealer for service.
ensure gasoline meets enhanced 15% ethanol must not be used in
detergency standards developed by vehicles that were not designed for
the auto companies. A list of those fuels.
Filling the Tank WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING . Fuel can spray out if the fuel
cap is opened too quickly.
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn This spray can happen if the
violently and can cause injury or tank is nearly full, and is
death. more likely in hot weather.
. To help avoid injuries to you Open the fuel cap slowly and
and others, read and follow wait for any hiss noise to stop
all the instructions on the fuel then unscrew the cap all
pump island. the way
. Turn off the engine when To remove the fuel cap, turn it
refueling. The tethered fuel cap is located
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel
behind a hinged fuel door on the
. Keep sparks, flames, and cap has a spring in it; if the cap is
driver side of the vehicle.
smoking materials away released too soon, it will spring back
from fuel. To open the fuel door, push the to the right.
rearward center edge in and release
. Do not leave the fuel pump While refueling, hang the tethered
and it will open.
unattended. fuel cap from the hook on the
fuel door.
. Do not reenter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
. Keep children away from the few seconds after you have finished
fuel pump and never let pumping before removing the
children pump fuel. nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
(Continued) surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 10‑73.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it tank and emissions system. See
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure Malfunction Indicator Lamp on WARNING (Continued)
the cap is fully installed. The page 5‑17.
diagnostic system can determine if
. Place the nozzle inside the fill
opening of the container
the fuel cap has been left off or Filling a Portable Fuel before dispensing fuel, and
improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the
Container keep it in contact with the fill
atmosphere. See Malfunction opening until filling is
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑17. { WARNING complete.
. Fill the container no more
Filling a portable fuel container
{ WARNING while it is in the vehicle can cause
than 95% full to allow for
expansion.
If a fire starts while you are fuel vapors that can ignite either
by static electricity or other
. Do not smoke, light matches,
refueling, do not remove the or use lighters while
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by means. You or others could be
pumping fuel.
shutting off the pump or by badly burned and the vehicle
could be damaged. Always: . Avoid using cell phones or
notifying the station attendant.
other electronic devices.
Leave the area immediately. . Use approved fuel
containers.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is . Remove the container from
needed, be sure to get the right the vehicle, trunk, or pickup
type of cap from your dealer. The bed before filling.
wrong type of fuel cap might not . Place the container on the
fit properly, might cause the ground.
malfunction indicator lamp to
light, and could damage the fuel (Continued)

. Do not tow a trailer during the
Towing first 800 km (500 mi), to prevent WARNING (Continued)
damage to the engine, axle or
General Towing other parts. . Do not drive with the liftgate,
Information trunk/hatch, or rear-most
. Then, during the first 800 km window open.
Only use towing equipment that has (500 mi) trailer towing, do not
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and . Fully open the air outlets on
been designed for the vehicle.
do not make starts at full throttle. or under the instrument
Contact your dealer or trailering
panel.
dealer for assistance with preparing . The vehicle can tow in D (Drive)
the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read but M (Manual Mode) is . Also adjust the Climate
the entire section before towing a recommended. See Manual Control system to a setting
trailer. Mode on page 9‑23. Use a lower that brings in only outside air.
gear if the transmission shifts See “Climate Control
For towing a disabled vehicle, see
too often. Systems” in the Index.
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑69.
For towing the vehicle behind For more information about
another vehicle such as a motor { WARNING Carbon Monoxide, see Engine
home, see Recreational Vehicle Exhaust on page 9‑20.
Towing on page 10‑70. When towing a trailer, exhaust
gases may collect at the rear of
Towing a trailer requires a certain
Driving Characteristics the vehicle and enter if the
amount of experience. The
liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most
and Towing Tips window is open. combination you are driving is
longer and not as responsive as the
Driving with a Trailer When towing a trailer: vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
When towing a trailer: (Continued) the handling and braking of the rig
before setting out for the open road.
. Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply
specifically to trailer towing.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch This can help to avoid situations When turning with a trailer, make
parts and attachments, safety that require heavy braking and wider turns than normal so the
chains, electrical connectors, lamps, sudden turns. trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
tires and mirrors. If the trailer has curbs, road signs, trees or other
electric brakes, start the Passing objects. Use the turn signal well in
combination moving and then apply More passing distance is needed advance and avoid jerky or sudden
the trailer brake controller by hand when towing a trailer. Because the maneuvers.
to be sure the brakes work. rig is longer, it is necessary to go
farther beyond the passed vehicle Turn Signals When Towing a
During the trip, check occasionally Trailer
to be sure that the load is secure before returning to the lane.
and the lamps and any trailer The turn signal indicators on the
Backing Up instrument cluster flash whenever
brakes still work.
Hold the bottom of the steering signaling a turn or lane change.
Towing with a Stability Control wheel with one hand. To move the Properly hooked up, the trailer
System trailer to the left, move your hand to lamps also flash, telling other
When towing, the sound of the the left. To move the trailer to the drivers the vehicle is turning,
stability control system might be right, move your hand to the right. changing lanes or stopping.
heard. The system is reacting to the Always back up slowly and, When towing a trailer, the arrows on
vehicle movement caused by the if possible, have someone the instrument cluster flash for turns
trailer, which mainly occurs during guide you. even if the bulbs on the trailer are
cornering. This is normal when Making Turns burned out. Check occasionally to
towing heavier trailers. be sure the trailer bulbs are still
Notice: Making very sharp turns working.
Following Distance while trailering could cause the
Stay at least twice as far behind the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle ahead as you would when vehicle. The vehicle could be
driving the vehicle without a trailer. damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
Driving on Grades turning the engine off. If the 3. When the wheel chocks are in
overheat warning comes on, see place, release the brake pedal
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
Engine Overheating on page 10‑16. until the chocks absorb the load.
gear before starting down a long or
steep downgrade. If the Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
transmission is not shifted down, the apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park).
brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no
{ WARNING
5. Release the brake pedal.
longer work well. Parking the vehicle on a hill with
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). the trailer attached can be Leaving After Parking on a Hill
Use a lower gear if the transmission dangerous. If something goes 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
shifts too often. wrong, the rig could start to move. while you:
The Tow/Haul Mode may be used if People can be injured, and both . Start the engine.
the transmission shifts too often. the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
. Shift into a gear.
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑24.
park the rig on a flat surface. . Release the parking brake.
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, engine coolant 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
boils at a lower temperature than at If parking the rig on a hill:
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
normal altitudes. If the engine is 1. Press the brake pedal, but do clear of the chocks.
turned off immediately after towing not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
at high altitude on steep uphill 4. Stop and have someone pick up
the wheels into the curb if facing
grades, the vehicle could show and store the chocks.
downhill or into traffic if facing
signs similar to engine overheating. uphill.
To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level 2. Have someone place chocks
ground, with the transmission in under the trailer wheels.
P (Park) for a few minutes before
Maintenance When Trailer Trailer Towing Maximum trailer weight is calculated

Towing assuming only the driver is in the
Three important considerations tow vehicle and it has all the
The vehicle needs service more have to do with weight: required trailering equipment. The
often when pulling a trailer. See the weight of additional optional
. The weight of the trailer
Maintenance Schedule on equipment, passengers and cargo in
page 11‑2. Things that are . The weight of the trailer tongue the tow vehicle must be subtracted
especially important in trailer . The total weight on the vehicle's from the maximum trailer weight.
operation are automatic tires
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle Use the following chart to determine
lubricant, belts, cooling system and Weight of the Trailer how much the vehicle can weigh,
brake system. Inspect these before based upon the vehicle model and
How heavy can a trailer safely be? options.
and during the trip.
Speed, altitude, road grades,
Check periodically to see that all
outside temperature, special
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
equipment, and the amount of
Engine Cooling When Trailer tongue weight the vehicle can carry
Towing must be considered. See “Weight of
the Trailer Tongue” later in this
The cooling system may temporarily section for more information.
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 10‑16.
Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

Front-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,250 lbs (4 649 kg)
All-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)
All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,450 lbs (4 740 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for trailering weight the vehicle can carry, which
information or advice. will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
Weight of the Trailer Tongue the tongue load must be added to
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is the GVW because the vehicle will
an important weight to measure be carrying that weight, too. See
because it affects the total gross Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9.
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options,
equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
If a weight-carrying hitch or a The only way to be sure it is not

. The rear bumper on the vehicle
weight-distributing hitch is being exceeding any of these ratings is to is not intended for hitches. Do
used, the trailer tongue (1) should weigh the vehicle and trailer. not attach rental hitches or other
weigh 10-15 percent of the total bumper-type hitches to it. Use
loaded trailer weight (2). Total Weight on the Vehicle's only a frame-mounted hitch that
Tires does not attach to the bumper.
After loading the trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue, Inflate the vehicle's tires to the . Will any holes be made in the
separately, to see if the weights are upper limit for cold tires. These body of the vehicle when the
proper. If they are not, adjustments numbers can be found on the trailer hitch is installed? If so,
might be made by moving some Certification label or see Vehicle then be sure to seal the holes
items around in the trailer. Load Limits on page 9‑9 for more when the hitch is removed. If the
information. Do not go over the holes are not sealed, dirt, water,
Trailering may be limited by the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the and deadly carbon monoxide
vehicle's ability to carry tongue GAWR, including the weight of the (CO) from the exhaust may get
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause trailer tongue. If using a weight into the vehicle. See Engine
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR distributing hitch, do not go over the Exhaust on page 9‑20.
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or rear axle limit before applying the
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle weight distribution spring bars.
Weight Rating). The effect of
additional weight may reduce the
trailering capacity more than the
Towing Equipment
total of the additional weight. Hitches
It is important that the vehicle does It is important to have the correct
not exceed any of its ratings — hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum trucks going by, and rough roads
Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. are a few reasons why the right
hitch is needed.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Safety Chains Trailer Wiring Harness

Weight Carrying Hitches
Always attach chains between the Basic Trailer Wiring
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of The trailer wiring harness, with a
the trailer to help prevent the tongue seven-pin connector, is located at
from contacting the road if it the rear of the vehicle and is tied to
becomes separated from the hitch. the vehicle's frame. The harness
Always leave just enough slack so connector can be plugged into a
the rig can turn. Never allow safety seven-pin universal heavy-duty
chains to drag on the ground. trailer connector available through
your dealer.
Trailer Brakes The seven-wire harness contains
A loaded trailer that weighs more the following trailer circuits:
than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
have its own brake system that is
1. Body-to-Ground Distance adequate for the weight of the
. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
2. Front of Vehicle trailer. Be sure to read and follow Signal
the instructions for the trailer brakes . Brown: Taillamps
When using a weight-distributing so they are installed, adjusted, and
hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so maintained properly.
. Black: Ground
that the distance (1) remains the
Because the vehicle has antilock
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps
same both before and after coupling
the trailer to the tow vehicle. brakes, do not try to tap into the . Red/Black: Battery Feed
vehicle's hydraulic brake system. . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
If you do, both brake systems will
not work well, or at all.
*The fuse for this circuit is installed Electric Trailer Brake Control Conversions and
in the underhood electrical center, Wiring Provisions
but the wires are not connected. These wiring provisions for an
Add-Ons
They should be connected by your electric trailer brake controller are
dealer or a qualified service center. included with the vehicle as part of Add-On Electrical
If the back-up lamp circuit is not the trailer wiring package. The Equipment
functional, contact your dealer. instrument panel contains blunt cut
wires above the parking brake Notice: Some electrical
If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is equipment can damage the
being charged, press the Tow/Haul assembly for the electric trailer
brake controller. The harness vehicle or cause components to
mode switch located on the center not work and would not be
console near the climate controls. contains the following wires:
covered by the warranty. Always
This will boost the vehicle system . Red/Black: Power Supply check with your dealer before
voltage and properly charge the . White: Brake Switch Signal adding electrical equipment.
battery. If the trailer is too light for
Tow/Haul mode, turn on the . Gray: Illumination Add-on equipment can drain the
headlamps (non-HID only) as a vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal vehicle is not operating.
second way to boost the vehicle
system and charge the battery.
. Black: Ground The vehicle has an airbag system.
The electric trailer brake controller Before attempting to add anything
should be installed by your dealer or electrical to the vehicle, see
a qualified service center. Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑34 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑35.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Overheated Engine

Protection
Electrical System
High Voltage Devices and
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-18 Electrical System
General Information Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Fuses and Circuit
California Proposition Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Engine Compartment Fuse
California Perchlorate All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-2 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-22 Instrument Panel Fuse
Accessories and Automatic Transmission Shift Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Lock Control Function
Vehicle Checks Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Wheels and Tires
Doing Your Own Ignition Transmission Lock Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Park Brake and P (Park) Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Engine Compartment Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-23 Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Wiper Blade Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-37
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Tire Terminology and
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Headlamp Aiming Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Automatic Transmission
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Bulb Replacement System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-11 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Pressure Monitor
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-16 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-27 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New General Information cause cancer and birth defects or
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 other reproductive harm. Engine
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 For service and parts needs, visit exhaust, many parts and systems,
Different Size Tires and your dealer. You will receive many fluids, and some component
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 genuine GM parts and GM-trained wear by-products contain and/or
Uniform Tire Quality and supported service people. emit these chemicals.
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Genuine GM parts have one of
Wheel Alignment and Tire these marks: California Perchlorate
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54 Materials Requirements
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Certain types of automotive
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 applications, such as airbag
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-65 and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
Jump Starting may contain perchlorate materials.
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Special handling may be necessary.
Towing For additional information, see
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-69 www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
Recreational Vehicle perchlorate.
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Accessories and
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 California Proposition Modifications
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 65 Warning Adding non‐dealer accessories or
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Most motor vehicles, including this making modifications to the vehicle
one, contain and/or emit chemicals can affect vehicle performance and
known to the State of California to safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
Vehicle Care 10-3
handling, emissions systems, Vehicle Checks This vehicle has an airbag system.
aerodynamics, durability, and Before attempting to do your own
electronic systems like antilock service work, see Servicing the
brakes, traction control, and stability Doing Your Own Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
control. These accessories or Service Work page 3‑34.
modifications could even cause Keep a record with all parts receipts
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
{ WARNING and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Damage to vehicle components It can be dangerous to work on Maintenance Records on
resulting from modifications or the your vehicle if you do not have page 11‑14.
installation or use of non‐GM the proper knowledge, service
manual, tools, or parts. Always Notice: Even small amounts of
certified parts, including control contamination can cause damage
module or software modifications, is follow owner manual procedures
to vehicle systems. Do not allow
not covered under the terms of the and consult the service manual
contaminants to contact the
vehicle warranty and may affect for your vehicle before doing any fluids, reservoir caps,
remaining warranty coverage for service work. or dipsticks.
affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to If doing some of your own service
complement and function with other work, use the proper service
systems on the vehicle. See your manual. It tells you much more
dealer to accessorize the vehicle about how to service the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories than this manual can. To order the
installed by a dealer technician. proper service manual, see Service
Also, see Adding Equipment to the Publications Ordering Information
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on on page 13‑17.
page 3‑35.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Hood 2. At the front of the vehicle, pull Before closing the hood, be sure all
up on the center of the hood, filler caps are on properly.
To open the hood: and push the secondary hood Pull the hood down to close. Lower
release to the right. the hood until the lifting pressure of
3. After you have partially lifted the the strut is reduced. Then allow the
hood, gas struts will hood to fall and latch into place
automatically take over to lift and under its own weight. Check to
hold the hood in the fully open make sure the hood is closed. If the
position. hood does not fully latch, gently
push the hood down at the front and
1. Pull the hood release handle center of the hood until it is
with this symbol on it. It is under completely latched.
the instrument panel on the
driver side of the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-5
Engine Compartment Overview

10-6 Vehicle Care
1. Radiator Pressure Cap. See 9. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Engine Cover
Cooling System on page 10‑12. View). See “Checking Engine
2. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. Oil” under Engine Oil on
See Cooling System on page 10‑7.
page 10‑12. 10. Automatic Transmission Fluid
3. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. Dipstick. See “Checking the
See Jump Starting on Fluid Level” under Automatic
page 10‑66. Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑10.
4. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑29. 11. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
5. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. under Brakes on page 10‑20.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑66. 12. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑11. 1. Oil Fill Cap
6. Power Steering Reservoir and
Cap (Under Engine Cover). See 13. Windshield Washer Fluid 2. Engine Cover
Power Steering Fluid on Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on To remove:
page 10‑18.
page 10‑19. 1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).
7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine 2. Raise the engine cover (2) to
Oil on page 10‑7. release it from the retainers.
8. Engine Cover on page 10‑6. 3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall
engine cover.
Vehicle Care 10-7
Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
To ensure proper engine It is a good idea to check the engine
push it back in all the way.
performance and long life, careful oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
Remove it again, keeping the tip
attention must be paid to engine oil. get an accurate reading, the vehicle
down, and check the level.
Following these simple, but must be on level ground. The
important steps will help protect engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. When to Add Engine Oil
your investment: See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑5 for the location of the
. Always use engine oil approved engine oil dipstick.
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See Obtaining an accurate oil level
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” reading is essential:
in this section. 1. If the engine has been running
. Check the engine oil level recently, turn off the engine and
regularly and maintain the allow several minutes for the oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched
proper oil level. See “Checking to drain back into the oil pan. area at the tip of the dipstick, add
Engine Oil” and “When to Add Checking the oil level too soon 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
Engine Oil” in this section. after engine shutoff will not and then recheck the level. See
provide an accurate oil level “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
. Change the engine oil at the reading. this section for an explanation of
appropriate time. See Engine Oil what kind of oil to use. For engine
Life System on page 10‑9.
. Always dispose of engine oil
{ WARNING oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
properly. See “What to Do with The engine oil dipstick handle page 12‑2.
Used Oil” in this section. may be hot; it could burn you. Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Use a towel or glove to touch the Oil levels above or below the
dipstick handle. acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
10-8 Vehicle Care
to the engine. If you find that you Specification Viscosity Grade

have an oil level above the Use and ask for licensed engine oils SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
operating range, i.e., the engine with the dexos1® approved grade for the vehicle. Do not use
has so much oil that the oil level certification mark. Engine oils other viscosity grade oils such as
gets above the cross-hatched meeting the requirements for the SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.
area that shows the proper vehicle should have the dexos1
operating range, the engine could Cold Temperature Operation: In an
approved certification mark. This area of extreme cold, where the
be damaged. You should drain certification mark indicates that the
out the excess oil or limit driving temperature falls below −29°C
oil has been approved to the dexos1 (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
of the vehicle and seek a service specification.
professional to remove the used. An oil of this viscosity grade
excess amount of oil. will provide easier cold starting for
the engine at extremely low
See Engine Compartment Overview temperatures. When selecting an oil
on page 10‑5 for the location of the of the appropriate viscosity grade,
engine oil fill cap. always select an oil of the correct
Add enough oil to put the level specification. See “Specification”
somewhere in the proper operating earlier in this section for more
range. Push the dipstick all the way Notice: Failure to use the information.
back in when through. recommended engine oil or
equivalent can result in engine Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Selecting the Right Engine Oil damage not covered by the Oil Flushes
Selecting the right engine oil vehicle warranty. Check with your Do not add anything to the oil. The
depends on both the proper oil dealer or service provider on recommended oils with the dexos
specification and viscosity grade. whether the oil is approved to the specification and displaying the
See Recommended Fluids and dexos1 specification. dexos certification mark are all that
Lubricants on page 11‑12. is needed for good performance and
engine protection.
Vehicle Care 10-9
Engine oil system flushes are not Engine Oil Life System and, at this time, the system must
recommended and could cause be reset. Your dealer has trained
engine damage not covered by the When to Change Engine Oil service people who will perform this
vehicle warranty. This vehicle has a computer system work and reset the system. It is also
that indicates when to change the important to check the oil regularly
What to Do with Used Oil over the course of an oil drain
engine oil and filter. This is based
Used engine oil contains certain on a combination of factors which interval and keep it at the proper
elements that can be unhealthy for include engine revolutions, engine level.
your skin and could even cause temperature, and miles driven. If the system is ever reset
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on Based on driving conditions, the accidentally, the oil must be
your skin for very long. Clean your mileage at which an oil change is changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
skin and nails with soap and water, indicated can vary considerably. For since the last oil change.
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or the oil life system to work properly, Remember to reset the oil life
properly dispose of clothing or rags the system must be reset every time system whenever the oil is changed.
containing used engine oil. See the the oil is changed.
manufacturer's warnings about the How to Reset the Engine Oil
use and disposal of oil products. When the system has calculated Life System
that oil life has been diminished, it
Used oil can be a threat to the indicates that an oil change is Reset the system whenever the
environment. If you change your necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE engine oil is changed so that the
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil OIL SOON message comes on. system can calculate the next
from the filter before disposal. Never Change the oil as soon as possible engine oil change. To reset the
dispose of oil by putting it in the within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). system:
trash or pouring it on the ground, It is possible that, if driving under If the vehicle does not have Driver
into sewers, or into streams or the best conditions, the oil life Information Center (DIC) buttons:
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking system might indicate that an oil
it to a place that collects used oil. change is not necessary for up to a 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
year. The engine oil and filter must with the engine off. The vehicle
be changed at least once a year must be in P (Park) to access
10-10 Vehicle Care
this display. Press the trip 2. Press the vehicle information Change the fluid at the intervals
odometer reset stem until OIL button until OIL LIFE listed in Maintenance Schedule on
LIFE REMAINING displays. REMAINING displays. page 11‑2, and be sure to use the
2. Press and hold the trip odometer 3. Press and hold the set/reset transmission fluid listed in
reset stem until OIL LIFE button until “100%” is displayed. Recommended Fluids and
REMAINING shows “100%.” Three chimes sound and the Lubricants on page 11‑12.
Three chimes sound and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Notice: Use of the incorrect
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message goes off. automatic transmission fluid may
message goes off. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. damage the vehicle, and the
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. damages may not be covered by
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON the vehicle warranty. Always use
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on when the the automatic transmission fluid
SOON message comes back on vehicle is started, the engine oil life listed in Recommended Fluids
when the vehicle is started, the system has not been reset. Repeat and Lubricants on page 11‑12.
engine oil life system has not the procedure.
been reset. Repeat the The transmission fluid will not reach
the end of the dipstick unless the
procedure. Automatic Transmission transmission is at operating
If the vehicle has Driver Information Fluid temperature. If you need to check
Center (DIC) buttons: the transmission fluid level, please
It is not necessary to check the
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, transmission fluid level. take the vehicle to your dealer.
with the engine off. A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
Vehicle Care 10-11
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect or replace the engine air

cleaner/filter:
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals
and replace it at the first oil change
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mile)
interval. See Maintenance Schedule
on page 11‑2. If driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
1. Clamp
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑5 for the location of the 2. Screws
engine air cleaner/filter. 1. Ventilation Tube 3. Housing Cover
How to Inspect the Engine Air 2. Sensor 4. Filter
Cleaner/Filter 5. Base
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, 1. Remove the engine cover. See
remove the filter from the vehicle Engine Cover on page 10‑6.
and lightly shake the filter (away
from vehicle) to release loose dust 2. Disconnect the cover fitting from
and dirt. If the filter remains covered the ventilation tube (1).
with dirt, a new filter is required. 3. Disconnect the wiring harness
connector from the sensor (2).
4. Loosen the outlet duct clamp (1).
10-12 Vehicle Care
5. Loosen the six housing cover (3) Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
screws (2). off, dirt can easily get into the { WARNING
6. Remove the housing cover (3) engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter An electric engine cooling fan
with outlet duct. under the hood can start up even
in place when you are driving.
7. Remove the filter (4) and any when the engine is not running
loose debris that may be found Cooling System and can cause injury. Keep
in the base (5). hands, clothing, and tools away
The cooling system allows the from any underhood electric fan.
8. Inspect or replace the filter (4). engine to maintain the correct
9. Reverse Steps 2–6 to reinstall working temperature.
the housing cover and reconnect
the electrical connector to the { WARNING
sensor.
Heater and radiator hoses, and
10. Reinstall the engine cover. See other engine parts, can be very
Engine Cover on page 10‑6. hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
{ WARNING Do not run the engine if there is a
Operating the engine with the air leak. If you run the engine, it
cleaner/filter off can cause you or could lose all coolant. That could
others to be burned. The air cause an engine fire, and you
cleaner not only cleans the air; it could be burned. Get any leak
helps to stop flames if the engine fixed before you drive the vehicle.
1. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not 2. Radiator Pressure Cap Notice: Using coolant other than
drive with the air cleaner/filter off. 3. Engine Cooling Fans (Out DEX-COOL® can cause premature
of View) engine, heater core, or radiator
Vehicle Care 10-13
corrosion. In addition, the engine What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
coolant could require changing drinkable water and DEX-COOL
sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
or 24 months, whichever occurs
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
first. Any repairs would not be Adding only plain water or some This mixture:
covered by the vehicle warranty. other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down
Always use DEX-COOL can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside
(silicate-free) coolant in the and other liquids, can boil before temperature.
vehicle. the proper coolant mixture will. . Gives boiling protection up to
The coolant warning system is set 129°C (265°F), engine
Engine Coolant for the proper coolant mixture. temperature.
The cooling system in the vehicle is With plain water or the wrong
filled with DEX-COOL® engine mixture, the engine could get too
. Protects against rust and
coolant. See Maintenance Schedule hot but you would not get the corrosion.
on page 11‑2 and Recommended overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts.
Fluids and Lubricants on could catch fire and you or others . Helps keep the proper engine
page 11‑12. could be burned. Use a 50/ temperature.
The following explains the cooling 50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant. Notice: If improper coolant
system and how to check and add
mixture, inhibitors, or additives
coolant when it is low. If there is a
are used in the vehicle cooling
problem with engine overheating,
system, the engine could
see Engine Overheating on
overheat and be damaged. Too
page 10‑16.
much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack engine cooling
parts. The repairs would not be
covered by the warranty. Use only
the proper mixture of engine
10-14 Vehicle Care
coolant for the cooling system. the cooling system is cool before How to Add Coolant to the
See Recommended Fluids and this is done. See Engine Recovery Tank
Lubricants on page 11‑12. Overheating on page 10‑16.
Never dispose of engine coolant by { WARNING
putting it in the trash, pouring it on
the ground, or into sewers, streams, You can be burned if you spill
or bodies of water. Have the coolant coolant on hot engine parts.
changed by an authorized service Coolant contains ethylene glycol
center, familiar with legal and it will burn if the engine parts
requirements regarding used are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant disposal. This will help The coolant recovery tank cap has coolant on a hot engine.
protect the environment and your this symbol on it.
health. When the engine is cold, the coolant Notice: This vehicle has a
Checking Coolant level should be at or above the specific coolant fill procedure.
FULL COLD line marked on the Failure to follow this procedure
The vehicle must be on a level recovery tank. could cause the engine to
surface when checking the coolant
When the engine is hot, the level overheat and be severely
level.
could be higher than the FULL damaged.
Check to see if coolant is visible in COLD line. If the coolant is below If coolant is needed, add the proper
the coolant recovery tank. If the the FULL COLD line when the DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
coolant inside the coolant recovery engine is hot, there could be a leak coolant recovery tank.
tank is boiling, do not do anything in the cooling system.
else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at If the coolant is low, add the coolant
or above the FULL COLD mark, add or take the vehicle to a dealer for
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable service.
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant recovery tank, but be sure
Vehicle Care 10-15
How to Add Coolant to the

Radiator
{ WARNING
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out 2. Remove the radiator pressure
and burn you badly. Never turn cap when the cooling system,
the cap when the cooling system, including the upper radiator
including the surge tank pressure hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling pressure cap slowly
system and surge tank pressure counterclockwise about one
cap to cool. 1. Detach the fasteners and lift off full turn.
the panel that covers the If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
radiator cap. stop. A hiss means there is still
If coolant is needed, add the proper
mixture directly to the radiator, but some pressure left in the
be sure the cooling system is cool system.
before this is done. 3. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly and remove it.
4. Fill the radiator to the base of
the filler neck with the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture.
10-16 Vehicle Care
coolant mixture through the filler The vehicle may also display an
neck until the level is back up to ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
the base of the filler neck. ENGINE and ENGINE
9. Replace the pressure cap tightly. OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
At any time during this message in the Driver Information
procedure if coolant begins to Center (DIC). See Engine Cooling
flow out of the filler neck, System Messages on page 5‑33.
reinstall the pressure cap. You may decide not to lift the hood
Notice: If the pressure cap is not when this warning appears, but
tightly installed, coolant loss and instead get service help right away.
possible engine damage may See Roadside Assistance Program
occur. Be sure the cap is properly (Mexico) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
5. Fill the coolant recovery tank to and tightly secured. Assistance Program (U.S. and
the FULL COLD mark. Canada) on page 13‑11.
6. Reinstall the cap on the coolant Engine Overheating If you do decide to lift the hood,
recovery tank but leave the make sure the vehicle is parked on
The vehicle has several indicators a level surface.
radiator pressure cap off.
to warn of engine overheating.
7. Start the engine and let it run Then check to see if the engine
There is an engine coolant cooling fans are running. If the
until the upper radiator hose
temperature gauge on the engine is overheating, both fans
feels warm. Any time during this
instrument panel cluster. See should be running. If they are not,
procedure, watch out for the
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge do not continue to run the engine
engine cooling fans.
on page 5‑13. and have the vehicle serviced.
8. If the coolant level inside the
radiator filler neck is low, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL
Vehicle Care 10-17
Notice: Running the engine

. Idles for long periods in traffic.
without coolant may cause WARNING (Continued) . Tows a trailer.
damage or a fire. Vehicle damage
would not be covered by the If you keep driving when the If the overheat warning is displayed
warranty. See Overheated Engine vehicles engine is overheated, with no sign of steam:
Protection Operating Mode on the liquids in it can catch fire. You 1. Turn the air conditioning off.
page 10‑18 for information on or others could be badly burned.
Stop the engine if it overheats, 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
driving to a safe place in an
and get out of the vehicle until the temperature and to the highest
emergency.
engine is cool. fan speed. Open the windows as
If Steam Is Coming from the necessary.
Engine Compartment See Overheated Engine
3. If in a traffic jam, shift to
Protection Operating Mode on
N (Neutral); otherwise, shift to
page 10‑18 for information on
{ WARNING driving to a safe place in an
the highest gear while
driving — D (Drive) or L (Low).
Steam from an overheated engine emergency.
If the temperature overheat gauge is
can burn you badly, even if you no longer in the overheat zone or an
just open the hood. Stay away If No Steam Is Coming from overheat warning no longer
from the engine if you see or hear the Engine Compartment displays, the vehicle can be driven.
steam coming from it. Turn it off Continue to drive the vehicle slow
and get everyone away from the If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle until it cools down. Wait vehicle distance from the car in front
or heard, the problem may not be
until there is no sign of steam or of you. If the warning does not come
too serious. Sometimes the engine
coolant before you open can get a little too hot when the back on, continue to drive normally.
the hood. vehicle: If the warning continues, pull over,
(Continued) stop, and park the vehicle
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
right away.
. Stops after high-speed driving.
10-18 Vehicle Care
If there is no sign of steam, idle the Notice: After driving in the When to Check Power Steering
engine for three minutes while overheated engine protection Fluid
parked. If the warning is still operating mode, to avoid engine
displayed, turn off the engine until it damage, allow the engine to cool It is not necessary to regularly
cools down. Also, see “Overheated before attempting any repair. The check power steering fluid unless
Engine Protection Operating Mode” engine oil will be severely you suspect there is a leak in the
next in this section. degraded. Repair the cause of system or you hear an unusual
coolant loss, change the oil and noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
Overheated Engine reset the oil life system. See
system inspected and repaired.
Engine Oil on page 10‑7.
Protection
How to Check Power Steering
Operating Mode Power Steering Fluid Fluid
This emergency operating mode lets
To check the power steering fluid:
the vehicle be driven to a safe place
in an emergency situation. If an 1. Turn the key off and let the
overheated engine condition exists, engine compartment cool down.
an overheat protection mode which 2. Remove the engine cover. See
alternates firing groups of cylinders Engine Cover on page 10‑6.
helps prevent engine damage. In
this mode, there is a significant loss 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the
The power steering fluid reservoir is
in power and engine performance. reservoir clean.
located under the engine cover on
The temperature gauge indicates an the passenger side of the vehicle. 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
overheat condition exists. Driving See Engine Compartment Overview dipstick with a clean rag.
extended distances and/or towing a on page 10‑5 for reservoir location.
trailer in the overheat protection 5. Replace the cap and completely
mode should be avoided. tighten it.
6. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
Vehicle Care 10-19
The fluid level should be may fall below freezing, use a fluid Notice
somewhere between the MAX and that has sufficient protection against . When using concentrated
MIN line on the dipstick in room freezing. washer fluid, follow the
temperature. If the fluid is on or manufacturer instructions for
below the MIN line, add fluid close Adding Washer Fluid
adding water.
to the MAX Line. When the windshield washer fluid
reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID
. Do not mix water with
What to Use LOW ADD FLUID message will be ready-to-use washer fluid.
To determine what kind of fluid to displayed on the Driver Information Water can cause the solution
use, see Recommended Fluids and Center (DIC). See Washer Fluid to freeze and damage the
Lubricants on page 11‑12. Always Messages on page 5‑41 for more washer fluid tank and other
use the proper fluid. information. parts of the washer system.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid
. Fill the washer fluid tank only
may damage the vehicle and the three-quarters full when it is
damages may not be covered by very cold. This allows for
the vehicle's warranty. Always fluid expansion if freezing
use the correct fluid listed in occurs, which could damage
Recommended Fluids and the tank if it is
Lubricants on page 11‑12. completely full.
Open the cap with the washer . Do not use engine coolant
Washer Fluid symbol on it. Add washer fluid until (antifreeze) in the windshield
the tank is full. See Engine washer. It can damage the
What to Use Compartment Overview on windshield washer system
When adding windshield washer page 10‑5 for reservoir location. and paint.
fluid, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
use. If the vehicle will be operating
in an area where the temperature
10-20 Vehicle Care
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Replacing Brake System Parts

can cause a brake squeal when the
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc The braking system on a vehicle is
brakes are first applied or lightly
brake pads have built-in wear complex. Its many parts have to be
applied. This does not mean
indicators that make a high-pitched of top quality and work well together
something is wrong with the brakes.
warning sound when the brake pads if the vehicle is to have really good
are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are braking. The vehicle was designed
The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake and tested with top-quality brake
heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, parts. When parts of the braking
moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and system are replaced, be sure to get
brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the new, approved replacement parts.
proper sequence to torque If this is not done, the brakes might
specifications in Capacities and not work properly. For example,
{ WARNING Specifications on page 12‑2. installing disc brake pads that are
The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be wrong for the vehicle, can change
means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. the balance between the front and
not work well. That could lead to rear brakes — for the worse. The
a crash. When the brake wear
Brake Pedal Travel braking performance expected can
See your dealer if the brake pedal change in many other ways if the
warning sound is heard, have the
does not return to normal height, wrong replacement brake parts are
vehicle serviced. installed.
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
Notice: Continuing to drive with that brake service might be
worn-out brake pads could result required.
in costly brake repair.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
Vehicle Care 10-21
Brake Fluid hydraulic system fixed, since a What to Add

leak means that sooner or later Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
the brakes will not work well. from a sealed container. See
Do not top off the brake fluid. Recommended Fluids and
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. Lubricants on page 11‑12.
If fluid is added when the linings are Always clean the brake fluid
worn, there will be too much fluid reservoir cap and the area around
when new brake linings are the cap before removing it. This
The brake master cylinder reservoir installed. Add or remove brake fluid, helps keep dirt from entering the
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as as necessary, only when work is reservoir.
indicated on the reservoir cap. See done on the brake hydraulic system.
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑5 for the location of the { WARNING { WARNING
reservoir. With the wrong kind of fluid in the
If too much brake fluid is added, it
There are only two reasons why the brake hydraulic system, the
can spill on the engine and burn,
brake fluid level in the reservoir brakes might not work well. This
if the engine is hot enough. You
might go down: could cause a crash. Always use
or others could be burned, and
. The brake fluid level goes down the proper brake fluid.
the vehicle could be damaged.
because of normal brake lining Add brake fluid only when work is
wear. When new linings are done on the brake hydraulic Notice
installed, the fluid level goes system.
back up.
. Using the wrong fluid can
badly damage brake
. A fluid leak in the brake When the brake fluid falls to a low hydraulic system parts. For
hydraulic system can also cause level, the brake warning light comes example, just a few drops of
a low fluid level. Have the brake on. See Brake System Warning mineral-based oil, such as
Light on page 5‑19. engine oil, in the brake
10-22 Vehicle Care
hydraulic system can Vehicle Storage All-Wheel Drive

damage brake hydraulic
Transfer case fluid does not require
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
{ WARNING checking unless there is a fluid leak
Do not let someone put in or unusual noise. If required, have
Batteries have acid that can burn
the wrong kind of fluid. the transfer case serviced by your
you and gas that can explode.
dealer.
. If brake fluid is spilled on the You can be badly hurt if you are
vehicle's painted surfaces, not careful. See Jump Starting on
the paint finish can be page 10‑66 for tips on working
Starter Switch Check
damaged. Be careful not to around a battery without
spill brake fluid on the getting hurt. { WARNING
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. When you are doing this
Infrequent Usage: Remove the inspection, the vehicle could
black, negative (−) cable from the move suddenly. If the vehicle
Battery battery to keep the battery from moves, you or others could be
Refer to the replacement number on running down. injured.
the original battery label when a Extended Storage: Remove the
new battery is needed. black, negative (−) cable from the 1. Before starting this check, be
battery or use a battery trickle sure there is enough room
{ WARNING charger. around the vehicle.
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Care 10-23
2. Firmly apply both the parking 1. Before starting this check, be

. The ignition should turn to
brake and the regular brake. sure there is enough room LOCK/OFF only when the shift
See Parking Brake on around the vehicle. It should be lever is in P (Park).
page 9‑26. parked on a level surface. . The ignition key should come
Do not use the accelerator 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. out only in LOCK/OFF.
pedal, and be ready to turn off See Parking Brake on Contact your dealer if service is
the engine immediately if it page 9‑26. required.
starts. Be ready to apply the regular
3. Try to start the engine in each brake immediately if the vehicle Park Brake and P (Park)
gear. The vehicle should start begins to move. Mechanism Check
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). 3. With the engine off, turn the
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer for
ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
{ WARNING
service. regular brake, try to move the When you are doing this check,
shift lever out of P (Park) with the vehicle could begin to move.
Automatic Transmission normal effort. If the shift lever You or others could be injured
Shift Lock Control moves out of P (Park), contact and property could be damaged.
Function Check your dealer for service. Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
Ignition Transmission
{ WARNING Lock Check
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
When you are doing this begin to move.
While parked, and with the parking
inspection, the vehicle could brake set, try to turn the ignition to
move suddenly. If the vehicle LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
moves, you or others could be position.
injured.
10-24 Vehicle Care
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Wiper Blade Replacement 2. Squeeze the tabs on each side
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping of the wiper blade assembly and
your foot on the regular brake, set Front Wiper Blade slide the assembly off the end of
the parking brake. Windshield wiper blades should be the wiper arm.
. To check the parking brake's inspected for wear or cracking. See
holding ability: With the engine Maintenance Schedule on
running and the transmission in page 11‑2.
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot Replacement blades come in
pressure from the regular brake different types and are removed in
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is different ways. For the proper type
held by the parking brake only. and size, see Maintenance
. To check the P (Park) Replacement Parts on page 11‑13. 3. Install the new blade onto the
mechanism's holding ability: arm connector and make sure
To replace the wiper blade the tabs are fully set in the
With the engine running, shift to assembly:
P (Park). Then release the locked position.
parking brake followed by the 1. Pull the windshield wiper Allowing the wiper blade arm to
regular brake. assembly away from the touch the windshield when no
windshield. wiper blade is installed could
Contact your dealer if service is
required. damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do
not allow the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield.
4. Repeat the steps for the other
blade.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Rear Wiper Blade Headlamp Aiming

To replace the rear wiper blade: Headlamp aim has been preset and
1. Pull the wiper blade assembly should need no further adjustment.
away from the backglass. If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,
The rear wiper blade will not lock the headlamp aim may be affected.
in a vertical position so care If adjustment to the headlamps is
should be used when pulling it necessary, see your dealer.
away from the vehicle.
2. Push the release lever (2) to
disengage the hook and push
the wiper arm (1) out of the
blade assembly (3).
3. Push the new blade assembly
securely in the wiper arm hook
until the release lever clicks into
place.
4. Return the wiper arm and blade
assembly to the rest position on
the glass.
10-26 Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement To replace one of these bulbs: 6. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull it
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
For the proper type of replacement straight out to remove it from the
on page 2‑9.
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on taillamp assembly.
page 10‑27. 2. Remove the convenience net,
if the vehicle has one. 7. Pull the old bulb straight out of
For any bulb‐changing procedure the bulb socket.
not listed in this section, contact
8. Push the new bulb straight into
your dealer.
the bulb socket.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, 9. Push the taillamp assembly back
into its original location.
and Stoplamps
When reinstalling the taillamp
assembly, make sure the pin on
the taillamp assembly lines up
and is inserted correctly into the
opening of the vehicle.
10. Reinstall the two screws that
hold the taillamp assembly in
3. Remove the two taillamp screw place.
covers. 11. Reinstall the two taillamp screw
4. Remove the two screws holding covers.
the taillamp assembly in place.
5. Pull out the taillamp assembly.
1. Turn Signal Lamp
2. Stoplamp/Taillamp
Vehicle Care 10-27
License Plate Lamp 8. Push on the lamp side opposite

the clip until the lamp assembly
To replace one of these bulbs: snaps into place.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
on page 2‑9. Replacement Bulbs
Bulb
Exterior Lamp
Number
License Plate Lamp 194 LL
Rear Turn 7443 NA
Signal Lamp
Taillamp/Stop Lamp 7444 LL
4. Turn the bulb socket (1)
counterclockwise to remove it
For replacement bulbs not listed
from the lamp assembly (3).
here, contact your dealer.
5. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of
the bulb socket.
2. Push the left end of the lamp 6. Push the replacement bulb
assembly toward the right. straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
3. Turn the lamp assembly down to install it into the lamp assembly.
remove it from the liftgate.
7. Turn the lamp assembly into the
liftgate engaging the clip side
first.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Electrical System Headlamp Wiring

Overload An electrical overload may cause
High Voltage Devices and The vehicle has fuses and circuit
the lamps to go on and off, or in
Wiring some cases to remain off. Have the
breakers to protect against an
headlamp wiring checked right away
electrical system overload.
if the lamps go on and off or
{ WARNING When the current electrical load is remain off.
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
Exposure to high voltage can and closes, protecting the circuit Windshield Wipers
cause shock, burns, and even until the current load returns to If the wiper motor overheats due to
death. The high voltage normal or the problem is fixed. This heavy snow or ice, the windshield
components in the vehicle can greatly reduces the chance of circuit wipers will stop until the motor cools
only be serviced by technicians overload and fire caused by and will then restart.
with special training. electrical problems.
Although the circuit is protected
High voltage components are Fuses and circuit breakers protect from electrical overload, overload
identified by labels. Do not power devices in the vehicle. due to heavy snow or ice may
remove, open, take apart, Replace a bad fuse with a new one cause wiper linkage damage.
or modify these components. of the identical size and rating. Always clear ice and heavy snow
High voltage cable or wiring has from the windshield before using the
orange covering. Do not probe, If there is a problem on the road and windshield wipers.
tamper with, cut, or modify high a fuse needs to be replaced, the
same amperage fuse can be If the overload is caused by an
voltage cable or wiring. electrical problem and not snow or
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use ice, be sure to get it fixed.
and replace it as soon as possible.
Vehicle Care 10-29
Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment Notice: Spilling liquid on any

electrical component on the
Breakers Fuse Block vehicle may damage it. Always
The wiring circuits in your vehicle The underhood fuse block is in the keep the covers on any electrical
are protected from short circuits by engine compartment, on the component.
a combination of fuses, circuit passenger side of the vehicle. To remove fuses, hold the end of
breakers and fusible thermal links. the fuse between your thumb and
This greatly reduces the chance of index finger and pull straight out.
fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
you can.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/
relay block.
10-30 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
A/C CLTCH Air Conditioning
Clutch
ABS MTR Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
Motor
AIRBAG Airbag System
AUX POWER Auxiliary Power
AUX Auxiliary
VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump
AWD All-Wheel-Drive
System
BATT 1 Battery 1
BATT 2 Battery 2
BATT 3 Battery 3
CIGAR Cigarette Lighter
LIGHTER
ECM 1 Engine Control
Module 1
EMISSION 1 Emission 1
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features EMISSION 2 Emission 2
shown.
Vehicle Care 10-31
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils LT TRLR Trailer Left RT TRLR Trailer Right
STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn
FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1
Signal Signal
FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2
ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils RVC SNSR Regulated Voltage
FSCM Fuel System Control Sensor
PCM IGN Powertrain Control
Control Module
Module Ignition S/ROOF/ Sunroof
HORN Horn SUNSHADE
PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate
HTD MIR Heated Outside SERVICE Service Repair
PWR Power Outlet
Rearview Mirror
OUTLET SPARE Spare
HTD Heated Steering
RR APO Rear Accessory STOP Stoplamps
STR WHL Wheel
Power Outlet LAMPS
HUMIDITY/ Humidity Sensor/
RR DEFOG Rear Defogger STRTR Starter
MAF MAF Sensor
RR HVAC Rear Climate TCM Transmission
HVAC BLWR Heating,
Control System Control Module
Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam TRANS Transmission
Blower Headlamp
TRLR Trailer Back-up
LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam BCK/UP Lamps
Headlamp Headlamp
TRLR BRK Trailer Brake
LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam RT PRK Right
TRLR Trailer Parking
Headlamp Parking Lamp
PRK LAMP Lamps
LT PRK Left Parking Lamp
TRLR PWR Trailer Power
10-32 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Relays Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

WPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/ LT TRLR Trailer Left Block
Washer STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn
Signal Lamp
Relays Usage PRK LAMP Parking Lamp
A/C Air Conditioning PWR/TRN Powertrain
CMPRSR Compressor Clutch
CLTCH RR DEFOG Rear Window
Defogger
AUX Auxiliary
VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam
Headlamp
CRNK Switched Power
RT TRLR Trailer Right
FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn
FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Signal Lamp
The instrument panel fuse block is
FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3 STOP LAMP Stop Lamps under the instrument panel on the
HI BEAM High-Beam TRLR Trailer Back-up passenger side of the vehicle. Pull
Headlamps BCK/UP Lamps down on the cover to access the
fuse block.
HID/ High Intensity WPR Windshield Wiper
LO BEAM Discharge (HID) WPR HI Windshield Wiper
Low-Beam High Speed
Headlamps
HORN Horn
IGN Ignition Main
Vehicle Care 10-33
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

# GMC NON HID = DRL/ Daytime Running
Lo Beam LO BEAM Lamps Relay/Low
Beam Headlamps
) GMC NON HID =
Relay
High Shutter
DSPLY Display
)) Chevy = Fog
Lamps EMPTY Empty
))) Buick China = FRT WSW Front Windshield
Rear Fog Lamp Washer
AIRBAG Airbag HTD/ Heated/Cooling
COOL SEAT Seats
AMP Amplifier
HVAC Heating,
BCK Back-up Lamp/
Ventilation, and Air
UP/STOP Stoplamp
Conditioning
BCM Body Control
INADV PWR Inadvertent Power/
Module
INT LAMPS Interior Light Pipe
CNSTR Canister Vent Lamps
VENT
INFOTMNT/ Infotainment/
CTSY Courtesy Lamps MSM Memory Seat
Module
DR LCK Door Locks
Fuse Side
LT TRN SIG Driver Side Turn
The vehicle may not be equipped Signal
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Relays Usage

PDM Power Mirrors, LT/ Driver Side Power
Liftgate Release PWR/SEAT Seat Relay
PWR MODE Power Mode RT/ Passenger Side
PWR/SEAT Power Seat Relay
PWR MIR Power Mirrors
PWR/WNDW Power Windows
RDO Radio
Relay
REAR WPR Rear Wiper
PWR/ Power Steering
RPA/ Rear Park Assist/ COLUMN Column Relay
SBZA/UGDO Side Blind Zone
L/GATE Liftgate Relay
Alert/Universal
Garage Door LCK Power Lock Relay
Opener
REAR/WSW Rear Window
RT TRN SIG Passenger Side Washer Relay
Turn Signal
UNLCK Power Unlock
STR WHL Steering Wheel Relay
ILLUM Illumination
DRL/ Daytime Running
LO BEAM Lamps Relay/Low
Beam Headlamps
Relay
Relay Side LT/UNLCK Driver Side Unlock
Relay
Vehicle Care 10-35
Relays Usage Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued)

DRL/ Daytime Running
LO BEAM Lamps Relay (If Tires and a serious crash. See
Equipped) Every new GM vehicle has Vehicle Load Limits on
high-quality tires made by a page 9‑9.
FOG LAMPS Fog Lamps Relay
(Chevy) leading tire manufacturer. See . Underinflated tires pose
FRT/WSW Front Windshield the warranty manual for the same danger as
Washer Relay information regarding the tire overloaded tires. The
warranty and where to get resulting crash could
service. For additional cause serious injury.
information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently
manufacturer. to maintain the
recommended pressure.
{ WARNING Tire pressure should be
checked when the tires
. Poorly maintained and are cold.
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
. Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
. Overloading the tires can or broken by a sudden
cause overheating as a impact — such as when
result of too much flexing. hitting a pothole. Keep
There could be a blowout tires at the recommended
(Continued) pressure.
(Continued)
10-36 Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
All-Season Tires Winter Tires
This vehicle may come with This vehicle was not, originally,
. Worn or old tires can all-season tires. These tires are equipped with winter tires. Winter
cause a crash. If the tread designed to provide good overall tires are designed for increased
is badly worn, performance on most road surfaces traction on snow and ice-covered
replace them. and weather conditions. Original roads. Consider installing winter
equipment tires designed to GM's tires on the vehicle if frequent
. Replace any tires that specific tire performance criteria driving on snow or ice-covered
have been damaged by have a TPC specification code roads is expected. See your dealer
impacts with potholes, molded onto the sidewall. Original for details regarding winter tire
curbs, etc. equipment all-season tires can be availability and proper tire selection.
identified by the last two characters Also, see Buying New Tires on
. Improperly repaired tires of this TPC code, which will page 10‑50.
can cause a crash. Only be “MS.”
the dealer or an With winter tires, there may be
Consider installing winter tires on decreased dry road traction,
authorized tire service the vehicle if frequent driving on increased road noise, and shorter
center should repair, snow or ice-covered roads is tread life. After changing to winter
replace, dismount, and expected. All-season tires provide tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
mount the tires. adequate performance for most handling and braking.
. Do not spin the tires in winter driving conditions, but they If using winter tires:
may not offer the same level of
excess of 56 km/h . Use tires of the same brand and
traction or performance as winter
(35 mph) on slippery tires on snow or ice-covered roads. tread type on all four wheel
surfaces such as snow, See Winter Tires on page 10‑36. positions.
mud, ice, etc. Excessive
spinning may cause the
tires to explode.
Vehicle Care 10-37

. Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
speed rating as the original Useful information about a tire is section.
equipment tires. molded into its sidewall. The
Winter tires with the same speed examples show a typical (2) TPC Spec (Tire
rating as the original equipment tires passenger vehicle tire and a Performance Criteria
may not be available for H, V, W, Y, compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter equipment tires designed to
tires with a lower speed rating are GM's specific tire performance
chosen, never exceed the tire's criteria have a TPC specification
maximum speed capability. code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
Summer Tires exceed all federal safety
This vehicle may come with high guidelines.
performance summer tires. These (3) DOT (Department of
tires have a special tread and
Transportation): The
compound that are optimized for
maximum dry and wet road Department of Transportation
performance. This special tread and (DOT) code indicates that the
compound will decrease Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example tire is in compliance with the
performance in cold climates, and U.S. Department of
on ice and snow. We recommend (1) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle
installing winter tires on the vehicle combination of letters and Safety Standards.
if frequent driving in cold numbers used to define a
temperatures or on snow or ice particular tire's width, height, DOT Tire Date of
covered roads is expected. See aspect ratio, construction type, Manufacture: The last four
Winter Tires on page 10‑36. digits of the TIN indicate the tire
manufactured date. The first two
10-38 Vehicle Care
digits represent the week (01– performance factors: treadwear, (2) Temporary Use Only: The
52) and the last two digits, the traction, and temperature compact spare tire or temporary
year. For example, the third resistance. For more information use tire should not be driven at
week of the year 2010 would see Uniform Tire Quality speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).
have a four-digit DOT date Grading on page 10‑52. The compact spare tire is for
of 0310. (7) Maximum Cold Inflation emergency use when a regular
(4) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load that road tire has lost air and gone
(TIN): The letters and numbers can be carried and the flat. If the vehicle has a compact
following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to spare tire, see Compact Spare
of Transportation) code are the support that load. Tire on page 10‑65 and If a Tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN). Goes Flat on page 10‑55.
The TIN shows the (3) Tire Identification Number
manufacturer and plant code, (TIN): The letters and numbers
tire size, and date the tire was following the DOT (Department
manufactured. The TIN is of Transportation) code are the
molded onto both sides of the Tire Identification Number (TIN).
tire, although only one side may The TIN shows the
have the date of manufacture. manufacturer and plant code,
(5) Tire Ply Material : The type tire size, and date the tire was
of cord and number of plies in manufactured. The TIN is
the sidewall and under the tread. molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
(6) Uniform Tire Quality Compact Spare Tire Example
have the date of manufacture.
Grading (UTQG): Tire (1) Tire Ply Material : The type
manufacturers are required to of cord and number of plies in
grade tires based on three the sidewall and under the tread.
Vehicle Care 10-39
(4) Maximum Cold Inflation criteria have a TPC specification vehicle tire engineered to
Load Limit: Maximum load that code molded onto the sidewall. standards set by the U.S. Tire
can be carried and the GM's TPC specifications meet or and Rim Association.
maximum pressure needed to exceed all federal safety (2) Tire Width: The three-digit
support that load. guidelines. number indicates the tire section
(5) Tire Inflation: The width in millimeters from
temporary use tire or compact Tire Designations sidewall to sidewall.
spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
420 kPa (60 psi). For more number that indicates the tire
The following is an example of a
information on tire pressure and height-to-width measurements.
typical passenger vehicle
inflation see Tire Pressure on For example, if the tire size
tire size.
page 10‑42. aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
(6) Tire Size: A combination of item 3 of the illustration, it would
letters and numbers define a mean that the tire's sidewall is
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, 60 percent as high as it is wide.
construction type, and service (4) Construction Code: A letter
description. The letter T as the code is used to indicate the type
first character in the tire size of ply construction in the tire.
means the tire is for temporary (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a The letter R means radial ply
use only. construction; the letter D means
metric tire sizing system. The
(7) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in diagonal or bias ply
Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger construction; and the letter B
Specification): Original means belted-bias ply
equipment tires designed to construction.
GM's specific tire performance
10-40 Vehicle Care
(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of steering, power brakes, power before a tire has built up heat
the wheel in inches. windows, power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure
(6) Service Description: These conditioning. on page 10‑42.
characters represent the load Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a
index and speed rating of the of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and
tire. The load index represents Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the
the load carrying capacity a tire cords between the plies and the maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
is certified to carry. The speed tread. Cords may be made from and coolant, but without
rating is the maximum speed a steel or other reinforcing passengers and cargo.
tire is certified to carry a load. materials. DOT Markings: A code molded
Bead: The tire bead contains into the sidewall of a tire
Tire Terminology and signifying that the tire is in
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto compliance with the U.S.
Air Pressure: The amount of the rim. Department of Transportation
air inside the tire pressing (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
outward on each square inch of Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code
the tire. Air pressure is in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
or psi (pounds per square inch). 90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
the tread. identify the tire manufacturer,
Accessory Weight: The production plant, brand, and
combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire, date of production.
accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
automatic transmission, power or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑9.
Vehicle Care 10-41
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: outward when mounted on a
Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to vehicle. The side of the tire that
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9. which a cold tire can be inflated. contains a whitewall, bears
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight The maximum air pressure is white lettering, or bears
Rating for the rear axle. See molded onto the sidewall. manufacturer, brand, and/or
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9. Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is
load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same
Intended Outboard Sidewall : moldings on the other sidewall
The side of an asymmetrical tire, maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire. of the tire.
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric some light duty trucks and
unit for air pressure. weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A production options weight. Recommended Inflation
tire used on light duty trucks and Pressure: Vehicle
some multipurpose passenger Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended
vehicles. tire inflation pressure as shown
is designed to seat multiplied by
Load Index: An assigned 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load on the tire placard. See Tire
number ranging from 1 to 279 Limits on page 9‑9. Pressure on page 10‑42 and
that corresponds to the load Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9.
carrying capacity of a tire. Occupant Distribution :
Designated seating positions. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
Outward Facing Sidewall: The extend to the beads are laid at
side of an asymmetrical tire that 90 degrees to the centerline of
has a particular side that faces the tread.
10-42 Vehicle Care
Rim: A metal support for a tire UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle Placard: A label
and upon which the tire beads Grading Standards): A tire permanently attached to a
are seated. information system that provides vehicle showing the vehicle
Sidewall: The portion of a tire consumers with ratings for a capacity weight and the original
between the tread and the bead. tire's traction, temperature, and equipment tire size and
treadwear. Ratings are recommended inflation pressure.
Speed Rating: An determined by tire See “Tire and Loading
alphanumeric code assigned to manufacturers using Information Label” under Vehicle
a tire indicating the maximum government testing procedures. Load Limits on page 9‑9.
speed at which a tire can The ratings are molded into the
operate. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Pressure
Traction: The friction between Tire Quality Grading on Tires need the correct amount of
the tire and the road surface. page 10‑52. air pressure to operate
The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The effectively.
Tread: The portion of a tire that number of designated seating Notice: Neither tire
comes into contact with positions multiplied by underinflation nor
the road. 68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated overinflation is good.
cargo load. See Vehicle Load Underinflated tires, or tires
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Limits on page 9‑9.
bands, sometimes called wear that do not have enough air,
bars, that show across the tread Vehicle Maximum Load on the can result in:
of a tire when only 1.6 mm Tire: Load on an individual tire . Tire overloading and
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See due to curb weight, accessory overheating which could
When It Is Time for New Tires weight, occupant weight, and lead to a blowout.
on page 10‑49. cargo weight.
Vehicle Care 10-43

. Premature or How the vehicle is loaded Remove the valve cap from the
irregular wear. affects vehicle handling and ride tire valve stem. Press the tire
. Poor handling. comfort. Never load the vehicle gauge firmly onto the valve to
with more weight than it was get a pressure measurement.
. Reduced fuel economy. designed to carry. If the cold tire inflation pressure
Overinflated tires, or tires that matches the recommended
When to Check
have too much air, can pressure on the Tire and
result in: Check the tires once a month or Loading Information label, no
more. Do not forget the compact further adjustment is necessary.
. Unusual wear.
spare, if the vehicle has one. If the inflation pressure is low,
. Poor handling. The cold compact spare tire add air until the recommended
. Rough ride. pressure should be at 420 kPa pressure is reached. If the
(60 psi). See Compact Spare inflation pressure is high, press
. Needless damage from Tire on page 10‑65. on the metal stem in the center
road hazards. of the tire valve to release air.
How to Check
The Tire and Loading Recheck the tire pressure with
Information label on the vehicle Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure. the tire gauge.
indicates the original equipment
tires and the correct cold tire Proper tire inflation cannot be Return the valve caps on the
inflation pressures. The determined by looking at the tire. valve stems to prevent leaks
recommended pressure is the Check the tire inflation pressure and keep out dirt and moisture.
minimum air pressure needed to when the tires are cold, meaning
support the vehicle's maximum the vehicle has not been driven
load carrying capacity. See for at least three hours or no
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑9. more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
10-44 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is
of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure
System under-inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
The Tire Pressure Monitor System Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then
technology to check tire pressure should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated.
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
the air pressure in your tires and to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start-ups as
transmit tire pressure readings to a significantly under-inflated tire long as the malfunction exists.
receiver located in the vehicle. causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is
Each tire, including the spare (if lead to tire failure. Under-inflation illuminated, the system may not be
provided), should be checked also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire
monthly when cold and inflated to tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS
the inflation pressure recommended vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
by the vehicle manufacturer on the ability. of reasons, including the installation
vehicle placard or tire inflation Please note that the TPMS is not a of replacement or alternate tires or
pressure label. (If your vehicle has substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
tires of a different size than the size maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
indicated on the vehicle placard or responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction
tire inflation pressure label, you pressure, even if under-inflation has telltale after replacing one or more
should determine the proper tire not reached the level to trigger tires or wheels on your vehicle to
inflation pressure for those tires.) illumination of the TPMS low tire ensure that the replacement or
pressure telltale. alternate tires and wheels allow the
As an added safety feature, your
TPMS to continue to function
vehicle has been equipped with a Your vehicle has also been properly.
tire pressure monitoring system equipped with a TPMS malfunction
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire indicator to indicate when the See Tire Pressure Monitor
system is not operating properly. Operation on page 10‑45.
Vehicle Care 10-45
Federal Communications For additional information and

Commission (FCC) Rules and details about the DIC operation and
with Industry Canada displays see Driver Information
Standards Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑29 or Driver Information
See Radio Frequency Statement on Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
page 13‑21 for information page 5‑24 and Tire Messages on
When a low tire pressure condition
regarding Part 15 of the Federal page 5‑39.
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
Communications Commission (FCC)
the low tire pressure warning light The low tire pressure warning light
Rules and with Industry Canada
located on the instrument cluster. may come on in cool weather when
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
If the warning light comes on, stop the vehicle is first started, and then
as soon as possible and inflate the turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
Tire Pressure Monitor tires to the recommended pressure could be an early indicator that the
Operation shown on the tire loading air pressure is getting low and
information label. See Vehicle Load needs to be inflated to the proper
This vehicle may have a Tire
Limits on page 9‑9. pressure.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the A message to check the pressure in A Tire and Loading Information label
driver when a low tire pressure a specific tire displays in the Driver shows the size of the original
condition exists. TPMS sensors are Information Center (DIC). The low equipment tires and the correct
mounted onto each tire and wheel tire pressure warning light and the inflation pressure for the tires when
assembly, excluding the spare tire DIC warning message come on at they are cold. See Vehicle Load
and wheel assembly, if the vehicle each ignition cycle until the tires are Limits on page 9‑9, for an example
has one. The TPMS sensors inflated to the correct inflation of the Tire and Loading Information
monitor the air pressure in the tires pressure. Using the DIC, tire label and its location. Also see Tire
and transmits the tire pressure pressure levels can be viewed. Pressure on page 10‑42.
readings to a receiver located in the
vehicle.
10-46 Vehicle Care
The TPMS can warn about a low TPMS Malfunction Light and
. The TPMS sensor matching
tire pressure condition but it does Message process was not done or not
not replace normal tire completed successfully after
maintenance. See Tire Inspection The TPMS will not function properly rotating the tires. The
on page 10‑48, Tire Rotation on if one or more of the TPMS sensors malfunction light and the DIC
page 10‑48 and Tires on are missing or inoperable. When the message should go off after
page 10‑35. system detects a malfunction, the successfully completing the
low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process. See
Notice: Tire sealant materials are about one minute and then stays on "TPMS Sensor Matching
not all the same. A non-approved for the remainder of the ignition Process" later in this section.
tire sealant could damage the cycle. A DIC warning message
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor displays. The malfunction light and
. One or more TPMS sensors are
damage caused by using an DIC warning message come on at missing or damaged. The
incorrect tire sealant is not each ignition cycle until the problem malfunction light and the DIC
covered by the vehicle warranty. is corrected. Some of the conditions message should go off when the
Always use only the that can cause these to come TPMS sensors are installed and
GM-approved tire sealant on are: the sensor matching process is
available through your dealer or performed successfully. See
included in the vehicle.
. One of the road tires has been your dealer for service.
replaced with the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. The
. Replacement tires or wheels do
spare tire does not have a not match the original equipment
TPMS sensor. The malfunction tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
light and DIC message should other than those recommended
go off after the road tire is could prevent the TPMS from
replaced and the sensor functioning properly. See Buying
matching process is performed New Tires on page 10‑50.
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
Matching Process" later in this
section.
Vehicle Care 10-47

. Operating electronic devices or relearn tool, in the following order: 4. Start with the driver side
being near facilities using radio driver side front tire, passenger side front tire.
wave frequencies similar to the front tire, passenger side rear tire,
TPMS could cause the TPMS 5. Place the relearn tool against
and driver side rear. See your the tire sidewall, near the valve
sensors to malfunction. dealer for service or to purchase a stem. Then press the button to
If the TPMS is not functioning relearn tool. activate the TPMS sensor.
properly, it cannot detect or signal a There are two minutes to match the A horn chirp confirms that the
low tire condition. See your dealer first tire/wheel position, and sensor identification code has
for service if the TPMS malfunction five minutes overall to match all four been matched to this tire and
light and DIC message comes on tire/wheel positions. If it takes wheel position.
and stays on. longer, the matching process stops 6. Proceed to the passenger side
TPMS Sensor Matching and must be restarted. front tire, and repeat the
Process The TPMS sensor matching process procedure in Step 5.
is outlined below: 7. Proceed to the passenger side
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. The identification 1. Set the parking brake. rear tire, and repeat the
code needs to be matched to a new 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with procedure in Step 5.
tire/wheel position after rotating the the engine off. 8. Proceed to the driver side rear
tires or replacing one or more of the tire, and repeat the procedure in
TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter's LOCK and Step 5. The horn sounds two
matching process should also be times to indicate the sensor
performed after replacing a spare UNLOCK buttons at the same
time for approximately identification code has been
tire with a road tire containing the matched to the driver side rear
TPMS sensor. The malfunction light five seconds. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver is in tire, and the TPMS sensor
and the DIC message should go off matching process is no longer
at the next ignition cycle. The relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message active. The TIRE LEARNING
sensors are matched to the tire/ ACTIVE message on the DIC
wheel positions, using a TPMS displays on the DIC screen.
display screen goes off.
10-48 Vehicle Care
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. . The tread or sidewall is inflation pressure, and check for
10. Set all four tires to the
cracked, cut, or snagged damaged tires or wheels. If the
recommended air pressure deep enough to show cord or unusual wear continues after the
level as indicated on the Tire fabric. rotation, check the wheel
and Loading Information label. . The tire has a bump, bulge, alignment. See When It Is Time
11. Put the valve caps back on the or split. for New Tires on page 10‑49
valve stems. and Wheel Replacement on
. The tire has a puncture, cut, page 10‑54.
or other damage that cannot
Tire Inspection be repaired well because of
We recommend that the tires, the size or location of the
including the spare tire, if the damage.
vehicle has one, be inspected
for signs of wear or damage at Tire Rotation
least once a month.
Tires should be rotated every
Replace the tire if: 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
. The indicators at three or Maintenance Schedule on
more places around the tire page 11‑2.
can be seen. Tires are rotated to achieve a
. There is cord or fabric uniform wear for all tires. The
showing through the tire's first rotation is the most Use this rotation pattern when
rubber. important. rotating the tires.
Anytime unusual wear is If the vehicle has a compact
noticed, rotate the tires as soon spare tire, do not include it in the
as possible, check for proper tire tire rotation.
Vehicle Care 10-49
Adjust the front and rear tires to

WARNING (Continued)
When It Is Time for New
the recommended inflation Tires
pressure on the Tire and off and cause an accident. When
Loading Information label after Factors such as maintenance,
changing a wheel, remove any temperatures, driving speeds,
the tires have been rotated. See rust or dirt from places where the vehicle loading, and road conditions
Tire Pressure on page 10‑42 wheel attaches to the vehicle. In affect the wear rate of the tires.
and Vehicle Load Limits on an emergency, a cloth or a paper
page 9‑9. towel can be used; however, use
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor a scraper or wire brush later to
System. See Tire Pressure remove all rust or dirt.
Monitor Operation on
page 10‑45. Lightly coat the center of the
Check that all wheel nuts are wheel hub with wheel bearing
properly tightened. See “Wheel grease after a wheel change or
Nut Torque” under Capacities tire rotation to prevent corrosion
and Specifications on or rust build-up. Do not get
page 12‑2. grease on the flat wheel
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
{ WARNING Treadwear indicators are one way to
tell when it is time for new tires.
Check that the spare tire, if the
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the vehicle has one, is stored Treadwear indicators appear when
parts to which it is fastened, can properly. Push, pull, and then try the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
make wheel nuts become loose to rotate or turn the tire. If it or less of tread remaining. See Tire
after time. The wheel could come Inspection on page 10‑48 and Tire
moves, tighten the cable. See
(Continued) Rotation on page 10‑48.
Tire Changing on page 10‑57.
10-50 Vehicle Care
The rubber in tires ages over time. slow aging. This area should be free GM's exclusive TPC Spec
This also applies to the spare tire, of grease, gasoline, or other system considers over a dozen
if the vehicle has one, even if it is substances that can deteriorate critical specifications that impact
never used. Multiple factors rubber. the overall performance of the
including temperatures, loading Parking for an extended period can vehicle, including brake system
conditions, and inflation pressure cause flat spots on the tires that
maintenance affect how fast aging performance, ride and handling,
may result in vibrations while traction control, and tire
takes place. GM recommends that driving. When storing a vehicle for
tires, including the spare if pressure monitoring
at least a month, remove the tires or performance. GM's TPC Spec
equipped, be replaced after six raise the vehicle to reduce the
years, regardless of tread wear. The weight from the tires.
number is molded onto the tire's
tire manufacturer date is the last sidewall near the tire size. If the
four digits of the DOT Tire tires have an all-season tread
Identification Number (TIN) which is Buying New Tires
design, the TPC Spec number
molded into one side of the tire GM has developed and matched will be followed by MS for mud
sidewall. The first two digits specific tires for the vehicle. The and snow. See Tire Sidewall
represent the week (01–52) and the original equipment tires installed
last two digits, the year. For Labeling on page 10‑37.
were designed to meet General
example, the third week of the year GM recommends replacing worn
2010 would have a four-digit DOT
Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) tires in complete sets of four.
date of 0310. Uniform tread depth on all tires
system rating. When
Vehicle Storage replacement tires are needed, will help to maintain the
GM strongly recommends performance of the vehicle.
Tires age when stored normally
buying tires with the same TPC Braking and handling
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
a vehicle that will be stored for at Spec rating. performance may be adversely
least a month in a cool, dry, clean affected if all the tires are not
area away from direct sunlight to replaced at the same time.
If proper rotation and
Vehicle Care 10-51
maintenance have been done,

all four tires should wear out at { WARNING { WARNING
about the same time. See Tire Tires could explode during Using bias-ply tires on the
Rotation on page 10‑48 for improper service. Attempting vehicle may cause the wheel
information on proper tire to mount or dismount a tire rim flanges to develop cracks
rotation. However, if it is could cause injury or death. after many miles of driving.
necessary to replace only one Only your dealer or authorized A tire and/or wheel could fail
axle set of worn tires, place the tire service center should suddenly and cause a crash.
new tires on the rear axle. mount or dismount the tires. Use only radial-ply tires with
Winter tires with the same speed the wheels on the vehicle.
rating as the original equipment
tires may not be available for H, { WARNING If the vehicle tires must be
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated replaced with a tire that does not
tires. Never exceed the winter Mixing tires of different sizes, have a TPC Spec number, make
tire's maximum speed capability brands, or types may cause sure they are the same size,
when using winter tires with a loss of control of the vehicle, load range, speed rating, and
lower speed rating. resulting in a crash or other construction (radial) as the
vehicle damage. Use the original tires.
correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels. Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low-pressure warning if non-TPC
Spec rated tires are installed.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑44.
10-52 Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading Uniform Tire Quality

Information label indicates the { WARNING Grading
original equipment tires on the If different sized wheels are used,
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits Quality grades can be found
there may not be an acceptable
on page 9‑9. level of performance and safety if
where applicable on the tire
tires not recommended for those sidewall between tread shoulder
Different Size Tires and wheels are selected. This and maximum section width. For
Wheels increases the chance of a crash example:
and serious injury. Only use GM Treadwear 200 Traction AA
If wheels or tires are installed that
specific wheel and tire systems Temperature A
are a different size than the original
developed for the vehicle, and
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle The following information relates
performance, including its braking, have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician. to the system developed by the
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover United States National Highway
may be affected. If the vehicle has See Buying New Tires on
Traffic Safety Administration
electronic systems such as antilock page 10‑50 and Accessories and (NHTSA), which grades tires by
brakes, rollover airbags, traction Modifications on page 10‑2. treadwear, traction, and
control, electronic stability control, temperature performance. This
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance applies only to vehicles sold in
of these systems can also be the United States. The grades
affected. are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter tires,
compact spare tires, tires with
Vehicle Care 10-53
nominal rim diameters of graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), one-half (1½) times as well on tests, and does not include
or to some limited-production the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering,
tires. graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction
While the tires available on performance of tires depends characteristics.
General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of
Temperature – A, B, C
and light trucks may vary with their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A
respect to these grades, they
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C,
must also conform to federal
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance
safety requirements and
differences in road to the generation of heat and its
additional General Motors Tire
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
Performance Criteria (TPC)
tested under controlled
standards. Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor
All Passenger Car Tires Must The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
Conform to Federal Safety highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
Requirements In Addition To and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
These Grades. the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
Treadwear pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade
The treadwear grade is a specified government test C corresponds to a level of
comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and performance which all
wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet
under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety
specified government test Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and
course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
10-54 Vehicle Care
performance on the laboratory road, the tires and wheels might

test wheel than the minimum need to be rebalanced. See your { WARNING
required by law. Warning: The dealer for proper diagnosis.
Using the wrong replacement
temperature grade for this tire is wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
established for a tire that is Wheel Replacement nuts can be dangerous. It could
properly inflated and not Replace any wheel that is bent, affect the braking and handling of
overloaded. Excessive speed, cracked, or badly rusted or the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
underinflation, or excessive corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming and cause loss of control, causing
loading, either separately or in loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and a crash. Always use the correct
combination, can cause heat wheel nuts should be replaced. wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
buildup and possible tire failure. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. nuts for replacement.
Some aluminum wheels can be
repaired. See your dealer if any of
Wheel Alignment and Tire these conditions exist. Notice: The wrong wheel can
Balance Your dealer will know the kind of
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
The tires and wheels were aligned wheel that is needed. or odometer calibration,
and balanced at the factory to Each new wheel should have the headlamp aim, bumper height,
provide the longest tire life and best same load-carrying capacity, vehicle ground clearance, and tire
overall performance. Adjustments to diameter, width, offset, and be or tire chain clearance to the
wheel alignment and tire balancing mounted the same way as the one it body and chassis.
will not be necessary on a regular replaces.
basis. However, check the
alignment if there is unusual tire Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
one side or the other. If the vehicle System (TPMS) sensors with new
vibrates when driving on a smooth GM original equipment parts.
Vehicle Care 10-55
Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat

It is unusual for a tire to blow out
{ WARNING { WARNING while driving, especially if the tires
are maintained properly. See Tires
Replacing a wheel with a used Do not use tire chains. There is on page 10‑35. If air goes out of a
one is dangerous. How it has not enough clearance. Tire chains tire, it is much more likely to leak
been used or how far it has been used on a vehicle without the out slowly. But if there ever is a
driven may be unknown. It could proper amount of clearance can blowout, here are a few tips about
fail suddenly and cause a crash. cause damage to the brakes, what to expect and what to do:
When replacing wheels, use a suspension, or other vehicle
new GM original equipment If a front tire fails, the flat tire
parts. The area damaged by the
wheel. creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
tire chains could cause loss of toward that side. Take your foot off
control and a crash. the accelerator pedal and grip the
Use another type of traction steering wheel firmly. Steer to
device only if its manufacturer maintain lane position, and then
recommends it for the vehicle's gently brake to a stop, well off the
tire size combination and road road, if possible.
conditions. Follow that A rear blowout, particularly on a
manufacturer's instructions. To curve, acts much like a skid and
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow may require the same correction as
and readjust or remove the used in a skid. Stop pressing the
traction device if it contacts the accelerator pedal and steer to
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. straighten the vehicle. It may be
If traction devices are used, install very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
them on the front tires. to a stop, well off the road,
if possible.
10-56 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING { WARNING { WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will cause Lifting a vehicle and getting under Changing a tire can be
permanent damage to the tire. it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous. The vehicle can slip
Re-inflating a tire after it has been dangerous without the off the jack and roll over or fall
driven on while severely appropriate safety equipment and causing injury or death. Find a
underinflated or flat may cause a training. If a jack is provided with level place to change the tire. To
blowout and a serious crash. the vehicle, it is designed only for help prevent the vehicle from
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire changing a flat tire. If it is used for moving:
that has been driven on while anything else, you or others could 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
severely underinflated or flat. be badly injured or killed if the
Have your dealer or an authorized vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack 2. Put an automatic
tire service center repair or is provided with the vehicle, only transmission in P (Park) or a
replace the flat tire as soon as use it for changing a flat tire. manual transmission in
possible. 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
not restart while the vehicle
and wheel damage by driving slowly
is raised.
to a level place, well off the road,
if possible. Turn on the hazard 4. Do not allow passengers to
warning flashers. See Hazard remain in the vehicle.
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4. 5. Place wheel blocks on both
sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
being changed.
Vehicle Care 10-57
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2), 4. Turn the jack on its side, with the
use the following example as a bottom facing toward you.
guide to assist in the placement of 5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom
the wheel blocks (1). first.
1. Tool Bag
1. Wheel Block 2. Wing Bolt
2. Flat Tire 3. Jack
The following information explains 1. Open the jack storage
how to repair or change a tire. compartment by pulling on the 1. Jack
latch tab, located toward the rear
of the vehicle, and pulling the 2. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown,
Tire Changing One-Piece Similar)
cover off.
Removing Tools 2. Remove the wing bolt (2) by The tools you will be using include
turning it counterclockwise. the jack (1) and wrench (2).
The tools needed to remove the
spare tire are located in the storage 3. Push the jack (3) up out of the
compartment on the driver side, at holding bracket and remove the
the rear of the vehicle. tool bag (1).
10-58 Vehicle Care
Removing the Spare Tire 1. Open the storage compartment

door of the convenience
The compact spare tire is located
center (1) that is nearest the
under the vehicle, in front of the rear
liftgate.
bumper. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 10‑65 for more information. 2. Open the carpet cutout (3) that
is located through the hole of the
storage compartment.
3. Attach the wrench (2) into the
hoist shaft (4). 5. Tilt the retainer and slip it
4. Turn the wrench (2) through the wheel opening to
counterclockwise to lower the remove the spare tire from the
spare tire (5) to the ground. cable.
Continue turning the wrench until 6. Turn the wrench clockwise to
the spare tire can be pulled out raise the cable back up after
from under the vehicle. removing the spare tire.
Do not store a full-size or a flat
road tire under the vehicle. See
1. Rear Convenience Center “Storing the Spare Tire” and
2. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown, “Storing the Flat Tire” later in this
One-Piece Similar) section.
3. Carpet Cutout
4. Hoist Shaft
5. Compact Spare Tire
6. Retainer
Vehicle Care 10-59
Removing the Flat Tire and Notice: If this vehicle has wheel
Installing the Spare Tire locks and an impact wrench is
used to remove the wheel nuts,
1. Do a safety check before the lock nut or wheel lock key
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes could be damaged. Do not use an
Flat on page 10‑55 for more impact wrench to remove the
information. wheel nuts if this vehicle has
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, wheel locks.
loosen the plastic nut caps with
the wheel wrench. They will not
come off. Then, using the flat
end of the wheel wrench, pry
along the edge of the cover until
3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do
it comes off. Be careful; the
not remove them — using the
edges may be sharp. Do not try
wrench. For wheels with a wheel
to remove the cover with your
lock key, use the wheel lock key 4. To identify the appropriate
bare hands.
between the lock nut and jacking location, find the triangle
Store the wheel cover securely wrench. The key is supplied in or rectangular notch about
in the rear of the vehicle until the front passenger door pocket. 30.5 cm (12 in) from the front tire
you have the flat tire repaired or or about 27 cm (10.5 in) from the
replaced. rear tire.
If the vehicle has aluminum
wheels, remove the wheel nut
caps using the wheel wrench.
10-60 Vehicle Care
6. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put 7. Raise the vehicle by turning the
the compact spare tire near you. wrench clockwise in the jack.
Raise the vehicle far enough off
{ WARNING the ground so that there is
enough room for the spare tire to
Getting under a vehicle when it is fit under the wheel well.
lifted on a jack is dangerous. 8. Remove all the wheel nuts and
If the vehicle slips off the jack, the flat tire.
you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle
when it is supported only by
a jack.
Triangle Shown, Without Similar
The triangle may be located
near each wheel on the vehicle's
exterior.
{ WARNING
Notice: If a jack is used to raise Raising the vehicle with the jack
the vehicle without positioning it improperly positioned can
correctly, the vehicle could be damage the vehicle and even
damaged. When raising the make the vehicle fall. To help
vehicle on a jack, avoid contact avoid personal injury and vehicle
with the rear axle control arms. damage, be sure to fit the jack lift 9. Remove the plastic spare tire
head into the proper location heat shield by pulling the rubber
5. Attach the wrench to the jack, latch. Store the plastic spare tire
and turn the wrench clockwise to before raising the vehicle.
heat shield. See “Storing the
raise the jack head 7.6 cm (3 in). Spare Tire” later in this section
for more information.
Vehicle Care 10-61
10. Remove any rust or dirt from

{ WARNING the wheel bolts, mounting { WARNING
surfaces, and spare wheel.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Wheel nuts that are improperly or
parts to which it is fastened, can 11. Place the spare tire on the incorrectly tightened can cause
make wheel nuts become loose wheel mounting surface. the wheels to become loose or
after time. The wheel could come 12. Put the nuts on by hand by come off. The wheel nuts should
off and cause an accident. When turning them clockwise until the be tightened with a torque wrench
changing a wheel, remove any wheel is held against the to the proper torque specification
rust or dirt from places where the mounting surface. Make sure after replacing. Follow the torque
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In the rounded end is toward the specification supplied by the
an emergency, a cloth or a paper wheel. aftermarket manufacturer when
towel can be used; however, use 13. Lower the vehicle by attaching using accessory locking wheel
a scraper or wire brush later to the wrench to the jack and nuts. See Capacities and
remove all rust or dirt. turning the wrench Specifications on page 12‑2 for
counterclockwise. Lower the original equipment wheel nut
jack completely. torque specifications.
{ WARNING Notice: Improperly tightened
Never use oil or grease on bolts wheel nuts can lead to brake
or nuts because the nuts might pulsation and rotor damage. To
come loose. The vehicle's wheel avoid expensive brake repairs,
could fall off, causing a crash. evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
10-62 Vehicle Care
Storing the Spare Tire

{ WARNING
{ WARNING Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
The underbody-mounted spare
compartment of the vehicle could
tire needs to be stored with the
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
valve stem pointing down. If the
collision, loose equipment could
spare tire is stored with the valve
strike someone. Store all these in
stem pointing upwards, the
the proper place.
secondary latch will not work
properly and the spare tire could
loosen and suddenly fall from the To store the spare tire:
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in vehicle. If this happened when 1. Lay the compact spare tire near
a crisscross sequence, as the vehicle was being driven, the the rear of the vehicle with the
shown. tire might contact a person or valve stem down.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit another vehicle, causing injury
2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire
on the vehicle's compact spare. and damage to itself. Be sure the
heat shield on the compact
If you try to put a wheel cover on underbody-mounted spare tire is spare tire.
the compact spare, the cover or stored with the valve stem
the spare could be damaged. pointing down. 3. Slide the cable retainer through
the center of the wheel and start
to raise the compact spare tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully
seated across the underside of
the wheel.
Vehicle Care 10-63
4. When the compact spare tire is Storing the Flat Tire

almost in the stored position,
turn the tire so the valve is
toward the rear of the vehicle.
This position helps when
checking the air pressure in the
compact spare tire.
5. Raise the tire fully against the
underside of the vehicle.
Continue turning the wrench until
you feel more than two clicks.
This indicates that the compact
6. Make sure the tire is stored
spare tire is secure and the
securely. Push, pull, and then try
cable is tight. The spare tire
to turn the tire. If the tire moves, 1. Cable
hoist cannot be overtightened.
use the wrench to tighten the
cable. 2. Liftgate Hinges
3. Spare Tire Heat Shield
4. Center of the Wheel
5. Door Striker
1. Remove the cable package from
the jack storage area.
2. Remove the small center cap by
tapping the back of the cap with
the extension of the shaft, if the
vehicle has aluminum wheels.
10-64 Vehicle Care
3. Put the flat tire in the rear 7. Pull on the cable to make sure it Storing the Tools
storage area with the valve stem is secure.
pointing toward the rear of the
vehicle.
4. Pull the cable (1) through the
door striker (5), the center of the
wheel (4), and the plastic spare
tire heat shield (3), as shown.
1. Tool Bag
8. Make sure the metal tube is 2. Wing Bolt
centered at the striker. Push the
tube toward the front of the 3. Jack
vehicle. Put back all tools as they were
9. Close the liftgate and make sure stored in the jack storage
it is latched properly. compartment and put the
5. Hook the cable onto the outside compartment cover back on.
portion of the liftgate hinges (2). 1. Ensure that the bottom of the
6. Hook the other end of the cable jack is facing toward you.
onto the outside portion of the 2. Replace the tool bag (1).
liftgate hinge on the other side of
the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-65
3. Turn the jack (3) on its side and Compact Spare Tire speed be limited to 80 km/h (50
place down on the holding mph). To conserve the tread of the
bracket. spare tire, have the standard tire
4. Reinstall the wing bolt (2) by
{ WARNING repaired or replaced as soon as
turning clockwise. Driving with more than one convenient and return the spare tire
to the storage area.
5. To replace the cover, line up the compact spare tire at a time could
tab at the front of the cover with result in loss of braking and Notice: When the compact spare
the notch in the cover opening. handling. This could lead to a is installed, do not take the
Push the cover in place and crash and you or others could be vehicle through an automatic car
make sure that the rear clips are injured. Use only one compact wash with guide rails. The
in the slots and push the cover spare tire at a time. compact spare can get caught on
closed. the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel, and other parts of the
Store the center cap or the plastic If this vehicle has a compact spare vehicle.
bolt-on wheel covers until a full size tire, it was fully inflated when new;
tire is put back on the vehicle. When however, it can lose air over time. Do not use the compact spare on
you replace the compact spare with Check the inflation pressure other vehicles.
a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on regularly. It should be 420 kPa Do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel covers or the center cap. (60 psi). wheel with other wheels or tires.
Hand-tighten them over the wheel Stop as soon as possible and check They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
nuts, using the wrench. that the spare tire is correctly and its wheel together.
inflated after being installed on the Performance of the All-Wheel
vehicle. The compact spare tire is Drive (AWD) system will be
designed for temporary use only. automatically reduced to protect the
The vehicle will perform differently system when using the compact
with the spare tire installed and it is spare. To restore the AWD and
recommended that the vehicle prevent excessive wear on the
10-66 Vehicle Care
clutch in the AWD, replace the Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps
compact spare tire with a full-size could result in costly damage to
tire as soon as possible. For more information about the the vehicle that would not be
vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
page 10‑22.
compact spare. Using them can Trying to start the vehicle by
damage the vehicle and the If the vehicle battery has run down, pushing or pulling it will not
chains. Do not use tire chains on you may want to use another work, and it could damage the
the compact spare. vehicle and some jumper cables to vehicle.
start your vehicle. Be sure to use
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
the following steps to do it safely.
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
{ WARNING Notice: Only use a vehicle that
Batteries can hurt you. They can has a 12-volt system with a
be dangerous because: negative ground for jump
starting. If the other vehicle does
. They contain acid that can not have a 12-volt system with a
burn you. negative ground, both vehicles
. They contain gas that can can be damaged.
explode or ignite.
. They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
Vehicle Care 10-67
2. Get the vehicles close enough turn off or unplug all accessories
so the jumper cables can reach, on either vehicle when jump { WARNING
but be sure the vehicles are not starting the vehicle.
touching each other. If they are, Using a match near a battery can
3. Turn off the ignition on both cause battery gas to explode.
it could cause a ground vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
connection you do not want. You People have been hurt doing this,
accessories plugged into the and some have been blinded.
would not be able to start your cigarette lighter or the accessory
vehicle, and the bad grounding Use a flashlight if you need more
power outlets. Turn off the radio light.
could damage the electrical and all lamps that are not
systems. needed. This will avoid sparks Be sure the batteries have
To avoid the possibility of the and help save both batteries. enough water. You do not need to
vehicles rolling, set the parking And it could save the radio! add water to the ACDelco®
brake firmly on both vehicles 4. Open the hoods and locate the battery (or batteries) installed in
involved in the jump start positive (+) and negative (−) your new vehicle. But if a battery
procedure. Put an automatic terminal locations on the other has filler caps, be sure the right
transmission in P (Park) or a vehicle. Your vehicle has a amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
manual transmission in Neutral remote positive (+) and a remote add water to take care of that
before setting the parking brake. negative (−) jump starting first. If you do not, explosive gas
If one of the vehicles is a terminal. See Engine could be present.
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure Compartment Overview on
the transfer case is not in Battery fluid contains acid that
page 10‑5 for the terminal
Neutral. can burn you. Do not get it on
locations.
you. If you accidentally get it in
Notice: If any accessories are left
on or plugged in during the jump your eyes or on your skin, flush
starting procedure, they could be the place with water and get
damaged. The repairs would not medical help immediately.
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Whenever possible,
10-68 Vehicle Care
negative (−) cable to the battery. Use a remote

{ WARNING negative (−) terminal on the dead positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
battery because this can cause has one.
Fans or other moving engine sparks.
parts can injure you badly. Keep 8. Now connect the black
your hands away from moving negative (−) cable to the
parts once the engine is running. negative (−) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the
5. Check that the jumper cables do vehicle has one.
not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could Do not let the other end touch
get a shock. The vehicles could anything until the next step. The
be damaged too. other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
Before you connect the cables, battery. It goes to a heavy,
here are some basic things you unpainted metal engine part,
should know. Positive (+) will go or to a remote negative (−)
to positive (+) or to a remote terminal on the vehicle with the
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle 6. Connect the red positive (+) dead battery.
has one. Negative (−) will go to a cable to the positive (+) terminal
heavy, unpainted metal engine of the dead battery.
part or to a remote negative (−) Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to 7. Do not let the other end touch
negative (−) or you will get a metal. Connect it to the
short that would damage the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery and maybe other parts
too. And do not connect the
Vehicle Care 10-69
11. Try to start the vehicle that had Towing

the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
probably needs service. Towing the Vehicle
Notice: If the jumper cables are Notice: Incorrectly towing a
connected or removed in the disabled vehicle may cause
wrong order, electrical shorting damage. The damage would not
may occur and damage the be covered by the vehicle
vehicle. The repairs would not be warranty. Do not lash or hook to
covered by the vehicle warranty. the chassis components
Always connect and remove the including the front and rear
jumper cables in the correct subframes, suspension control
9. Connect the other end of the order, making sure that the arms and links during towing and
negative (−) cable at least 45 cm cables do not touch each other or recovery of a disabled vehicle or
(18 in) away from the dead other metal. to secure the vehicle to a flatbed
battery, but not near engine car carrier. Use the proper nylon
Jumper Cable Removal strap harnesses around the tires
parts that move.
Reverse the sequence exactly when to secure the flatbed car carrier.
The electrical connection is just removing the jumper cables.
as good there, and the chance Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed
of sparks getting back to the car carrier or a wheel lift tow truck.
battery is much less. If a wheel lift tow truck is used, the
drive wheels cannot contact the
Your vehicle has a remote road while the vehicle is being
negative (−) terminal for this towed. A wheel dolly must be used
purpose. to lift all drive wheels off the ground.
10. Now start the vehicle with the Consult your dealer or a
good battery and run the professional towing service if the
engine for a while. disabled vehicle must be towed.
10-70 Vehicle Care
To tow the vehicle behind another Here are some important things to Dinghy Towing
vehicle for recreational purposes, consider before recreational vehicle
such as behind a motor home, see towing:
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” . What is the towing capacity of
following. the towing vehicle? Be sure to
read the tow vehicle
Recreational Vehicle manufacturer's
Towing recommendations.
Recreational vehicle towing means . What is the distance that will be
towing the vehicle behind another travelled? Some vehicles have
vehicle – such as behind a restrictions on how far and how
motorhome. The two most common long they can be towed.
types of recreational vehicle towing . Is the proper towing equipment
are known as dinghy towing and going to be used? See your
dolly towing. Dinghy towing is If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, it
dealer or trailering professional can be dinghy towed from the front.
towing the vehicle with all four for additional advice and
wheels on the ground. Dolly towing These vehicles may also be towed
equipment recommendations. by putting the front wheels on a
is towing the vehicle with two
wheels on the ground and two
. Is the vehicle ready to be dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this
wheels up on a device known as a towed? Just as preparing the section.
dolly. vehicle for a long trip, make sure If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, it
the vehicle is prepared to be can be dinghy towed from the front.
towed. These vehicles can also be towed
by placing them on a platform trailer
with all four wheels off of the
ground. These vehicles cannot be
towed using a dolly.
Vehicle Care 10-71
For vehicles being dinghy towed, passenger seat on the floor. 3. Shift the transmission to
the vehicle should be run at the Also, remove the 50 amp BATT1 P (Park), turn the ignition to
beginning of each day and at each fuse from the underhood fuse LOCK/OFF and remove the key
RV fuel stop for about five minutes. block and store all fuses in a from the ignition.
This will ensure proper lubrication of safe location. See Engine 4. Disconnect the vehicle from the
transmission components. Reinstall Compartment Fuse Block on towing vehicle.
the fuse to start the vehicle. page 10‑29.
Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with
To tow the vehicle from the front 7. Release the parking brake. the front drive wheels on the
with all four wheels on the ground: Notice: If the vehicle is towed ground if one of the front tires is
1. Position the vehicle to be towed, without performing each of the a compact spare tire. Towing with
shift the transmission to steps listed under “Dinghy two different tire sizes on the
P (Park), and turn the ignition to Towing,” the automatic front of the vehicle can cause
LOCK/OFF. transmission could be damaged. severe damage to the
2. Secure the vehicle to the towing Be sure to follow all steps of the transmission.
vehicle. dinghy towing procedure prior to
and after towing the vehicle.
3. Set the parking brake.
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is
4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ exceeded while towing the
ACCESSORY. vehicle, it could be damaged.
5. Shift the transmission to Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
N (Neutral). while towing the vehicle.
6. To prevent the battery from Once the destination is reached:
draining while the vehicle is 1. Set the parking brake.
being towed, remove the 15 amp
ECM fuse and the 15 amp 2. Reinstall the fuses.
Onstar fuse. These are in the
battery compartment behind the
10-72 Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Dolly Towing 5. Remove the key from the
Vehicles) (Front-Wheel-Drive ignition.
Vehicles Only) 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Towing the Vehicle From
the Rear
All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be

towed with two wheels on the To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle
ground. To properly tow these from the front with two wheels on
vehicles, they should be placed on the ground:
a platform trailer with all four wheels
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
off of the ground or dinghy towed
from the front. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
Vehicle Care 10-73
Appearance Care product usage, necessary safety

precautions, and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
Exterior Care product.
Locks Notice: Avoid using
Locks are lubricated at the factory. high-pressure washes closer than
Use a de-icing agent only when 30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the
absolutely necessary, and have the vehicle. Use of power washers
locks greased after using. See exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)
Recommended Fluids and can result in damage or removal
Lubricants. of paint and decals.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
Notice: Towing the vehicle from Washing the Vehicle washing and after, to remove all
the rear could damage it. Also,
To preserve the vehicle's finish, cleaning agents completely. If they
repairs would not be covered by
wash it often and out of direct are allowed to dry on the surface,
the vehicle warranty. Never have
sunlight. they could stain.
the vehicle towed from the rear.
Notice: Do not use Dry the finish with a soft, clean
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.
petroleum-based, acidic, chamois or an all-cotton towel to
or abrasive cleaning agents as avoid surface scratches and water
they can damage the vehicle's spotting.
paint, metal, or plastic parts.
If damage occurs, it would not be Finish Care
covered by the vehicle's warranty. Application of aftermarket clearcoat
Approved cleaning products can sealant/wax materials is not
be obtained from your dealer. recommended. If painted surfaces
Follow all manufacturer are damaged, see your dealer to
directions regarding correct have the damage assessed and
10-74 Vehicle Care
repaired. Foreign materials such as that are made for a basecoat/ Windshield and Wiper Blades
calcium chloride and other salts, ice clearcoat paint finish on the
Clean the outside of the windshield
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree vehicle.
with glass cleaner.
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from To keep the paint finish looking new,
industrial chimneys, etc., can Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
keep the vehicle garaged or
damage the vehicle's finish if they cloth or paper towel soaked with
covered whenever possible.
remain on painted surfaces. Wash windshield washer fluid or a mild
the vehicle as soon as possible. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal detergent. Wash the windshield
If necessary, use non-abrasive Parts thoroughly when cleaning the
cleaners that are marked safe for Regularly clean bright metal parts blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
painted surfaces to remove foreign with water or chrome polish on a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
matter. chrome or stainless steel trim, treatments may cause wiper
if necessary. streaking.
Occasional hand waxing or mild
polishing should be done to remove For aluminum, never use auto or Replace the wiper blades if they are
residue from the paint finish. See chrome polish, steam, or caustic worn or damaged. Damage can be
your dealer for approved cleaning soap to clean. A coating of wax, caused by extreme dusty
products. rubbed to a high polish, is conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
recommended for all bright metal snow, and ice.
Do not apply waxes or polishes to
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, parts. Weatherstrips
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
as damage can occur. Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Apply silicone grease on
Lenses and Emblems weatherstrips to make them last
Notice: Machine compounding or longer, seal better, and not stick or
aggressive polishing on a Use only lukewarm or cold water, a squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish soft cloth, and a car washing soap once a year. Black marks from
may damage it. Use only to clean exterior lamps, lenses and
rubber material on painted surfaces
non-abrasive waxes and polishes emblems. Follow instructions under can be removed by rubbing with a
"Washing the Vehicle" in this
section.
Vehicle Care 10-75
clean cloth. See Recommended calcium, or sodium chloride. leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually
Fluids and Lubricants on These chlorides are used on check constant velocity joints,
page 11‑12. roads for conditions such as ice rubber boots, and axle seals for
and dust. Always wash the leaks.
Tires chrome with soap and water after
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to exposure. Body Component Lubrication
clean the tires. Notice: To avoid surface damage, Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
Notice: Using petroleum-based do not use strong soaps, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the
tire dressing products on the chemicals, abrasive polishes, steel fuel door hinge unless the
vehicle may damage the paint cleaners, brushes, or cleaners components are plastic. Applying
finish and/or tires. When applying that contain acid on aluminum or silicone grease on weatherstrips
a tire dressing, always wipe off chrome-plated wheels. Use only with a clean cloth will make them
any overspray from all painted approved cleaners. Also, never last longer, seal better, and not stick
surfaces on the vehicle. drive a vehicle with aluminum or or squeak.
chrome-plated wheels through an Underbody Maintenance
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum automatic car wash that uses
or Chrome silicone carbide tire cleaning Use plain water to flush dirt and
brushes. Damage could occur debris from the vehicle's underbody.
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild
and the repairs would not be Your dealer or an underbody car
soap and water to clean the wheels.
covered by the vehicle warranty. washing system can do this. If not
After rinsing thoroughly with clean
removed, rust and corrosion can
water, dry with a soft, clean towel. Steering, Suspension, and develop.
A wax may then be applied.
Chassis Components
Notice: Chrome wheels and other Sheet Metal Damage
Visually inspect the front and rear
chrome trim may be damaged if If the vehicle is damaged and
suspension and steering system for
the vehicle is not washed after requires sheet metal repair or
damaged, loose, or missing parts or
driving on roads that have been replacement, make sure the body
signs of wear. Inspect the power
sprayed with magnesium, repair shop applies anti-corrosion
steering for proper hook-up, binding,
10-76 Vehicle Care
material to parts repaired or Interior Care remain on the surface being

replaced to restore corrosion cleaned for extended periods
protection. To prevent dirt particle abrasions, of time.
regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Original manufacturer replacement Immediately remove any soils. Note Cleaners may contain solvents that
parts will provide the corrosion that newspapers or dark garments can become concentrated in the
protection while maintaining the that can transfer color to home interior. Before using cleaners, read
vehicle warranty. furnishings can also permanently and adhere to all safety instructions
transfer color to the vehicle's on the label. While cleaning the
Finish Damage interior, maintain adequate
interior.
Quickly repair minor chips and ventilation by opening the doors and
scratches with touch-up materials Use a soft bristle brush to remove windows.
available from your dealer to avoid dust from knobs and crevices on the
instrument cluster. Using a mild To prevent damage, do not clean
corrosion. Larger areas of finish the interior using the following
damage can be corrected in your soap solution, immediately remove
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect cleaners or techniques:
dealer's body and paint shop.
repellent from all interior surfaces or . Never use a razor or any other
Chemical Paint Spotting permanent damage may result. sharp object to remove a soil
Airborne pollutants can fall upon Your dealer may have products for from any interior surface.
and attack painted vehicle surfaces cleaning the interior. Use cleaners . Never use a brush with stiff
causing blotchy, ring-shaped specifically designed for the bristles.
discolorations, and small, irregular surfaces being cleaned to prevent . Never rub any surface
dark spots etched into the paint permanent damage. Apply all
aggressively or with excessive
surface. cleaners directly to the cleaning
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly pressure.
on any switches or controls.
Cleaners should be removed
quickly. Never allow cleaners to
Vehicle Care 10-77

. Do not use laundry detergents or cleaners or aggressive cleaning Fabric/Carpet/Suede
dishwashing soaps with may damage the rear window
degreasers. For liquid cleaners, Start by vacuuming the surface
defogger.
use approximately 20 drops per using a soft brush attachment. If a
3.78 L (1 gal) of water. Notice: Cleaning the windshield rotating brush attachment is being
A concentrated soap solution will with water during the first three to used during vacuuming, only use it
leave a residue that creates six months of ownership will on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not reduce tendency to fog. gently remove as much of the soil
use solutions that contain strong as possible using one of the
Speaker Covers following techniques:
or caustic soap.
Vacuum around a speaker cover . Gently blot liquids with a paper
. Do not heavily saturate the gently, so that the speaker will not
upholstery when cleaning. towel. Continue blotting until no
be damaged. Clean spots with just more soil can be removed.
. Do not use solvents or cleaners water and mild soap.
containing solvents.
. For solid soils, remove as much
Coated Moldings as possible prior to vacuuming.
Interior Glass Coated moldings should be cleaned. To clean:
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric . When lightly soiled, wipe with a 1. Saturate a clean lint-free
dampened with water. Wipe droplets sponge or soft lint-free cloth colorfast cloth with water or club
left behind with a clean dry cloth. dampened with water. soda. Microfiber cloth is
Commercial glass cleaners may be
. When heavily soiled, use warm recommended to prevent lint
used, if necessary, after cleaning
soapy water. transfer to the fabric or carpet.
the interior glass with plain water.
2. Remove excess moisture by
Notice: To prevent scratching,
gently wringing until water does
never use abrasive cleaners on
not drip from the cleaning cloth.
automotive glass. Abrasive
10-78 Vehicle Care
3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces Instrument Panel, Leather,
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and Vinyl, and Other Plastic
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to Radio Displays Surfaces
a clean area frequently to
prevent forcing the soil in to the For vehicles with high gloss Use a soft microfiber cloth
fabric. surfaces or vehicle displays, use a dampened with water to remove
microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. dust and loose dirt. For a more
4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the thorough cleaning, use a soft
soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle microfiber cloth dampened with a
longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could mild soap solution.
the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the Notice: Soaking or saturating
5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to leather, especially perforated
removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners leather, as well as other interior
solution followed only by club or solvents. Periodically hand wash surfaces, may cause permanent
soda or plain water. the microfiber cloth separately, damage. Wipe excess moisture
using mild soap. Do not use bleach from these surfaces after
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
removed, it may be necessary to cleaning and allow them to dry
and air dry before next use. naturally. Never use heat, steam,
use a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small Notice: Do not attach a device spot lifters, or spot removers. Do
hidden area for colorfastness before with a suction cup to the display. not use cleaners that contain
using a commercial upholstery This may cause damage and silicone or wax-based products.
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring would not be covered by the Cleaners containing these
formation occurs, clean the entire warranty. solvents can permanently change
fabric or carpet. the appearance and feel of leather
or soft trim and are not
Following the cleaning process, a recommended.
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
Vehicle Care 10-79
Do not use cleaners that increase

. The original equipment floor
gloss, especially on the instrument { WARNING mats were designed for your
panel. Reflected glare can decrease vehicle. If the floor mats need
visibility through the windshield Do not bleach or dye safety belts. replacing, it is recommended
under certain conditions. It may severely weaken them. In that GM certified floor mats be
a crash, they might not be able to purchased. Non-GM floor mats
Notice: Use of air fresheners may provide adequate protection. may not fit properly and may
cause permanent damage to Clean safety belts only with mild interfere with the accelerator or
plastics and painted surfaces. soap and lukewarm water. brake pedal. Always check that
If an air freshener comes in the floor mats do not interfere
contact with any plastic or with the pedals.
painted surface in the vehicle, Floor Mats . Use the floor mat with the
blot immediately and clean with a
soft cloth dampened with a mild correct side up. Do not turn
soap solution. Damage caused by { WARNING it over.
air fresheners would not be If a floor mat is the wrong size or . Do not place anything on top of
covered by the vehicle warranty. is not properly installed, it can the driver side floor mat.
Cargo Cover and interfere with the pedals. . Use only a single floor mat on
Convenience Net Interference with the pedals can the driver side.
cause unintended acceleration
Wash with warm water and mild . Do not place one floor mat on
and/or increased stopping
detergent. Do not use chlorine top of another.
distance which can cause a crash
bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
and injury. Make sure the floor Button Retainer
then dry completely.
mat does not interfere with the Floor mats with a button-type
Care of Safety Belts pedals. retainer.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Knob Retainer 3. Center the slot in the floor mat

grommet with the knob on the
Floor mats with a knob retainer.
floor and set into position.
4. Turn the knob until it is
perpendicular to the slot in the
grommet to lock the mat in
place.
5. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
pedals.
Removing and Replacing the
Floor Mat
1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
unlock and remove. Removing and Replacing the
2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining Floor Mat
up the floor mat openings over 1. Turn the knob until it is aligned
the carpet retainers and with the slot in the floor mat
snapping into position. grommet.
3. Make sure the floor mat is 2. Pull up on the floor mat.
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
pedals.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information technicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
the required maintenance for the tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help blades.
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair
Notice: Damage caused by
expenses resulting from neglect or
improper maintenance can lead to
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may
costly repairs and may not be
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 also help to maintain the value of
covered by the vehicle warranty.
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services Maintenance intervals, checks,
responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application inspections, recommended fluids,
all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 and lubricants are important to
Your dealer has trained technicians keep the vehicle in good working
Additional Maintenance who can perform required condition.
and Care maintenance using genuine
The Tire Rotation and Required
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have up‐to‐
Services are the responsibility of the
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 date tools and equipment for fast
vehicle owner. It is recommended to
and accurate diagnostics. Many
Recommended Fluids, have your dealer perform these
dealers have extended evening and
Lubricants, and Parts services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Saturday hours, courtesy
Recommended Fluids and Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
transportation, and online
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 keep the vehicle in good working
scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance Replacement condition, improves fuel economy,
needs.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 and reduces vehicle emissions.
Your dealer recognizes the
Maintenance Records importance of providing
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-14 competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use

. Mainly driven in hilly or
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. mountainous terrain. Maintenance
There may need to be more . Frequently towing a trailer. Schedule
frequent checks and services. The
Additional Required Services ‐
. Used for high speed or Owner Checks and Services
Normal are for vehicles that: competitive driving.
At Each Fuel Stop
. Carry passengers and cargo
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery
service.
. Check the engine oil level. See
within recommended limits on Engine Oil on page 10‑7.
the Tire and Loading Information Refer to the information in the
label. See Vehicle Load Limits Maintenance Schedule Additional Once a Month
on page 9‑9. Required Services ‐ Severe chart. . Check the tire inflation
. Are driven on reasonable road pressures. See Tire Pressure on
surfaces within legal driving { WARNING page 10‑42.
limits. . Inspect the tires for wear. See
Performing maintenance work can
. Use the recommended fuel. See Tire Inspection on page 10‑48.
be dangerous and can cause
Recommended Fuel on serious injury. Perform . Check the windshield washer
page 9‑38. maintenance work only if the fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
Refer to the information in the required information, proper tools, page 10‑19.
Maintenance Schedule Additional and equipment are available. Engine Oil Change
Required Services ‐ Normal chart. If they are not, see your dealer to
have a trained technician do the When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
The Additional Required Services ‐
work. See Doing Your Own SOON message displays, have the
Severe are for vehicles that are:
Service Work on page 10‑3. engine oil and filter changed within
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven
in hot weather. under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service
for more than a year. The engine oil Tire Rotation and Required
. Visually inspect windshield wiper
and filter must be changed at least Services Every 12 000 km/ blades for wear, cracking,
once a year and the oil life system or contamination. See Exterior
7,500 mi Care on page 10‑73. Replace
must be reset. Your trained dealer
technician can perform this work. Rotate the tires, if recommended for worn or damaged wiper blades.
If the engine oil life system is reset the vehicle, and perform the See Wiper Blade Replacement
accidentally, service the vehicle following services. See Tire on page 10‑24.
within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the Rotation on page 10‑48. . Check tire inflation pressures.
last service. Reset the oil life . Check engine oil level and oil See Tire Pressure on
system when the oil is changed. life percentage. If needed, page 10‑42.
See Engine Oil Life System on change engine oil and filter, and
page 10‑9.
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire
reset oil life system. See Engine
Inspection on page 10‑48.
Oil on page 10‑7 and Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑9. . Visually check for fluid leaks.
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
. Check engine coolant level. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑13. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑11.
. Check windshield washer fluid
level. See Washer Fluid on . Inspect brake system.
page 10‑19.

. Visually inspect steering, . Lubricate body components. See . Check parking brake and
suspension, and chassis Exterior Care on page 10‑73. automatic transmission park
components for damaged, loose, . Check starter switch. See Starter mechanism. See Park Brake and
or missing parts or signs of Switch Check on page 10‑22. P (Park) Mechanism Check on
wear. See Exterior Care on page 10‑23.
page 10‑73. . Check automatic transmission
shift lock control function. See
. Check accelerator pedal for
. Check restraint system Automatic Transmission Shift damage, high effort, or binding.
components. See Safety System Lock Control Function Check on Replace if needed.
Check on page 3‑22. page 10‑23. . Visually inspect gas strut for
. Visually inspect fuel system for . Check ignition transmission lock. signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage or leaks. See Ignition Transmission Lock damage. Check the hold open
. Visually inspect exhaust system Check on page 10‑23. ability of the strut. See your
and nearby heat shields for dealer if service is required.
loose or damaged parts. . Inspect sunroof track and seal,
if equipped. See Sunroof on
page 2‑21.

Footnotes — Maintenance (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines (5) Or every five years, whichever
Schedule Additional Required and hoses for proper hook-up, comes first. See Cooling System on
Services — Normal routing, and condition. Check that page 10‑12.
(1) Or every two years, whichever the purge valve, if the vehicle has (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. More frequent one, works properly. Replace as comes first.
replacement may be needed if the needed.
(7) Inspect for fraying, excessive
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy (3) Or every four years, whichever cracking, or damage; replace,
traffic, areas with poor air quality, comes first. if needed.
or areas with high dust levels.
(4) Do not directly power wash the
Replacement may also be needed if
transfer case output seals. High
there is a reduction in air flow, pressure water can overcome the
excessive window fogging, or odors. seals and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.

Footnotes — Maintenance (3) Or every four years, whichever Special Application

Schedule Additional Required comes first.
Services — Severe (4) Do not directly power wash the
Services
(1) Or every two years, whichever transfer case output seals. High . Severe Commercial Use
comes first. More frequent pressure water can overcome the Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
replacement may be needed if the seals and contaminate the transfer components every 5 000 km/
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy case fluid. Contaminated fluid will 3,000 mi.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, decrease the life of the transfer . Have underbody flushing service
or areas with high dust levels. case and should be replaced.
performed once a year.
Replacement may also be needed if (5) Or every five years, whichever
there is a reduction in air flow, comes first. See Cooling System on
excessive window fogging, or odors. page 10‑12.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
and hoses for proper hook-up, comes first.
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has (7) Inspect for fraying, excessive
one, works properly. Replace as cracking, or damage; replace,
needed. if needed.
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid break-down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
It is recommended that your dealer connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
perform these services — their corrosion-free.
trained dealer technicians know Fluids
your vehicle best. Your dealer can Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
also perform a thorough . Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
assessment with a multi-point squeak or show signs of and components. See
inspection to recommend when your cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
vehicle may need attention. Lubricants on page 11‑12 for GM
. Trained dealer technicians have
The following list is intended to access to tools and equipment approved fluids.
explain the services and conditions to inspect the belts and . Engine oil and windshield
to look for that may indicate recommend adjustment or washer fluid levels should be
services are required. replacement when necessary. checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
Hoses Shocks and Struts rubber; cracks or cuts in the

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. split in the tire.
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include
. Trained dealer technicians can
With a multi-point inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ inspect and recommend the right
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer tires. Your dealer can also
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven provide tire/wheel balancing
tire wear. services to ensure smooth
Lamps vehicle operation at all speeds.
Properly working headlamps, . As part of the multi-point Your dealer sells and services
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer name brand tires.
important to see and be seen on technicians can visually inspect
the road. the shocks and struts for signs Vehicle Care
of leaking, blown seals, To help keep the vehicle looking like
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise
attention include dimming, failure new, vehicle care products are
when service is needed. available from your dealer. For
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be Tires information on how to clean and
checked periodically to ensure protect the vehicle’s interior and
Tires need to be properly inflated, exterior, see Interior Care on
that they light when braking. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining page 10‑76 and Exterior Care on
. With a multi-point inspection, the tires can save money, fuel, and page 10‑73.
your dealer can check the lamps can reduce the risk of tire failure.
and note any concerns. Wheel Alignment
. Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more Wheel alignment is critical for
visible treadwear indicators; cord ensuring that the tires deliver
or fabric showing through the optimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment may Windshield Wiper Blades
need to be adjusted include
pulling, improper vehicle For safety, appearance, and the Wiper blades need to be cleaned
handling, or unusual tire wear. best viewing, keep the windshield and kept in good condition to
clean and clear. provide a clear view.
. Your dealer has the required
equipment to ensure proper
. Signs of damage include . Signs of wear include streaking,
wheel alignment. scratches, cracks, and chips. skipping across the windshield,
. Trained dealer technicians can and worn or split rubber.
inspect the windshield and . Trained dealer technicians can
recommend proper replacement check the wiper blades and
if needed. replace them when needed.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑13.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, in
Canada 88863462).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Carrier Assembly— Differential (Rear SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, in
Drive Module) and Transfer Case Canada 89021678).
(Power Transfer Unit)
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C
Engine Oil Filter 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 20958479 CF179C
Spark Plugs 12622561 41-109
Wiper Blades
Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 25941805 —
Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 25941804 —
Rear – 30.0 cm (11.6 in) 25920067 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
2 NOTES
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑12 for more information.
Capacities
Application Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System 10.8 L 11.4 qt
Engine Oil with Filter 6.0 L 6.4 qt
Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal
Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill) 5.0 L 5.3 qt
Transfer Case Fluid 1.0 L 1.0 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑10 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing

Customer Information 13-1
Customer Roadside Assistance Program Reporting Safety Defects

(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Reporting Safety Defects to
Information Roadside Assistance the United States
Program (U.S. and Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information Scheduling Service the Canadian
Customer Satisfaction Appointments (U.S. and Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Procedure (U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Reporting Safety Defects to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Courtesy Transportation General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Customer Satisfaction Program (U.S. and
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4 Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Vehicle Data Recording and
Customer Assistance Offices Collision Damage Repair Privacy
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 (U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14 Vehicle Data Recording and
Customer Assistance Offices Service Publications Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-17 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Assistance for Text OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S. Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-21
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Radio Frequency
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-21
GM Mobility Reimbursement Radio Frequency
Program (U.S. and Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13-2 Customer Information
Customer Information STEP TWO: If after contacting a

member of dealership management,
When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's
Customer Satisfaction resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest
Procedure (U.S. and further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first.
Canada) Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your
Your satisfaction and goodwill are Canada, call General Motors of
important to your dealer and to dealer are committed to making
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns 1-800-263-3777 (English),
with the sales transaction or the with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer's sales or We encourage you to call the after following the procedure
service departments. Sometimes, toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you
however, despite the best intentions inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business
of all concerned, misunderstandings following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
can occur. If your concern has not give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
been resolved to your satisfaction, representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an
the following steps should be taken: . Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business
with a member of dealership from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive
management. Normally, concerns title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
can be quickly resolved at that level. the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle
If the matter has already been through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may
reviewed with the sales, service, . Dealership name and location. be required to resort to this informal
or parts manager, contact the owner dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the
of your dealership or the general
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
manager.
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning
decision given in your case, you Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
may reject it and proceed with any not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
other venue for relief available addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
to you. procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care
You may contact the BBB Auto Line and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
Program using the toll-free Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French),
telephone number or write them at participation in a no-charge or write to:
the following address: Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Care Centre
BBB Auto Line Program has committed to binding arbitration
Council of Better Business Bureaus, General Motors of Canada Limited
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005
Inc. factory-related vehicle service
4200 Wilson Boulevard 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Suite 800 the review of the facts involved by
Arlington, VA 22203-1838 an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN).
designed so that the entire dispute
This program is available in all settlement process, from the time
50 states and the District of you file your complaint to the final
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by decision, should be completed in
vehicle age, mileage, and other about 70 days. We believe our
factors. General Motors reserves impartial program offers advantages
the right to change eligibility over courts in most jurisdictions
limitations and/or discontinue its because it is informal, quick, and
participation in this program. free of charge.
Customer Satisfaction the good intentions of all parties STEP THREE

involved, sometimes a
Procedure (Mexico) misunderstanding may occur.
If your case is not resolved in a
reasonable amount of time by your
If you have a problem that has not dealer, please call the General
been satisfactorily handled through Motors Customer Assistance
the normal means, we suggest the Center (CAC) and provide the
following steps: following information:
STEP ONE . Name
Explain your case to your dealer . Address
Did you get the Warranty Extension service agent, service manager, . Phone number
Plan? This plan is recommended by dealer sales agent, or sales
General Motors to supplement the manager, depending on your case.
. Model year
warranty included with the new . Brand
vehicle purchase. Make sure that they have all
necessary information. They are . Vehicle Identification
See your dealer for details. interested in your continual Number (VIN)
satisfaction.
Customer Assistance . Mileage
Procedure STEP TWO . Delivery date
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are If you are not satisfied, please . Description of the problem
very important to your dealer and contact the general manager or your
. Dealership name
General Motors. dealership owner to ask for their
help. If they are not able to resolve . Dealership address
Normally, any problem with the
your case, ask them to contact the
transaction, sale, or usage of the See Customer Assistance Offices
right people at General Motors for
vehicle must be handled by your (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or
support, if needed.
dealer sales or service departments. Customer Assistance Offices
However, we recognize that despite (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
Customer Assistance Canada All e-mail inquiries to the Customer

Assistance Center (CAC) should be
Offices (U.S. and Canada) General Motors of Canada Limited
sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com.
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
Chevrolet encourages customers to
CA1-163-005 Mexico
call the toll-free number for
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
assistance. However, if a customer 01-800-466-0811
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
www.gm.ca United States and Canada
the letter should be addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English) 1-866-466-8190
United States and Puerto Rico 1-800-263-7854 (French)
Chevrolet Motor Division 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Costa Rica
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Telephone devices (TTYs)) 00-800-052-1005
Center Roadside Assistance:
P.O. Box 33170 1-800-268-6800 Guatemala
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 Overseas 1-800-999-5252
www.Chevrolet.com
Please contact the local General Panama
1-800-222-1020
Motors Business Unit. 00-800-052-0001
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: Customer Assistance Dominican Republic
1-800-243-8872 Offices (Mexico) 1-888-751-5301
From U.S. Virgin Islands: To contact the Customer Assistance El Salvador
1-800-496-9994 Center (CAC), use the phone
numbers listed in this section. 800-6273
Customer assistance is available Honduras
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from 800-0122-6101
09:00 to 15:00 hours.
Customer Assistance for Membership Benefits H (Other Account Information):

Text Telephone (TTY) E (Vehicle Information): View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Download owner manuals and view radio, and OnStar account
Users (U.S. and Canada) vehicle-specific how-to videos. information.
To assist customers who are deaf, F (Live Chat Support):
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
G (Maintenance Information): Chat live
View maintenance schedules, with online help representatives.
and who use Text Telephones
required alerts, OnStar onboard Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
vehicle diagnostic information, and your vehicle.
equipment available at its Customer
schedule service appointments.
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in Chevrolet Owner Centre
the U.S. can communicate with I (Service History): View
(Canada) chevroletowner.ca
Chevrolet by dialing: printable dealer-recorded service
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in records and self-recorded service Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. records. Centre:
D (Preferred Dealer . Chat live with online help
Online Owner Center Information): Select a preferred representatives.
dealer and view dealer location, . Use the Vehicle Tools section.
Online Owner Experience maps, phone numbers, and hours.
(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com . Access third party enthusiast
J (Warranty Tracking sites and social media networks.
The Chevrolet online owner Information): Track the vehicle’s
experience is a one-stop resource warranty information. . Locate owner resources such as
that allows interaction with lease-end, financing, and
Chevrolet and keeps important J (Recall Information): View warranty information.
vehicle-specific information in one active recalls or search by Vehicle
place. Identification Number (VIN). See
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
on page 12‑1.

. Retrieve your favorite articles, required for the vehicle, such as Roadside Assistance provides
quizzes, tips, and multimedia hand controls or a wheelchair/ assistance to the driver and
galleries organized into the scooter lift for the vehicle. passengers while driving the vehicle
Features and Auto Care within your city of residence or on
Sections. For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or any passable road in Mexico, the
. Download the owner manual for call the GM Mobility Assistance United States, and Canada.
your vehicle, quickly and easily. Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text Services are subject to the
Telephone (TTY) users, call limitations described in the following
. Find the pages. Program coverage varies by
Chevrolet-recommended 1-800-833-9935.
country.
maintenance services for your General Motors of Canada also has
vehicle. a Mobility Program. Call Roadside Assistance is available
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for 24 hours a day, 365 days of
GM Mobility details. TTY users call the year.
Reimbursement Program 1-800-263-3830. This program expires two years
from the date of the invoice for the
(U.S. and Canada) Roadside Assistance vehicle, regardless of vehicle
mileage and changes in vehicle
Program (Mexico) ownership.
As a new owner, your vehicle is
For more information about the
automatically enrolled in the
renewal of this program at the end
Roadside Assistance program. The
of its term, contact the Chevrolet
services are available at no cost
Customer Assistance Center at
under the terms and conditions of
01-800-466-0800.
This program is available to the program. The Roadside
qualified applicants for cost Assistance program is not part of,
reimbursement of eligible or included, in the coverage
aftermarket adaptive equipment provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Services Provided
. Lock-Out Service: Service to . Emergency Towing: Tow to the
unlock the vehicle if you are nearest dealer for warranty
. Flat Tire Change: If unable to locked out. service if the vehicle cannot be
change a flat tire, Roadside driven.
Assistance will provide towing
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
service to the nearest authorized jump start a dead battery. If the vehicle is involved in an
Chevrolet dealership. It is the . *Emergency Messages: accident during the commission
owner's responsibility for the Transmission of urgent phone of a crime, administrative
repair or replacement of the tire. messages. violation, or breach of traffic
This service is limited to the regulations, Roadside
transfer of the vehicle to the
. *Emergency Calls: Call for Assistance will not provide
repair facility. emergency services. service. When the vehicle is not
. *Dealership Location accessible to be towed, all
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: maneuvers required to access it
Delivery of enough fuel for the Assistance: Information
regarding addresses and will be at the owner's expense.
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station. telephone numbers for Chevrolet If the vehicle is in another city
dealers. outside of your residence,
Roadside Assistance is limited
to moving the vehicle to the
nearest dealer. If you would like
the vehicle moved to a different
dealer, you will be asked to
cover the difference in cost at
the time of the move.
If the vehicle cannot be received

. *Trip Interruption: This service Roadside Assistance will
by the nearest Chevrolet dealer is provided if you are prevented coordinate hotel
due to scheduling conflicts, the from further usage of your accommodations for all vehicle
vehicle will be taken to a safe vehicle while traveling and it is travelers for up to two nights.
place where it will remain for up not possible for the nearest
Chevrolet dealership to repair A rental car will be provided for
to 48 hours until it can be taken up to two days and the vehicle
to the dealer. If the storage costs the vehicle the same day,
requiring the vehicle to stay at must be returned to its original
exceed the amount authorized, destination, excluding vehicles
the owner is responsible to pay the dealership for a night or
more. If this happens, in addition with a carrying capacity greater
the difference at the time of than 3.5 tons.
service. Contact Roadside to the previously listed services
Assistance for more information and prior to confirmation by the Complimentary Transportation: If
on authorized amounts. dealership, you are entitled to you prefer to continue your trip
choose one of the following to the intended destination or
alternatives, within the limits of return to your place of
existing Roadside Assistance residence, and the trip requires
program guidelines. If the costs more than eight hours driving on
exceed the amount authorized the road, transportation for the
for these services, you must pay driver and passengers by first
the difference at the time of class bus or coach commercial
service. airline will be provided to a
location chosen by Roadside
Assistance, depending on
availability at the chosen
destination. Restrictions apply
based on vehicle specifications.
If you are on the road, taxi Services Not Included in Roadside

. Food service, beverages,
service to the nearest bus Assistance telephone calls, or other extra
station or airport will be costs. Accommodation costs
Roadside Assistance does not apply only to Mexico per the
provided. cover or reimburse services for the terms and conditions of the
. *Complimentary following: Roadside Assistance program.
Transportation for Vehicle Pick . Events caused by fraud or bad
Up: Transportation to pick up
. Any damage to the vehicle
faith by the driver. without intent, derived from the
your vehicle after repairs are
complete. Once the dealer has . Vehicle immobilization situations services provided.
reported that the vehicle has due to a major force or . Cost of towing a trailer when
been repaired, Roadside unforeseen circumstances, such choosing a Chevrolet dealer that
Assistance will provide bus or as natural phenomena of an is nearest to the temporary
commercial airline one-way extraordinary nature, storage facility for the disabled
service (subject to availability) earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, vehicle.
for the person designated by you and other cyclonic storms.
to collect your vehicle at the
. Cost of all maneuvers required
. Vehicle immobilization situations to access the vehicle when it is
dealership's location if you or the arising from car accidents
designated person are not in the not available to be towed.
caused by the driver of the
same town or city as the vehicle or third parties. This
. Cost of fuel provided.
dealership. means any occurrence that Routine vehicle repair costs are not
*These services are not provided for causes physical injury to the covered by the Roadside
U.S. or Canada residents. All occupants and/or the vehicle Assistance program. For more
services provided in the U.S. and caused by external forces. information, see your new vehicle
Canada are at the owner's expense . Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar, warranty.
and will be reimbursed by Roadside armed forces or police actions
Assistance. which prevent timely delivery of
assistance services.

. Odometer reading, Vehicle
Contacting Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance Identification Number (VIN), and
Roadside Assistance services are of Program (U.S. and delivery date of the vehicle.
no cost to you and available Canada)
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
. Description of the problem.
Costs are only incurred in situations For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
Coverage
that exceed the limits of the 1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone
program, some of which are listed (TTY): 1-888-889-2438). Services are provided up to 5 years/
previously in this section. 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
comes first.
To contact Roadside Assistance by call 1-800-268-6800.
phone, use the following numbers: In the U.S., anyone driving the
Service is available 24 hours a day,
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
Mexico 365 days a year.
person driving the vehicle without
01-800-466-0800 Calling for Assistance permission from the owner is not
covered.
United States When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information Roadside Assistance is not a part of
1-866-466-8901 the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ready:
Canada Chevrolet and General Motors of
. Your name, home address, and Canada Limited reserve the right to
1-800-268-6800 home telephone number. make any changes or discontinue
E-mail . Telephone number of your the Roadside Assistance program at
location. any time without notification.
asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com
. Location of the vehicle. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Chevrolet reserves the right to make Canada Limited reserve the right to
any changes or discontinue the . Model, year, color, and license
limit services or payment to an
Roadside Assistance program at plate number of the vehicle.
owner or driver if they decide the
any time without notification.
claims are made too often, or the

. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to
same type of claim is made many change a flat tire with the spare Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
times. tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
Services Provided properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian.
responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be
. Emergency Fuel Delivery:
replacement of the tire if it is not restricted. Propane and other
Delivery of enough fuel for the
covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through
vehicle to get to the nearest
this service.
service station. . Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
. Lock-Out Service: Service to jump start a dead battery.
registration is required.
unlock the vehicle if you are Services Not Included in
locked out. A remote unlock may . Trip Interruption Benefits and
Roadside Assistance
be available if you have OnStar. Assistance: Must be over
For security reasons, the driver . Impound towing caused by 250 kilometers from where your
must present identification violation of any laws. trip was started to qualify.
before this service is given. . Legal fines. General Motors of Canada
Limited requires
. Emergency Tow from a Public . Mounting, dismounting, pre-authorization, original
Road or Highway: Tow to the or changing of snow tires, detailed receipts, and a copy of
nearest Chevrolet dealer for chains, or other traction devices. the repair orders. Once
warranty service, or if the vehicle
. Towing or services for vehicles authorization has been received,
was in a crash and cannot be
driven on a non-public road or the Roadside Assistance advisor
driven. Assistance is also given
highway. will help to make arrangements
when the vehicle is stuck in the
and explain how to receive
sand, mud, or snow.
payment.

. Alternative Service: If If the vehicle cannot be scheduled Several Courtesy Transportation
assistance cannot be provided into the service department options are available to assist in
right away, the Roadside immediately, keep driving it until it reducing inconvenience when
Assistance advisor may give can be scheduled for service, warranty repairs are required.
permission to get local unless, of course, the problem is
emergency road service. You will Courtesy Transportation is not a
safety related. If it is, please call part of the New Vehicle Limited
receive payment, up to $100, your dealership, let them know this,
after sending the original receipt Warranty. A separate booklet
and ask for instructions. entitled “Limited Warranty and
to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be If your dealer requests you to bring Owner Assistance Information”
covered, however any cost for the vehicle for service, you are furnished with each new vehicle
parts and labor for repairs not urged to do so as early in the work provides detailed warranty coverage
covered by the warranty are the day as possible to allow for information.
owner responsibility. same-day repair.
Transportation Options
Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Warranty service can generally be
Program (U.S. and completed while you wait. However,
Appointments (U.S. and if you are unable to wait, GM helps
Canada) Canada) to minimize inconvenience by
To enhance your ownership providing several transportation
When the vehicle requires warranty
experience, we and our participating options. Depending on the
service, contact your dealer and
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy circumstances, your dealer can offer
request an appointment. By
Transportation, a customer support one of the following:
scheduling a service appointment
and advising the service consultant program for vehicles with the Shuttle Service
of your transportation needs, your Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada), Shuttle service is the preferred
dealer can help minimize your
extended powertrain, and/or means of offering Courtesy
inconvenience.
hybrid-specific warranties in both Transportation. Dealers may provide
the U.S. and Canada. shuttle service to get you to your
destination with minimal interruption Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program

of your daily schedule. This includes Your dealer may arrange to provide Information
one-way or round-trip shuttle service you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
within reasonable time and distance All program options, such as shuttle
reimburse you for a rental vehicle service, may not be available at
parameters of your dealer's area. that you obtain if the vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact your
Public Transportation or Fuel for an overnight warranty repair. dealer for specific information about
Reimbursement Rental reimbursement will be limited availability. All Courtesy
and must be supported by original Transportation arrangements will be
If the vehicle requires overnight receipts. This requires that you sign
warranty repairs, and public administered by appropriate dealer
and complete a rental agreement personnel.
transportation is used instead of and meet state/provincial, local, and
your dealer's shuttle service, the rental vehicle provider requirements. General Motors reserves the right to
expense must be supported by Requirements vary and may include unilaterally modify, change,
original receipts and can only be up minimum age requirements, or discontinue Courtesy
to the maximum amount allowed by insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Transportation at any time and to
GM for shuttle service. In addition, You are responsible for fuel usage resolve all questions of claim
for U.S. customers, should you charges and may also be eligibility pursuant to the terms and
arrange transportation through a responsible for taxes, levies, usage conditions described herein at its
friend or relative, limited fees, excessive mileage, or rental sole discretion.
reimbursement for reasonable fuel usage beyond the completion of the
expenses may be available. Claim repair. Collision Damage Repair
amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original It may not be possible to provide a (U.S. and Canada)
receipts. See your dealer for like vehicle as a courtesy rental. If the vehicle is involved in a
information regarding the allowance collision and it is damaged, have the
amounts for reimbursement of fuel damage repaired by a qualified
or other transportation costs. technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish the vehicle resale performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair
value, and safety performance can these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained
be compromised in subsequent are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable
collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any equipment.
related failures are not covered by
Collision Parts that warranty. Insuring the Vehicle
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also Protect your investment in the GM
parts made with the same materials available. These are made by vehicle with comprehensive and
and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may collision insurance coverage. There
parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle. are significant differences in the
originally built. Genuine GM As a result, these parts may fit quality of coverage afforded by
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/ various insurance policy terms.
ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not Many insurance policies provide
appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent reduced protection to the GM
are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not vehicle by limiting compensation for
GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle damage repairs through the use of
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some
Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not
may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts.
parts are typically removed from When purchasing insurance, we
vehicles that were total losses in Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that the
prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you vehicle will be repaired with GM
parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that original equipment collision parts.
undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever If such insurance coverage is not
A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer available from your current
part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching
maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier.
designed appearance and safety state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and Repair Process
insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment In the event that the vehicle requires
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends
Genuine Manufacturer replacement .
that you take an active role in its
Owner name, address, and repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
you may be charged at the end of repair facility of choice, take the
the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs model year.
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
leave the scene of a crash until all
. Insurance company and policy recycled parts will not be covered by
matters have been taken care of.
number. the GM vehicle warranty.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair.
officer. Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
to police and other parties involved See “Collision Parts” earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
in the crash. section. the repair professional, and insist on
For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Roadside Assistance Program Will You See after an Airbag if the vehicle is leased, you may be
(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or Roadside Inflates? on page 3‑29. obligated to have the vehicle
Assistance Program (U.S. and repaired with Genuine GM parts,
Canada) on page 13‑11. even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions Current and Past Models
company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
Technical Service Bulletins and
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
Manuals are available for current
repair valuation based on that
Owner Information and past model GM vehicles.
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written ORDER TOLL FREE:
contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended 1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. The For Credit Card Orders Only
long as the cost stays within Owner Manual includes the (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
models.
Service Publications Or write to:
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Incorporated
Manual. Attention: Customer Service
Service Manuals 47911 Halyard Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: Plymouth, MI 48170
Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
and repair information on the shipping fees. Prices are subject to change without
engines, transmission, axle, notice and without incurring
suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Portfolio: Owner obligation. Allow ample time for
steering, body, etc. Manual only. delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
Service Bulletins
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
Service Bulletins give additional shipping fees. funds.
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Reporting Safety If NHTSA receives similar Reporting Safety Defects

complaints, it may open an to the Canadian
Defects investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
Government
Reporting Safety Defects of vehicles, it may order a recall If you live in Canada, and you
to the United States and remedy campaign. believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
Government However, NHTSA cannot
immediately, and notify General
become involved in individual
If you believe that your vehicle problems between you, your Motors of Canada Limited. Call
has a defect which could cause Transport Canada at
dealer, or General Motors. 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately To contact NHTSA, you may call Transport Canada
inform the National Highway the Vehicle Safety Hotline Road Safety Branch
Traffic Safety Administration toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 80 rue Noel
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
General Motors. http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Reporting Safety Defects
Administrator, NHTSA to General Motors
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Washington, D.C. 20590 Transport Canada) in a situation like
You can also obtain other this, notify General Motors.
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Recording and This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
Center Privacy main purpose of an EDR is to
P.O. Box 33170 record, in certain crash or near
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 The vehicle has a number of
computers that record information crash-like situations, such as an air
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 about the vehicle’s performance and bag deployment or hitting a road
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 how it is driven. For example, the obstacle, data that will assist in
(French), or write: vehicle uses computer modules to understanding how a vehicle’s
monitor and control engine and systems performed. The EDR is
General Motors of Canada Limited
transmission performance, to designed to record data related to
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: vehicle dynamics and safety
CA1-163-005 monitor the conditions for airbag
deployment and deploy them in a systems for a short period of time,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
crash, and, if equipped, to provide typically 30 seconds or less. The
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 EDR in this vehicle is designed to
antilock braking to help the driver
control the vehicle. These modules record such data as:
may store data to help the dealer . How various systems in your
technician service the vehicle. vehicle were operating;
Some modules may also store data
about how the vehicle is operated,
. Whether or not the driver and
such as rate of fuel consumption or passenger safety belts were
average speed. These modules may buckled/fastened;
retain personal preferences, such as . How far (if at all) the driver was
radio presets, seat positions, and depressing the accelerator and/
temperature settings. or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
These data can help provide a To read data recorded by an EDR, OnStar®
better understanding of the special equipment is required, and
circumstances in which crashes and access to the vehicle or the EDR is If the vehicle is equipped with
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are needed. In addition to the vehicle OnStar® and has an active
recorded by your vehicle only if a manufacturer, other parties, such as subscription, additional data may be
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no law enforcement, that have the collected through the OnStar
data are recorded by the EDR under special equipment, can read the system. This includes information
normal driving conditions and no information if they have access to about the vehicle’s operation; about
personal data (e.g., name, gender, the vehicle or the EDR. collisions involving the vehicle; the
age, and crash location) are use of the vehicle and its features;
GM will not access this data or and, in certain situations, the
recorded. However, other parties, share it with others except: with the
such as law enforcement, could location and approximate GPS
consent of the vehicle owner or, speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
combine the EDR data with the type if the vehicle is leased, with the
of personally identifying data OnStar Terms and Conditions and
consent of the lessee; in response Privacy Statement on the OnStar
routinely acquired during a crash to an official request by police or
investigation. website.
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Infotainment System Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

If the vehicle is equipped with a Identification (RFID) Statement
navigation system as part of the RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
infotainment system, use of the vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
system may result in the storage of pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
destinations, addresses, telephone system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
numbers, and other trip information. connection with conveniences such rules and with Industry Canada
See the infotainment manual for as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
information on stored data and for transmitters for remote door locking/
deletion instructions. Operation is subject to the following
unlocking and starting, and two conditions:
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in 1. The device may not cause
GM vehicles does not use or record harmful interference.
personal information or link with any 2. The device must accept any
other GM system containing interference received, including
personal information. interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
2 NOTES
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Press = to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 that can connect to a live Advisor Press Q to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicle’s key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Press Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an Press the OnStar Emergency button
Advisor. > to get a priority connection to an
Emergency Advisor available
24/7 to:
14-2 OnStar
. Get help for an emergency.
OnStar Services automatic door locks, and can help
police locate the vehicle if it is
. Be a Good Samaritan or
respond to an AMBER Alert. stolen.
Emergency
. Get crisis assistance and
evacuation routes.
With Automatic Crash Response, Navigation
the built-in system can automatically
OnStar navigation requires the
connect to help in most crashes,
Directions and Connections
even if help cannot be requested.
service plan.
Press > to connect to an
Press Q to receive directions or
Emergency Advisor. GPS
have them sent to the vehicle
technology is used to identify the
navigation screen, if equipped.
vehicle location and can provide
Destinations can also be forwarded
critical information to emergency
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
personnel. The Advisor is also
The OnStar mapping database is
trained to offer critical assistance in
continuously updated. For coverage
emergency situations before first
maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)
responders arrive.
www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Security Turn-by-Turn Navigation
OnStar provides services like Stolen 1. Press Q to connect to a live
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition Advisor.
Block, and Roadside Assistance,
if the vehicle is equipped. OnStar 2. Request directions.
can unlock the vehicle doors 3. Directions are downloaded to the
remotely, if it is equipped with vehicle.
4. Follow the voice-guided
commands.
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds Destination Download: Press Q,
During a Planned Route with the last direction given, then then request the Advisor to
responds with “OnStar ready,” download directions to the
Cancel Route then a tone. navigation system in the vehicle.
1. Press =. System responds: 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice After the call ends, press the “Go”
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say commands. button on the navigation screen to
“Cancel route.” System begin driving directions.
Get My Destination
responds: “Do you want to Destinations can also be
cancel directions?” 1. Press =. System responds: downloaded on the go. For
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: “OnStar ready,” then a tone. information about eNav, Destination
“OK, request completed, thank 2. Say “Get my destination.” Download, and coverage maps see
you, goodbye.” System responds with address www.onstar.com (U.S.),
and the distance to the www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Route Preview
destination, then responds with
1. Press =. System responds: “OnStar ready,” then a tone. Connections
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
2. Say “Route preview.” System commands. calls to be made and received from
responds with the next three the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
maneuvers. Other Navigation Services controlled from a cell phone through
Available from OnStar the OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice For coverage maps, see
commands. OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from www.onstar.com (U.S.),
Repeat MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Navigation or screen-based Hands-Free Calling
1. Press =. System responds:
navigation system. When ready, the
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. directions will be downloaded to the 1. Press =. System responds:
vehicle. “OnStar ready.”
14-4 OnStar
2. Say “Call.” System responds: End a Call 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
“Please say the name or number responds: “OK, calling
to call.” Press =. System responds: “Call <name tag>.”
ended.”
3. Say the entire number without Verify Minutes and Expiration
pausing, including a “1” and the Store a Name Tag for Speed
area code. System responds: Dialing Press = and say “Minutes” then
“OK calling.” “Verify” to check how many minutes
1. Press =. System responds: remain and their expiration date.
Calling 911 Emergency “OnStar ready.”
OnStar Mobile App
1. Press =. The system responds 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
“OnStar Ready,” followed by “Please say the number you Download the OnStar RemoteLink
a tone. would like to store.” mobile app to select Apple, Android
and BlackBerry devices to check
2. Say “Call.” The system responds 3. Say the entire number without vehicle fuel level, oil life, or tire
“Please say the name or number pausing. System responds: pressure; to start the vehicle (if
to call.” “Please say the name tag.” equipped) or unlock it; or to connect
3. Say “911” without pausing. The 4. Pick a name tag. System to an OnStar Advisor. For OnStar
system responds “911.” responds: “About to store <name RemoteLink information and
tag>. Does that sound OK?” compatibility, see www.onstar.com
4. Say “Call.” The system responds (U.S.), www.onstar.ca (Canada).
“OK, dialing 911.” 5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
again. System responds: “OK,
Retrieve My Number storing <name tag>.” Diagnostics
1. Press =. System responds: OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will
Place a Call Using a Stored perform a vehicle check every
“OnStar ready.” Number month. It will check the engine,
2. Say “My number.” System transmission, antilock brakes, and
1. Press =. System responds:
responds: “Your OnStar major vehicle systems. It also
Hands-Free Calling number is.” “OnStar ready.”
OnStar 14-5
checks the tire pressures, if the OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works
vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Information Automatic Crash Response,
Pressure Monitoring System. If a
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
diagnostics check is needed
Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
between e-mails, press Q, and an Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Advisor can run a check. Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
information. conditions:
Reactivation for Subsequent . In the U.S. see www.onstar.com
Owners (U.S.) or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR.
(1-888-466-7827).
Press Q and follow the prompts to . In Canada see www.onstar.ca
speak to an Advisor as soon as (Canada) or call
possible after acquiring the vehicle. 1-888-4-ONSTAR.
The Advisor will update vehicle (1-888-466-7827).
records and will explain the OnStar
. TTY 1-877-248-2080.
service offers and options available.
. Press Q to speak with an
Advisor.
14-6 OnStar
OnStar services require a vehicle service such as hills, tall buildings, TTY Users
electrical system, wireless service, tunnels, weather, electrical system
OnStar has the ability to
and GPS satellite technologies to be design and architecture of the
communicate to the deaf,
available and operating for features vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a
hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired
to function properly. These systems crash, or wireless phone network
customers while in the vehicle. The
may not operate if the battery is congestion or jamming.
available dealer-installed TTY
discharged or disconnected. See Radio Frequency Statement on system can provide in-vehicle
OnStar service cannot work unless page 13‑21 for information access to all of the OnStar services,
your vehicle is in a place where regarding Part 15 of the Federal except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
OnStar has an agreement with a Communications Commission (FCC) Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
wireless service provider for service rules and Industry Canada
in that area, and the wireless Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca
service provider has coverage, (Canada)
network capacity, reception, and Services for People with
Disabilities The website provides access to
technology compatible with OnStar account information, allows
service. Service involving location Advisors provide services to help management of the OnStar
information about the vehicle cannot subscribers with physical disabilities subscription, and viewing of videos
work unless GPS signals are and medical conditions. of each service. Get subscription
available, unobstructed, and plan pricing and sign up for OnStar
compatible with the OnStar Press Q for help with: Vehicle Diagnostics. Click on the
hardware. OnStar service may not . Locating a gas station with an “My Account” tab on the home
work if the OnStar equipment is not attendant to pump gas. page. The website navigation and
properly installed or it has not been services provided may vary by
properly maintained. If equipment or
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,
country.
software is added, connected, that meets accessibility needs.
or modified, OnStar service may not . Providing directions to the
work. Other problems beyond the closest hospital or pharmacy in
control of OnStar may prevent urgent situations.
OnStar 14-7
OnStar Personal Identification Potential Issues

. In emergency situations, OnStar
Number (PIN) can use the last stored GPS
OnStar cannot perform Remote location to send to emergency
A PIN is needed to access some of Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle responders.
the OnStar services, like Remote Assistance after the vehicle has
Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle been off continuously for five days.
. A temporary loss of GPS can
Assistance. You will be prompted to After five days, OnStar can contact cause loss of the ability to send
change the PIN the first time when Roadside Assistance and a a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
speaking with an Advisor. To locksmith to help gain access to the The Advisor may give a verbal
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar vehicle. route or may ask for a call back
and provide the Advisor with the after the vehicle is driven into an
current number.
Global Positioning open area.
System (GPS)
Warranty Cellular and GPS Antennas
. Obstruction of the GPS can
OnStar equipment may be occur in a large city with tall Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the New buildings; in parking garages; antenna to prevent blocking cellular
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The around airports; in tunnels, and GPS signal reception. Cellular
manufacturer of the vehicle underpasses, or parking reception is required for OnStar to
furnishes detailed warranty garages; or in an area with very send remote signals to the vehicle.
information. dense trees. If GPS signals are Unable to Connect to OnStar
not available, the OnStar system Message
Languages should still operate to call
The vehicle can be programmed to OnStar. However, OnStar could If there is limited cellular coverage
respond in English, French or have difficulty identifying the or the cellular network has reached
exact location. maximum capacity, this message
Spanish. Press Q and ask an
Advisor. Advisors can speak may come on. Press Q to try the
English, French or Spanish. call again or try again after driving a
few miles into another cellular area.
14-8 OnStar
Vehicle and Power Issues Privacy libcurl:

OnStar services require a vehicle The complete OnStar Privacy COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION
electrical system, wireless service, Statement may be found at NOTICE
and GPS satellite technologies to be www.onstar.com (U.S.), Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel
available and operating for features or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
to function properly. These systems Privacy-sensitive users of wireless
may not operate if the battery is communications are cautioned that All rights reserved.
discharged or disconnected. the privacy of any information sent Permission to use, copy, modify,
via wireless cellular communications and distribute this software for any
Add-on Electrical Equipment cannot be assured. Third parties purpose with or without fee is
The OnStar system is integrated may unlawfully intercept or access hereby granted, provided that the
into the electrical architecture of the transmissions and private above copyright notice and this
vehicle. Do not add any electrical communications without consent. permission notice appear in all
equipment. See Add-On Electrical copies.
Equipment on page 9‑50. Added OnStar - libcurl and unzip
acknowledgments THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
electrical equipment may interfere
“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
with the operation of the OnStar Certain OnStar components include ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
system and cause it to not operate. libcurl and unzip software. Below IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
are the notices and licenses LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
associated with this software: OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
OnStar 14-9
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF unzip: Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,

CONTRACT, TORT OR This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, Info-ZIP copyright and license. The Rich Wales, Mike White
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION definitive version of this document This software is provided “as is,”
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE should be available at ftp:// without warranty of any kind,
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ express or implied. In no event shall
THE SOFTWARE. license.html indefinitely. Info-ZIP or its contributors be held
Except as contained in this notice, Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All liable for any direct, indirect,
the name of a copyright holder shall rights reserved. incidental, special or consequential
not be used in advertising or damages arising out of the use of or
otherwise to promote the sale, use For the purposes of this copyright inability to use this software.
or other dealings in this Software and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as
the following set of individuals: Permission is granted to anyone to
without prior written authorization of use this software for any purpose,
the copyright holder. Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, including commercial applications,
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, and to alter it and redistribute it
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed freely, subject to the following
Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris restrictions:
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, 1. Redistributions of source code
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, must retain the above copyright
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, notice, definition, disclaimer, and
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, this list of conditions.
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,
14-10 OnStar
2. Redistributions in binary form 3. Altered versions–including, but “Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or

(compiled executables) must not limited to, ports to new “MacZip” without the explicit
reproduce the above copyright operating systems, existing ports permission of Info-ZIP. Such
notice, definition, disclaimer, and with new graphical interfaces, altered versions are further
this list of conditions in and dynamic, shared, or static prohibited from
documentation and/or other library versions–must be plainly misrepresentative use of the
materials provided with the marked as such and must not be Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
distribution. The sole exception misrepresented as being the addresses or of the
to this condition is redistribution original source. Such altered Info-ZIP URL(s).
of a standard UnZipSFX binary versions also must not be 4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
(including SFXWiz) as part of a misrepresented as being the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
self-extracting archive; that is Info-ZIP releases–including, but “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
permitted without inclusion of not limited to, labeling of the “Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
this license, as long as the altered versions with the names and “MacZip” for its own source
normal SFX banner has not “Info-ZIP” (or any variation and binary releases.
been removed from the binary or thereof, including, but not limited
disabled. to, different capitalizations),
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Appearance Care

What Will You See after an Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Accessories and
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
When Should an Airbag Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Assistance Program,
Add-On Electrical
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-25 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Airbags Audio Controller,
Additional Information
Adding Equipment to the Rear (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-23
Adjustments
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-15 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-23
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25, 7-29
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-11
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio System
Air Filter, Passenger
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Alarm Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Airbag System
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Automatic
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-22, 9-24 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
How Does an Airbag
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11, 7-12 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Antenna Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Passenger Sensing
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21 Automatic Transmission
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Antilock Brake Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
What Makes an Airbag
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Shift Lock Control
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Auxiliary
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Cargo

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-27 Cautions, Danger, and
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Voltage and Charging
and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-23
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-24
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 C Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-16
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Check
Brake
California Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-19
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Ignition
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Perchlorate Materials Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-23
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Child Restraints
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Infants and Young
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Lower Anchors and
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Capacities and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-44
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Carbon Monoxide Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51, 3-54
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
INDEX i-3
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Cover Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8, 8-9 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Devices
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, 5-8 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Diagnostics
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Text Telephone (TTY) Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Connections Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 Door
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Customer Information Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Service Publications Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-17 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Customer Satisfaction Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Coolant Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2, 13-4 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Drive Systems
Engine Temperature D All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-22, 9-24
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14 Driver Information
Engine Temperature Danger, Warnings, and Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24, 5-29
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Driving
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-19 Characteristics and
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Daytime Running Lamps/ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Automatic Headlamp Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Courtesy Transportation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-25
i-4 INDEX
Driving (cont'd) Engine Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-19
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-6 Check and Service Engine Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 F
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Coolant Temperature Features
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Coolant Temperature Filter,
Dual Automatic Climate Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Cooling System Messages . . .5-33 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
E Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Electrical Equipment, Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Electrical System Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17 Fluid
Engine Compartment Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-10
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Fuses and Circuit Overheated Protection Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Instrument Panel Fuse Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Fog Lamps
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Emergency Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-20 Front Seats
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-8
INDEX i-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 G H
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-48 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Filling a Portable Fuel
Gasoline Headlamps
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Gauges Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Engine Coolant Daytime Running Lamps/
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-39
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Automatic Headlamp
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Requirements, California . . . . .9-39
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Fuses
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Engine Compartment
Warning Lights and Heated
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Fuses and Circuit
General Information Heated and Ventilated Front
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Instrument Panel Fuse
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Heater
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
GM Mobility Reimbursement Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 High Voltage Devices and
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-6
i-6 INDEX
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-26 K Lighting

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Delayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-35
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Keyless Entry
How to Wear Safety Belts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
I L
Lights
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-37 Antilock Brake System
Ignition Transmission Lock
Lamps (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-19
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Infants and Young Children,
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Engine Coolant
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17 Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-21
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Instrument Panel
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
LATCH System High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Replacing Parts after a Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-14
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
J LATCH, Lower Anchors and StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-21
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Liftgate Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
INDEX i-7
Locks Messages Mirrors

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Automatic Dimming
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Battery Voltage and Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-33 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Lower Anchors and Tethers Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
for Children (LATCH Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Monitor System, Tire
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Object Detection System . . . . .5-36 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25, 7-29
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
M Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Maintenance Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 N
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Navigation
Maintenance Schedule Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Recommended Fluids Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
i-8 INDEX
O OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Parking

OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Object Detection System
Operation, Infotainment Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6, 7-8 Brake and P (Park)
Object Detection, Side Blind
Ordering Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-23
Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-17 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-20
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Outlets Passenger Airbag Status
Off-Road
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Overheated Engine Passenger Compartment Air
Oil
Protection Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-30
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Perchlorate Materials
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Overview, Infotainment Requirements, California . . . . . 10-2
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-5 Personalization
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-37
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
OnStar® P Phone
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Power
OnStar® Additional Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18
OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
INDEX i-9
Pregnancy, Using Safety Rear Seat Entertainment System Replacing LATCH System
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-36 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Privacy Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Replacing Safety Belt
Radio Frequency Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-35 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-22
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-21 Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5 Reporting Safety Defects
Program Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18
Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Proposition 65 Warning, Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Recommended Restraints
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
R Recommended Fluids and Retained Accessory
Radio Frequency Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-21 Records Ride Control Systems
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Radios Recreational Vehicle Roads
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11, 7-12 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 Reimbursement Program, Roadside Assistance
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, 7-19 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roof
Rear Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Controller (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Rear Climate Control Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8, 8-9 Replacement Parts Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Running the Vehicle While
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-36
i-10 INDEX
S Seats (cont'd) Shift Lock Control Function

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Check, Automatic
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Shifting
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Securing Child Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
How to Wear Safety Belts
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51, 3-54 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Security Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Signals, Turn and
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-22
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Spare Tire
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-21
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Safety Defects Reporting
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Specifications and
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18
Service Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Accessories and Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 StabiliTrak
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3 Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, 7-19
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-14 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-13
Maintenance, General Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Seats
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Publications Ordering Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-8
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-13 Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
INDEX i-11
Storage Areas Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, 5-8 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Tires Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Towing
Cargo Management System . . . 4-3 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-43
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-70
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-45 Trailer
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Transmission
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
System Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-44 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21, 7-1 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Transportation Program,
Terminology and Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
T Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Turn and Lane-Change
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Uniform Tire Quality Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Taillamps Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Turn Signal and Wheel Alignment and Tire
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-13 When It Is Time for New
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
i-12 INDEX
U Vehicle (cont'd) Wheels

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Alignment and Tire
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-31
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Uniform Tire Quality
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Vehicle Care Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-48
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 When It Is Time for New
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-43
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Voltage Devices and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
V Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Windshield
Vehicle Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
W Winter
Warning Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Identification Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-24
Warning Lights, Gauges,
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Wipers
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Wiring, High Voltage
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

2013 Chevrolet Traverse Owner

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

2013 Chevrolet Traverse Owner

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC 2nd Edition - 11/13/12 Black plate (1,1)

2013 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Trademarks and License

2013 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

Danger, Warnings, and Notice: This means there is Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart B : Engine Coolant Temperature } : Power

In Brief Head Restraint Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

20. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on Initial Drive

Power Door Locks K: Press to unlock the doors.

Windows Seat Adjustment 3. Try to move the seat back and

Uplevel Shown, Base Similar

3. Lumbar Control Memory Features Second Row Seats

Third Row Seats Heated and Ventilated

Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons

2. Disconnect the rear safety belt

Interior Mirror Steering Wheel Interior Lighting

Dome Lamp Override Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on the

See: Windshield Wiper/Washer Windshield Washer

1. Fan Control 5. Air Delivery Mode Control

3. Temperature Control 7. Rear Window Defogger

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Vehicle Features © or ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between

Storing a Favorite Station Setting the Clock

Radio with Touchscreen D : Press to go to the Home Page.

1. From the AM, FM, or SiriusXM

Performance and Tire Pressure Monitor

Combine several trips into a

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

If locked out of the vehicle, call

Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

If enabled through the Driver Pressing K on the RKE transmitter

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Programming Transmitters to Notice: When replacing the

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

10 minutes are added, allowing the Conditions in Which the

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Automatic Door Locks If the driver side power door lock

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

Doors WARNING (Continued)

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The power liftgate can be power continue to completion. If the

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

Testing the Alarm Immobilizer The security light comes on if there

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Folding Mirrors Resetting the Power Folding Blind Spot Mirrors

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19

The vehicle aerodynamics are Power Windows

2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Express-Up/Express-Down Programming the Power Anti-Pinch Feature

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-21

The rear window lockout feature Sun Visors Roof